JP2023177108A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine that suppresses a decrease in game interest.SOLUTION: When a specific condition including that variation display of identification information is executed a specific number of times is satisfied, a specific game state is reached in which a start area is easily opened. When the remaining number of times of the variation display of the identification information until the specific game state is reached due to the satisfaction of the specific condition is a first number of times, a first light emitting performance may be executed in which light emission means emits light in a first light emission mode. When the remaining number of times is a second number of times different from the first number of times, a second light emitting performance may be executed in which the light emission means emits light in a second light emission mode.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 57

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

Conventionally, in pachinko gaming machines, a jackpot determination is performed to determine whether or not a jackpot has been won on the condition that a game ball enters a starter opening that can be opened and closed. When a jackpot determination is made, a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner to notify the jackpot determination result. When the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot in the variable display of the special symbols, a jackpot game involving opening of a jackpot that can be opened and closed is executed (see Patent Document 1).

In the gaming machine according to Patent Document 1, after a jackpot game is executed, the opening/closable starting port may enter a time-saving state in which it is easier to open than the normal gaming state (non-time-saving state).

JP 2018-88993 Publication

However, there is still room for improvement in gaming machines that can be put into a gaming state in which the opening/closable starting port is easier to open than in the normal gaming state (non-time saving state).

The gaming machine according to the present invention includes:
A game execution means that executes a variable display of identification information based on winnings in a start area that can be opened and closed, and executes a specific game advantageous to the player when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner in the variable display of the identification information. and,
A performance execution means capable of performing the performance,
A gaming machine equipped with a light emitting means capable of emitting light,
In a predetermined gaming state, when a specific condition including that the identification information is displayed in a fixed manner a specific number of times without the identification information being stopped and displayed in the specific manner is satisfied, the game execution means controls the starting area. is set to a specific game state where it is easy to open,
The effect executing means causes the light emitting means to emit light in a first light emitting mode when the remaining number of times the identification information is fluctuated and displayed until the specific gaming state is reached due to the establishment of the specific condition is a first number. 1 light emission effect may be performed, and when the remaining number of times is a second number of times different from the first number of times, a second light emission effect may be executed in which the light emitting means is caused to emit light in a second light emission mode. It is characterized by

According to the present invention, it is possible to suppress a decline in gaming interest.

1 is a perspective view of a pachinko game machine according to a basic embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view of a game board unit. (A) is a front view illustrating the standby state of the movable plate body, (B) is a front view illustrating the moving state of the movable plate body, and (C) is a front view illustrating the rotating state of the movable plate body. It is a front view of display devices. FIG. 2 is a rear view of a pachinko gaming machine according to a basic embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the game control board side. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the production control board side. (A) is a table showing general map related determination information, and (B) is a table showing special pattern related determination information. (A) is a configuration example of a hit determination table, (B) is a configuration example of a normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table, and (C) is a configuration example of an auxiliary game control table. (A) is a configuration example of a jackpot determination table, (B) is a configuration example of a jackpot symbol type determination table, and (C) is a configuration example of a reach determination table. This is a configuration example of a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table. This is a configuration example of a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table. It is an example of a structure of a 1st look-ahead determination table. It is an example of a structure of a 2nd look-ahead determination table. (A) is a configuration example of a jackpot game control table, and (B) is a configuration example of a game state setting table. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a demo video, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of a setting screen. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a first normal background image, (B) is a diagram showing an example of a second normal background image, and (C) is a diagram showing an example of a third normal background image. FIG. 3D is a diagram showing an example of a background image for probability variation, and FIG. 3E is a diagram showing an example of a background image for time saving. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot opening performance, (B) is a diagram showing an example of a round performance, and (C) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot ending performance. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a production pattern, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of a production pattern display area. It is a diagram showing an example of a special symbol variation effect with no reach. It is a diagram showing an example from the start of the special figure variation performance until reaching the reach. It is a figure showing an example of N reach. It is a figure showing an example of L reach. It is a figure showing an example of L reach, and is a continuation of Drawing 23. It is a figure showing an example of SP reach. 26 is a diagram showing an example of SP reach, and is a continuation of FIG. 25. FIG. FIG. 26 is a diagram illustrating an example of SP reach, and is a continuation of FIG. 26. It is a figure showing an example of a movable object production. It is a figure showing an example of operation performance. It is a diagram showing an example of a hold performance. It is a figure showing an example of a pending icon change notice. It is a figure showing an example of a pending icon change notice. It is a flowchart of game control main processing. It is a flowchart of game control side timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of sensor detection processing. 36 is a flowchart of sensor detection processing, and is a diagram continuing from FIG. 35. FIG. It is a flowchart of normal operation processing. It is a flowchart of special operation processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol standby processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol confirmation processing. It is a flowchart of production control main processing. It is a flowchart of 1ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of 10ms timer interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart of received command analysis processing. 47 is a flowchart of received command analysis processing, and is a diagram continuing from FIG. 46. FIG. It is a front view of the game board unit according to the first embodiment. It is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the configuration of the game board 1 after the game ball enters the second big prize opening 15. It is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration on the game control board side according to the first embodiment. (A) is a configuration example of the jackpot determination table according to the first embodiment, and (B) is a configuration example of the jackpot symbol type determination table according to the first embodiment. It is a configuration example of a jackpot game control table according to the first embodiment. (A) is a configuration example of a normal small win game control table, and (B) is a configuration example of a time saving small win game control table. (A) is a time chart showing the flow of the normal small winning game, and (B) is a time chart showing the flow of the time saving small winning game. It represents the relationship between the type of special symbol that triggers the occurrence of a jackpot game (special symbol type), the gaming state that changes with the end of the jackpot game corresponding to the special symbol type, and the ending conditions related to the gaming state. This is a configuration example of a gaming state setting table. FIG. 2 is a front view schematically showing the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment in order to explain the first to twelfth light emitting sections. It is a figure showing the relationship between the ceiling remaining number of times range and the specific contents of the light emission mode of the frame lamp. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how a ceiling remaining number of times suggestion effect is being executed. It is a diagram showing the relationship between special presentation modes (special audio presentation mode and special light emission presentation mode) and contact release elapsed time. This is a time chart showing the relationship between the contact release elapsed time, the gaming situation, and the special performance mode (special audio performance mode/special light emission mode) when the performance control microcomputer enters the customer waiting state after grasping the release of the handle. be. A time chart showing the relationship between the contact release elapsed time, the gaming situation, and the special performance mode (special audio performance mode/special light emission mode) when the performance control microcomputer enters the customer waiting state before grasping the release of the handle. It is. (A) is a configuration example of the first special performance execution determination table, (B) is a configuration example of the second special performance execution determination table, and (C) is a configuration example of the first special performance mode determination table. , (D) is a configuration example of the second special performance mode determination table. It is a diagram showing a specific example where a special effect is executed due to the occurrence of the first same cycle subsequent special figure 1 suspension. It is a diagram showing a specific example where a special effect is executed due to the occurrence of the second same cycle subsequent special figure 1 suspension. (A) is a configuration example of the operation performance execution determination table, and (B) is a configuration example of the operation performance mode determination table. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining operation promotion performance. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first operation result effect. It is an explanatory view for explaining the 2nd operation result production. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a third operation result effect when a release operation is performed during the release operation validity period. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a third operation result effect when a cancellation operation is performed before the cancellation operation validity period has elapsed. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a third operation result presentation when a cancellation operation is performed after the cancellation operation validity period has elapsed.

<Basic embodiment>
First, a basic embodiment of the present invention, which is the premise of the characteristic parts of the gaming machine of the present invention, will be specifically described with reference to the drawings. In each referenced figure, the same parts are given the same reference numerals, and overlapping explanations regarding the same parts will be omitted in principle. In addition, in the following, in order to simplify the description, by writing a symbol or code that refers to information, a signal, a physical quantity, a member, etc., the name of the information, signal, physical quantity, member, etc. for the symbol or code will be omitted or abbreviated. Sometimes.

1. Mechanical Configuration of Gaming Machine Pachinko gaming machine PY, which is a basic embodiment of the gaming machine of the present invention, will be described. First, the mechanical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine PY will be explained using FIGS. 1 to 4. In the following description, the horizontal, vertical, and vertical directions of each part of the pachinko game machine PY refer to the horizontal, vertical, and vertical directions (as viewed from the front) for the player facing the pachinko game machine PY. Furthermore, "front" refers to the direction from the pachinko machine PY approaching the player facing the pachinko machine PY, and "backward" refers to the direction approaching the pachinko machine PY from the player facing the pachinko machine PY. ,explain.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko game machine PY includes a game board unit YU including a game board 1, and a game machine frame 2 housing the game board unit YU inside. The gaming machine frame 2 includes a frame-shaped outer frame 21 that is fixed to the gaming parlor, an inner frame 22 that is attached to the outer frame 21 and to which the game board unit YU is attached, and a front frame that is rotatably supported by the inner frame 22. A door 23 is provided.

The outer circumferential shapes of the outer frame 21, the inner frame 22, and the front door 23 when viewed from the front are approximately the same. An inner frame 22 is attached to the front surface of the outer frame 21.

The front door 23 can be opened and closed with respect to the inner frame 22. The front door 23 includes a frame-shaped front frame 23m having a large substantially vertically rectangular opening formed in the center thereof, and a transparent plate 23t fitted into the opening. When the front door 23 is closed, the game board 1 included in the game board unit YU and the transparent plate 23t face each other. The transparent plate 23t is a transparent synthetic resin plate formed into a substantially vertically long rectangular shape. Therefore, when the pachinko game machine PY is installed in a game parlor, a player in front of the pachinko game machine PY cannot visually recognize the game area 6 formed on the front surface of the game board 1 through the transparent plate 23t. can. Note that a transparent glass plate may be used as the transparent plate 23t instead of the transparent synthetic resin plate. It is sufficient if the gaming area 6 can be viewed through the transparent plate 23t from the front of the pachinko gaming machine PY.

A handle 72k that can be rotated to fire a game ball is provided at the lower right portion of the front surface of the front frame 23m. The handle 72k can be rotated clockwise, and the amount by which the handle 72k is operated (rotation angle) is associated with the amount of force applied to the game ball (shooting strength) to make the game ball launch. There is. Therefore, the game ball is fired with a firing intensity that corresponds to the rotational operation of the handle 72k.

Further, at the lower part of the front surface of the front frame 23m, an upper plate 34 that largely protrudes forward and a lower plate 35 arranged directly below the upper plate 34 are provided. At the center of the front side of the upper plate 34, a first effect button 40k that can be pressed downward is provided. The operating portion of the first performance button 40k that visibly protrudes from the upper surface of the upper plate 34 is shaped into a hemispherical shape. Further, on the rear side of the upper surface of the upper tray 34, a supply ball storage hole 34A is formed for storing game balls supplied to the handle 72k. Further, on the upper surface of the lower tray 35, a surplus ball storage hole 35A is provided for storing surplus game balls that cannot be accommodated in the supply ball storage hole 34A.

Furthermore, an upper decorative body 31, a right decorative body 32, and a left decorative body 33 that protrude forward are provided above, on the right side, and on the left side of the transparent plate 23t on the front surface of the front frame 23m. On the bottom surface of the upper decorative body 31, a pair of two speakers 52 capable of outputting sound, specifically a speaker 52L arranged on the left side and a speaker 52R arranged on the right side, are arranged facing downward and arranged in the left and right direction. They are placed side by side at a distance. Further, a second effect button 41k that can be pressed downward is provided at the lower part of the right side decorative body 32. The operation part of the second performance button 41k is shaped like a rod. Furthermore, a frame lamp 53 capable of emitting light is provided from the right side decorative body 32 to the right front portion of the upper plate 34 and from the left side decorative body 33 to the front left portion of the upper plate 34.

Note that the positions and numbers of members and devices provided in the gaming machine frame 2 can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

Next, the game board unit YU will be explained using FIG. 2 in addition to FIG. 1. The game board unit YU includes a game board 1 and a board effect unit EU attached to the back of the game board 1. First, the game board 1 will be explained. The game board 1 is made of a transparent synthetic resin board. An opening 1A is formed approximately in the center of the game board 1 and is approximately circular when viewed from the front.

On the front surface of the game board 1, a substantially ring-shaped center decoration body 61 is formed to protrude forward along the opening 1A. Further, on the outside of the center decoration body 61, there is an outer rail 62 formed in a substantially ring shape so as to largely surround the center decoration body 61, and an outer rail 62 between the left side portion of the outer rail 62 and the center decoration body 61. 62 and a curved inner rail 63 substantially parallel to the center decorative body 61.

On the front surface of the game board 1, an area surrounded by the center decoration body 61, the outer rail 62, the inner rail 63, etc. forms the game area 6. That is, the front surface of the game board 1 is divided into the game area 6 and other areas by the center decoration body 61, the outer rail 62, and the inner rail 63. Further, the area surrounded by the outer rail 62 and the inner rail 63 forms a firing area 7 through which the fired game balls can pass to head toward the gaming area 6.

The game area 6 is an area into which game balls fired by operating the handle 72k can flow down, and is provided for playing games in the pachinko game machine PY. Note that a large number of game nails (not shown) are provided protruding from the game area 6. The game nails are used to properly control game balls that enter the game area 6 and flow down the game area 6 into the general prize opening 10, the first starting opening 11, the second starting opening 12, the gate 13, the big winning opening 14, etc. It constitutes a route that leads to.

A general winning device 10D is provided at a predetermined position in the gaming area 6. In the general winning device 10D, a general winning opening 10 is formed so that a game ball can be entered. When the game balls enter the general winning hole 10, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In addition, the game ball that entered the general winning hole 10 is discharged to the outside of the game area 6 as it is.

Further, a first starting winning device 11D is provided directly below the center of the center decoration body 61 in the gaming area 6. The first starting winning device 11D has a first starting opening 11 formed into which a game ball can enter. The first starting winning device 11D has a non-operating structure. Therefore, the ease with which the game ball enters the first starting port 11 remains constant (unchanged). When the game balls enter the first starting port 11, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In addition, the game ball that entered the first starting port 11 is discharged to the outside of the game area 6 as it is.

Note that a warp portion 61w is formed from the left side to the lower end of the center decoration body 61 to allow the game ball to pass therethrough. An entrance to the warp portion 61w is formed on the left side of the center decorative body 61. The game ball that has entered the warp section 61w passes through the inside of the warp section 61w and exits from the exit. A stage 61s on which a game ball can roll is provided near the exit of the warp section 61w and on the upper surface of the lower end of the center decorative body 61. A downward guide portion 61y that guides the game ball downward is provided at the tip of the stage 61s. A first starting port 11 is provided directly below this downward guide portion 61y.

Directly below the first starting port 11 in the gaming area 6, a second starting winning device (so-called "electric chew") 12D is provided. The electric chew 12D is formed with a second starting port 12 that can be changed into a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter and an open state in which a game ball can enter. The second starting port 12 takes a closed mode and an open mode by an electric tube opening/closing member 12k included in the electric tube 12D. That is, the second starting port 12 is opened and closed by the operation of the electric chew opening/closing member 12k.

The electric chew opening/closing member 12k is a substantially L-shaped member when viewed from the front, and normally closes the second starting port 12. The electric chew opening/closing member 12k can protrude forward from the retracted state in which the front end surface is flush with the gaming area 6. When the electric chew opening/closing member 12k protrudes forward, the electric chew opening/closing member 12k is in a state of protruding perpendicularly to the gaming area 6, and the second starting port 12 is opened to allow entry of a ball. Specifically, the vertical portion erected at the left end of the horizontal portion of the electric chew opening/closing member 12k receives the game ball, and is guided from the horizontal portion to the second starting port 12.

In this way, the game ball can enter the second starting port 12 only when the electric chew opening/closing member 12k is in the open state. When the game balls enter the second starting port 12, a predetermined number (for example, two) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In addition, the game ball that entered the second starting port 12 is discharged to the outside of the game area 6 as it is.

Further, a gate 13 is provided on the right side of the center decorative body 61. The gate 13 is configured to allow game balls to pass through. Even if the game ball passes through the gate 13, the prize ball is not paid out. Note that the game ball that has passed through the gate 13 flows down the game area 6 as it is.

On the right side of the first starting winning device 11D in the gaming area 6 and on the downstream side of the gate 13, a big winning device 14D is provided. The grand prize winning device 14D is formed with a grand prize opening 14 that can be changed into a closed mode in which a game ball cannot enter and an open mode in which a game ball can enter. The big prize opening 14 takes a closed mode and an open mode by an AT opening/closing member 14k included in the big winning device 14D. That is, the big prize opening 14 is opened and closed by the operation of the AT opening/closing member 14k.

The AT opening/closing member 14k is a movable member made of a flat plate having a generally horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and normally closes the big prize opening 14. A horizontal rotating shaft is provided at the lower end of the AT opening/closing member 14k. The AT opening/closing member 14k can be rotated approximately 90 degrees around its rotation axis so that its upper end is tilted forward. When the AT opening/closing member 14k rotates, the AT opening/closing member 14k comes into a state of protruding perpendicularly to the gaming area 6, and the big prize opening 14 is opened to allow entry of a ball.

In this way, the game ball can enter the big prize opening 14 only when the AT opening/closing member 14k is in the open state. When the game balls enter the grand prize opening 14, a predetermined number (14 in the basic embodiment) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In addition, the game ball that entered the big prize opening 14 is discharged to the outside of the game area 6 as it is.

Further, below the big winning device 14D in the gaming area 6, the upper surface thereof is formed diagonally downward to the left, and a guiding path 64 for guiding the game ball to the second starting port 12 is provided in the gaming area 6 (the front surface of the gaming board 1). It is provided so as to protrude forward from the front. Note that the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the guide path 64 can flow down toward the second starting port 12, but basically cannot enter the first starting port 11.

In addition, the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 11, the second starting port 12, the big winning port 14, and the general winning port 10, and the passage of the gaming ball through the gate 13 are collectively described as the first starting port 11, They are collectively referred to as "winning" to the second starting opening 12, the big winning opening 14, the general winning opening 10, and the gate 13.

By the way, the game area 6 in which the game ball can flow down can be divided into a left game area 6A on the left side of the center in the left-right direction, and a right game area 6B on the right side. The manner in which the handle 72k is operated to launch the game ball so that the game ball flows down the left game area 6A is referred to as "left-handed hitting". On the other hand, the manner in which the handle 72k is operated to shoot the game ball so that the game ball flows down the right game area 6B is referred to as "right-handed hitting".

In the gaming area 6, the flow path through which the game ball can flow down when the game ball is fired with left-hand hitting is called the first flow path R1, and the game ball can flow down when the game ball is fired with right-hand hitting. This flow path is referred to as a second flow path R2. The first passage R1 and the second passage R2 are also constituted by a large number of game nails (not shown).

A first starting port 11 and two general winning ports 10 are provided on the first flow path R1. Therefore, the player can aim to win a prize in the first starting opening 11 or the general winning opening 10 by shooting the game ball so as to flow down the first channel R1 by hitting the ball to the left. On the other hand, a second starting port 12, a gate 13, and a big winning port 14 are provided on the second flow path R2. Therefore, the player can aim to win a prize in the gate 13, the second starting opening 12, or the big prize opening 14 by firing the game ball so as to flow down the second flow path R2 by hitting the ball to the right.

In addition, at approximately the bottom of the gaming area 6, two out ports 19 are provided for discharging game balls that are hit into the gaming area 6 but do not win in any of the winning holes to the outside of the gaming area 6. There is. Further, the number of prize balls that are won in each winning hole can be set as appropriate.

Next, the board effect unit EU attached to the back of the game board 1 will be explained. The board effect unit EU is a unit made up of a plurality of devices that mainly perform effects. An image display device 50 and a board moving device 55 are attached to the board presentation unit EU.

The image display device 50 is configured with a 20-inch 3D liquid crystal display, and includes a display section 50a capable of displaying 3D images. The image display device 50 is placed several centimeters behind the game board 1.

The board movable device 55 includes an operable board movable body 55k. The platen movable body 55k includes a horizontally long plate-shaped elevating member 55k2 maintained in a horizontal state, and a substantially elliptical rotating member 55k1 provided at the center of the elevating member 55k2 in the left-right direction. The board movable body 55k is arranged between the game board 1 and the image display device 50. In the standby state where the board movable body 55k is placed in the initial position, the lower end portion of the board movable body 55k, specifically the lower end portion of the rotating member 55k1, is slightly downwardly moved from the upper end of the opening 1A of the game board 1. positioned. That is, the board movable body 55k is arranged so that in the standby state, only a part of the lower end of the rotating member 55k1 is visible to the player, and the majority is invisible to the player (see FIG. 3(A)).

Then, the movable plate 55k can be lowered as a whole from the initial position to a predetermined operating position, and raised from the operating position to return to the initial position (see FIG. 3(B)). The predetermined operating position is a position where the platen movable body 55k is located approximately at the center of the opening 1A when viewed from the front. Here, the predetermined work position can be set as appropriate, and may be a position where the movable plate 55k is located above or below the approximate center of the opening 1A when viewed from the front. good.

Further, the rotating member 55k1 can rotate clockwise and counterclockwise when viewed from the front about a rotating shaft formed in the front-rear direction at its center (see FIG. 3(C)). Note that the rotational movement of the rotating member 55k1 can be performed when the movable platen body 55k moves from the standby position to the operating position, while being held at the operating position, and when moving from the operating position to the standby position.

Note that the positions and numbers of members and devices provided in the game board unit YU can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

Next, a description will be given of the display devices 8 disposed to the right of approximately the center in the vertical direction of the game area 6 formed on the front surface of the game board 1 (the part other than the game area 6). As shown in FIG. 4, the displays 8 include a special pattern 1 display 81a that variably displays a first special pattern (hereinafter referred to as "special pattern 1"), a second special pattern (hereinafter referred to as "special pattern 2") ''), and a regular symbol display 82 that variably displays a regular symbol (hereinafter referred to as "common symbol"). In addition, the display devices 8 include a special figure 1 holding display 83a that displays the number of special drawings 1 held, which will be described later, and a special drawing 2 holding display 83b, which displays the number of special drawings 2 holding, which will be described later. .

The variable display of the special figure 1 is executed when the special figure 1 lottery is carried out triggered by the winning of a game ball in the first starting hole 11. Further, the variable display of the special figure 2 is executed when the special figure 2 lottery is held triggered by the winning of a game ball into the second starting hole 12. The special drawing 1 lottery and the special drawing 2 drawing will be described later. In addition, in the following explanation, special map 1 and special map 2 will be collectively referred to as "special map", and special map 1 lottery and special map 2 lottery will be collectively referred to as "special map lottery". In addition, the special figure 1 display 81a and the special figure 2 display 81b are collectively referred to as the "special figure display 81." Furthermore, the special figure 1 reservation display 83a and the special figure 2 reservation display 83b are collectively referred to as the "special figure reservation display 83."

The variable display of the special figure notifies the result of the special figure lottery. In the variable display of the special figure, the special figure is displayed in a variable manner and then stopped. The special figure that is stopped and displayed (stopped special figure) is identification information representing the result of the special figure lottery derived as the display result of the variable display. When the stopped and displayed special figure is a predetermined specific special figure, a jackpot game with opening of the jackpot 14 is performed.

The special figure 1 display 81a and the special figure 2 display 81b are each composed of eight LEDs arranged side by side. The lighting mode of the special figure 1 display 81a and the special figure 2 display 81b represents the special figure according to the result of the special figure lottery, that is, the result of the special figure lottery. For example, if the result of the special drawing lottery is a jackpot, the final result will be "□□■■□□■■" (□: lit, ■: off), 1st, 2nd, 5th, 6th from the left. An LED lights up. This lighting mode is a jackpot symbol and represents a jackpot. In addition, if the result of the special drawing lottery is a loss, only the LED on the far right lights up as "■■■■■■■□". This lighting mode is a losing pattern and represents a losing pattern. Note that the lighting mode of the LED corresponding to the result of the special drawing lottery is not limited and can be set as appropriate. Therefore, for example, all the LEDs may be turned off as a losing symbol.

Furthermore, in the variable display of the special figure, the special figure is displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined variable time before the special figure is stopped and displayed. The manner in which the special figure is displayed in a variable manner is, for example, a manner in which each LED lights up so that light repeatedly flows from left to right. Note that the mode of the variable display is not particularly limited, and may be set as appropriate, such as all the LEDs blinking at once unless each LED is displayed in a stopped state (lit display in a specific mode).

By the way, in the pachinko game machine PY, even if a game ball enters the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12, the special drawing lottery and the variable display of the special drawing may not be performed immediately. Specifically, this is the case when a game ball enters the first starting hole 11 or the second starting hole 12 during execution of variable display of special figures or during execution of a jackpot game. In this case, the special drawing lottery and the variable display of the special drawing are suspended based on the winning prize. This reserved special drawing drawing and the variable display of the special drawing are called "special drawing reservation."

The special drawing reservation includes the special drawing 1 drawing that was held based on the prize won in the first starting opening 11, and "special drawing 1 pending" which represents the variable display of the special drawing 1, and the winning winning in the second starting opening 12. There is a special drawing 2 lottery held based on , and a "special drawing 2 pending" representing a variable display of special drawing 2. Then, the special figure 1 pending display 83a displays the number of special figure 1 pending, that is, the number of reserved special figure 1 drawings and variable displays of special figure 1. On the other hand, the special figure 2 pending display 83b displays the number of special figure 2 reservations, that is, the number of reserved special figure 2 drawings and the number of variable displays of special figure 2.

It is also possible to set an upper limit on the number of special figure 1 reservations and the number of special figure 2 reservations, or not to set them. In addition, when setting upper limits to the number of special symbols 1 and 2 reserved, the number of special symbols 1 and 2 can be the same or different. In addition, in the basic embodiment, it is assumed that the upper limit of the number of special drawings 1 and the number of special drawings 2 being held is set to "4".

Each of the special figure 1 hold indicator 83a and the special figure 2 hold indicator 83b is composed of four LEDs, and the special figure is displayed by lighting up the LEDs for the number of special figure 1 hold and special figure 2 hold. Displays the number of Figure 1 reservations and Special Figure 2 reservations. In addition, in the following, the number of special drawings 1 reserved is referred to as "the number of special symbols 1 reserved (U1)", and the number of special symbols 2 reserved is referred to as "the number of special symbols 2 reserved (U2)". In addition, the "number of reserved special drawings 1" and "number of reserved special drawings 2" are collectively referred to as the "number of reserved special drawings." Furthermore, the "special figure 1 holding display 83a" and the "special drawing 2 holding display 83b" are collectively referred to as the "special drawing holding display 83."

Further, the variable display of the common symbol is executed when a common symbol lottery is held triggered by the winning of a game ball at the gate 13. The variable display of the common map notifies the result of the common map lottery. In the variable display of a general map, the general map is displayed in a variable manner and then stopped. The stationary displayed ordinary map (stopped ordinary map) is identification information representing the result of the ordinary map lottery drawn as a display result of the variable display. When the stopped and displayed general figure is a predetermined specific ordinary figure, an auxiliary game accompanied by opening of the second starting port 12 is performed.

The general figure display 82 is composed of, for example, two LEDs. The lighting mode of the general map display device 82 represents the general map corresponding to the result of the general map lottery, that is, the result of the general map lottery. If the result of the general lottery is a win, both LEDs will eventually light up as "□□" (□: lit, ■: off). This lighting mode is a winning symbol and represents a win. Furthermore, if the result of the general drawing lottery is a loss, only the right LED will finally light up, such as "■□". This lighting mode is a losing pattern and represents a losing pattern. Note that the lighting mode of the LED corresponding to the result of the general drawing lottery is not limited and can be set as appropriate. For example, a mode may be adopted in which all the LEDs are turned off as a losing symbol.

Further, before the regular map is stopped and displayed, the regular map is displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined variable time. In the basic embodiment, the mode of fluctuating display of the common map is such that both LEDs are lit alternately. Note that the mode of the fluctuating display of the general map is not particularly limited, and may be set as appropriate, such as all the LEDs flashing at once if each LED is not displayed in a stopped state (lit display in a specific mode). .

2. Electrical Configuration of Gaming Machine Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine PY will be explained based on FIGS. 5 to 7. As shown in FIG. 5, on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine PY, there is a game control board 100 that performs control (progress of the game) related to games that can obtain gaming profits, and a Power is supplied to the production control board 120 that controls the production, the image control board 140 that controls images, the payout control board 170 that controls the payout of game balls, and each of the boards 100, 120, 140, and 170. A power supply board 190 is attached.

A power switch 191 is connected to the power supply board 190. The ON/OFF operation of the power switch 191 switches the power on/off. Further, the power supply board 190 is provided with a RAM clear switch 192 that can be pressed down. The RAM clear switch 192 is used to cause the gaming CPU 102 to clear (hereinafter referred to as "RAM clear") gaming information stored in the gaming RAM 104 of the gaming control microcomputer 101 (described later) when the power is turned on. . The RAM clear switch 192 is provided on a power supply board 190 placed on the back side of the pachinko game machine PY. Therefore, basically, the RAM clear switch 192 cannot be operated unless the person is an employee of the game parlor who can open and close the front door 23. In other words, the RAM clear switch 192 can be said to be an operating means that cannot be operated by the player. When the RAM clear switch 192 is subjected to a specific operation (e.g., pressing the RAM clear switch 192 for a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds), pressing the RAM clear switch 192 a predetermined number of times (e.g., 5 times)), the RAM clear switch 192 A detection signal indicating that is ON is input to the game control microcomputer 101. In addition, in this embodiment, the RAM clear switch 192 is provided on the power supply board 190, but the location of the RAM clear switch 192 can be changed as appropriate. For example, it may be provided on the game control board 100 or a dedicated board. You can leave it there. Further, the operation mode of the RAM clear switch 192 for clearing the RAM is not particularly limited and may be changed as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 6, a game control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as "game control microcomputer") 101 is mounted on the game control board 100, which controls the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine PY according to a program. Therefore, the game control board 100 can be positioned as a game control section that controls games. In addition, games in which gaming profits can be obtained that are controlled by the game control board 100 include special drawing lottery, variable display of special drawings, jackpot games, game state setting described later, general drawing lottery, and variable display of normal drawings. , auxiliary games, etc.

The game control microcomputer 101 includes a game ROM (Read Only Memory) 103 that stores programs, tables, etc. for controlling the progress of the game, a game RAM (Random Access Memory) 104 used as a work memory, and a game RAM (Random Access Memory) 104 that is used as a work memory. A gaming CPU (Central Processing Unit) 102 that executes a program stored in a ROM 103 is included. Although the performance of the gaming CPU 102 can be set as appropriate, it is assumed that the gaming CPU 102 operates at a clock frequency of 2.5 MHz, 4 MHz, 6 MHZ, or 8 MHZ, for example.

The game ROM 103 stores programs for performing game control main processing, game control side timer interrupt processing, etc., which will be described later. In addition, the gaming ROM 103 includes a jackpot determination table, a jackpot symbol type determination table, a reach determination table, a special pattern variation pattern determination table, a look-ahead determination table, a jackpot game control table, a game state setting table, a hit determination table, and an auxiliary hit determination table, which will be described later. Game control tables, etc. are stored. Note that the game ROM 103 may be externally attached.

Further, the gaming RAM 104 is provided with a special figure reservation storage section 105. Here, the special figure reservation storage section 105 will be explained. As mentioned above, when a game ball enters the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12, special drawings can be reserved, but if special drawings can be reserved, that is, if the number of special symbols reserved is When the upper limit has not been reached, determination information consisting of various random numbers for performing a special drawing lottery etc. is obtained based on this winning prize. Then, this determination information is temporarily stored in the special figure reservation storage section 105 as a special figure reservation. In addition, in the following, the judgment information obtained by winning the game ball into the first starting port 11 is referred to as "special map 1 related judgment information", and the judgment information obtained by winning the game ball into the second starting port 12. The determination information that is determined is referred to as "special figure 2 related determination information." In addition, the special figure 1 related determination information and the special figure 2 related determination information are collectively referred to as "special figure related determination information."

Then, the special figure 1 related determination information is stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage section 105a in the special figure reservation storage section 105 as the special figure 1 reservation. On the other hand, the special figure 2 related determination information is stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage section 105b in the special figure reservation storage section 105 as the special figure 2 reservation. The number of special figure 1 related determination information that can be stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a, that is, the upper limit of the number of special figure 1 reservations is set to "4". Further, the number of special figure 2 related determination information that can be stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage section 105b, that is, the upper limit of the number of special figure 2 reservations is set to "4".

Further, various sensors and solenoids are connected to the game control board 100 via a predetermined relay board (not shown). Therefore, signals output from various sensors are input to the game control board 100. Moreover, the game control board 100 outputs signals to various actuators.

Various sensors connected to the game control board 100 include a general winning opening sensor 10a, a first starting opening sensor 11a, a second starting opening sensor 12a, a gate sensor 13a, and a big winning opening sensor 14a. .

The general winning hole sensor 10a detects a game ball that has won a prize in the general winning hole 10. The first starting port sensor 11a detects a game ball that has won a prize in the first starting port 11. The second starting port sensor 12a detects a game ball that has won a prize in the second starting port 12. The gate sensor 13a detects the game ball that has passed through the gate 13. The big winning hole sensor 14a detects the game ball that has entered the big winning hole 14.

Further, various actuators connected to the game control board 100 include an electric chew solenoid 12s and an AT solenoid 14s. The electric chew solenoid 12s drives the electric chew opening/closing member 12k of the electric chew 12D. The AT solenoid 14s drives the AT opening/closing member 14k of the big winning device 14D.

In addition, the type and number of sensors connected to the game control board 100 can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game. Further, the type and number of actuators connected to the game control board 100 can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

Further, the game control board 100 is connected to display devices 8 (a special figure display 81, a regular figure display 82, and a special figure pending display 83). Display control of these displays 8 is performed by a game control microcomputer 101.

Further, the game control board 100 transmits various commands to the payout control board 170, and receives signals from the payout control board 170 for payout monitoring. A card unit CU and a payout device 73 are connected to the payout control board 170, and a firing device 72 is also connected thereto. Further, the card unit CU is a device that is installed adjacent to the pachinko game machine PY and allows balls to be rented based on information such as an inserted prepaid card.

The payout control board 170 drives the payout motor 73m of the payout device 73 to pay out prize balls and rental balls based on signals from the game control microcomputer 101 and signals from the connected card unit CU. The prize balls and rental balls that are paid out are detected by a payout sensor 73a for counting them.

Further, the firing device 72 is a device that fires game balls. The handle 72k constitutes an operation section or an input section that receives an operation for causing the shooting device 72 to shoot a game ball, and is included in the shooting device 72. The handle 72k is provided with a touch switch 72a that can detect a contact of a person such as a player with the handle 72k. When the player operates the handle 72k, the touch switch 72a detects the player's contact with the handle 72k, and outputs a detection signal to the payout control board 170 via the release control circuit 175.

Furthermore, a firing volume knob 72b that can detect the rotation angle (operation amount) of the handle 72k is connected to the handle 72k. The firing device 72 drives the firing motor 72m so that the game ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 72k detected by the firing volume knob 72b. In the pachinko game machine PY, one game ball is fired approximately every 0.6 seconds while the rotational operation of the handle 72k is maintained. In addition, within the rotatable range of the handle 72k,

Further, the game control board 100 transmits various commands including information regarding the game to the performance control board 120 in accordance with the progress of the game. The production control board 120 can grasp the progress of the game (game control content) by the game control board 100 based on various commands sent from the game control board 100.

The connection between the game control board 100 and the production control board 120 is a unidirectional communication connection that allows only the transmission of signals from the game control board 100 to the production control board 120. That is, between the game control board 100 and the performance control board 120, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode), not shown, is interposed as a communication direction regulating means.

As shown in FIG. 7, the performance control board 120 is equipped with a performance control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as "performance control microcomputer") 121 that controls the performance of the pachinko game machine PY according to a program. The production control board 120 can be positioned as a production control unit that controls production, together with an image control board 140, an audio control circuit 161, and a sub-drive board 162, which will be described later. However, the performance control section includes at least a performance control board 120, and performs game performance, customer waiting performance, and operation promotion using performance devices (image display device 50, speaker 52, frame lamp 53, board movable body 55k, etc.). It is sufficient if it is possible to control the presentation.

The performances that are controlled by the performance control board 120 include game performances (special figure fluctuation performances, hold performances, jackpot game performances, etc.), customer waiting performances, and operations of the first performance button 40k and the second performance button 41k. It includes operation promotion effects that encourage operation during the valid period (operation valid period).

The performance control microcomputer 121 includes a performance ROM 123 that stores a program for controlling the performance as the game progresses by the game control board 100, a performance RAM 124 used as a work memory, and a performance ROM 123 that stores programs. It includes a presentation CPU 122 that executes a program.

The production ROM 123 stores programs for performing production control main processing, reception interrupt processing, 1ms timer interrupt processing, 10ms timer interrupt processing, etc., which will be described later. Note that the performance ROM 123 may be externally attached.

The performance RAM 124 includes a starting winning command suspension storage section 125 that stores starting winning commands that will be described later, a symbol designation command storage section 126 that stores symbol designation commands that will be described later, and a special symbol that stores special symbol fluctuation start commands that will be described later. A fluctuation start command storage section 127 is provided.

Further, an image control board 140 is connected to the effect control board 120. The performance control microcomputer 121 of the performance control board 120 controls the display of the image display device 50 on the image control board 140 based on commands received from the game control board 100, that is, according to the progress of the game by the game control board 100. Have them do it. Note that the connection between the production control board 120 and the image control board 140 allows both the transmission of signals from the production control board 120 to the image control board 140 and the transmission of signals from the image control board 140 to the production control board 120. This is a two-way communication connection.

The image control board 140 includes an image ROM 142 that stores programs for image control, an image RAM 143 used as a work memory, and an image CPU 141 that executes the programs stored in the image ROM 142. . The image control board 140 also includes a CGROM (Character Generator Read Only Memory) 145 that stores image data to be displayed on the image display device 50, and a VRAM (Video Memory) that is used to expand the image data stored in the CGROM 145. Random Access Memory) 146 and VDP (Video Display Processor) 144. All or a portion of these electronic components may be configured in one chip.

The CGROM 145 stores, for example, image data (still image data and video data, specifically characters, items, designs, figures, characters, numbers, symbols, etc.) for displaying images displayed on the image display device 50. (including designs) and image data such as background images) are stored.

The VDP 144 reads image data from the CGROM 145 and develops it in a development area in the VRAM 146 in accordance with a display list created by the image CPU 141 based on instructions from the performance control microcomputer 121. Then, the expanded image data is appropriately combined and an image is drawn in the frame buffer in the VRAM 146. The image drawn in the frame buffer is then output to the image display device 50 as an RGB signal. As a result, various effect images are displayed on the display section 50a.

Note that the display list is composed of a group of commands for instructing execution of drawing in units of frames. The display list includes information on various parameters such as the type of image to be drawn, the position at which the image is drawn, display priority, display magnification, and image transmittance.

In addition, the performance control microcomputer 121 outputs audio, music, and music from the speaker 52 via the audio control circuit 161 based on commands received from the game control board 100, that is, according to the progress of the game by the game control board 100. Output sound effects, etc.

Audio data such as audio output from the speaker 52 is stored in the performance ROM 123 of the performance control board 120. Note that the audio control circuit 161 may be configured with a board and a CPU may be mounted thereon. In this case, the CPU may be caused to perform voice control. Furthermore, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the board and audio data may be stored in the ROM. Alternatively, the speaker 52 may be connected to the image control board 140 and the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 may be caused to perform audio control. Furthermore, in this case, the audio data may be stored in the image ROM 142 of the image control board 140.

Further, various sensors serving as input units and various actuators serving as drive sources are connected to the production control board 120 via a predetermined relay board (not shown). Signals output from various sensors are input to the production control board 120. Moreover, the production control board 120 outputs signals to various actuators.

Various switches connected to the performance control board 120 include a first performance button sensor 40a and a second performance button sensor 41a. The first performance button sensor 40a detects that the first performance button 40k is pressed. The second performance button sensor 41a detects that the second performance button 41k is pressed. When the first performance button sensor 40a and the second performance button sensor 41a detect that each has been operated, they output a signal to the performance control board 120 according to the detected content.

Note that the type and number of switches connected to the performance control board 120 can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game. Further, the type and number of actuators connected to the production control board 120 can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

The various actuators connected to the production control board 120 include a motor 55m1 for rotating the board movable body, and a motor 55m2 for lifting and lowering the board movable body. The plate movable body rotation motor 55m1 can drive the rotating member 55k1 to rotate the rotating member 55k1. The board movable body lifting motor 55m2 can raise or lower the lifting member 55k2. In detail, the performance control microcomputer 121 creates operation pattern data that determines the operation mode of the rotating member 55k1 and the lifting member 55k2, and controls the operation of the rotating member 55k1 and the lifting member 55k2 via the sub-drive board 162. .

In addition, below, the operation|movement of "the rotating member 55k1 and the elevating member 55k2" may be collectively called "the operation|movement of the board movable body 55k." Furthermore, rotating the rotary member 55k1 and lowering or raising the elevating member 55k2 are also referred to as "rotating, lowering, or raising the movable platen body 55k."

Further, the performance control microcomputer 121 controls the lighting of the frame lamp 53 and the like via the sub-drive board 162 based on commands received from the game control board 100. In detail, the performance control microcomputer 121 creates light emission pattern data (data that determines lighting/extinguishing, emission color, etc., also referred to as lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of the frame lamp 53, and controls the frame lamp 53 according to the light emission pattern data. Control light emission. Note that data stored in the performance ROM 123 of the performance control board 120 is used to create the light emission pattern data.

Note that the sub-drive board 162 may be configured with a board and the CPU may be mounted thereon. In this case, the CPU may control the lighting of the frame lamp 53 and the like and control the operation of the panel movable body 55k. Furthermore, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the board and data regarding the light emission pattern and the operation pattern may be stored in the ROM.

3. Main Games Played by the Gaming Machine Next, the main games played by the Pachinko gaming machine PY will be explained using FIGS. 8 to 15.

3-1. Games related to common figures First, games related to common figures will be explained. The pachinko game machine PY can execute a regular lottery when the fired game balls pass through the gate 13. When the general drawing lottery is performed, the normal drawing is displayed variably (variably displayed and then stopped) on the general drawing display 82. Here, the regular symbols that are stopped and displayed include winning symbols and losing symbols. In addition, the losing pattern of the regular pattern is also called "losing pattern" to distinguish it from the losing pattern of the special pattern described later.

When the winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the auxiliary game is executed, and the game related to passing through the gate 13 ends. On the other hand, when the losing common map is stopped and displayed, the auxiliary game is not performed and the game related to passing through the gate 13 ends. In addition, hereinafter, the fact that the game ball passes through the gate 13 when the variable display of the normal pattern or the auxiliary game is not being played will be referred to as "establishment of the normal pattern fluctuation starting condition."

The pachinko gaming machine PY performs a series of games such as variable display of general drawings and auxiliary games based on the general drawing start condition being satisfied, obtaining general drawing related determination information, and performing general drawing lottery. I can do it. The acquired ordinary symbol related determination information includes ordinary symbol random numbers, as shown in FIG. 8(A). The normal symbol random number is a random number (judgment information) for making a hit determination. Each random number has an appropriate range.

3-1-1. Win Determination The win determination is a determination for determining whether or not there is a win (whether or not to execute the auxiliary game) using a hit determination table as shown in FIG. 9(A), for example. The hit determination table can be associated with a gaming state that will be described later. When associated with the gaming state, the hit determination table includes a hit determination table used in the non-time saving state (non-time saving hit determination table) and a hit determination table used in the time saving state (time saving hit determination table).

In each hit determination table, determination values of normal symbol random numbers (normal symbol random number determination values) are appropriately distributed to hits and losses that are the results of the hit determination. Therefore, the pachinko game machine PY compares the acquired normal symbol random number with the hit determination table to determine whether it is a hit or a loss. If the result of the hit determination is a hit, the winning symbol is stopped and displayed on the variable display of the common symbol. On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination is a loss, the losing common map is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the common symbol. Note that the winning probability can be changed as appropriate.

3-1-2. Ordinary Figure Fluctuation Pattern Determination/Ordinary Figure Variable Display Ordinary Figure Fluctuation Pattern Judgment is a determination for determining the Ordinary Figure Fluctuation Pattern by using the Ordinary Figure Fluctuation Pattern Determination Table as shown in FIG. 9(B), for example. The ordinary figure fluctuation pattern is identification information regarding predetermined matters related to variable display of ordinary figures, such as ordinary figure fluctuation time.

The regular figure fluctuation pattern determination table can be associated with the gaming state (non-time saving state/time saving state). When associated with the gaming state (non-time saving state/time saving state), the regular pattern fluctuation pattern determination table includes the regular pattern fluctuation pattern determination table (non-time saving regular pattern fluctuation pattern determination table) used in the non-time saving state and the regular pattern fluctuation pattern determination table used in the non-time saving state. There is a regular figure fluctuation pattern determination table (time-saving regular figure fluctuation pattern determination table) that is used in the state.

Each ordinary figure fluctuation pattern determination table stores one ordinary figure fluctuation pattern, which is the result of ordinary figure fluctuation pattern determination, for each ordinary figure to be stopped. In other words, the pachinko game machine PY is capable of making the normal pattern fluctuation time different between the non-time saving state and the time saving state. For example, in a non-time-saving state, when a losing regular symbol (losing regular symbol) is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the regular symbol is determined to be a regular symbol fluctuation pattern in which the regular symbol fluctuation time is 30 seconds, and the winning symbol is displayed. Regarding the variable display of common figures in the case of stop display, a common figure fluctuation pattern is determined in which the ordinary figure fluctuation time is 30 seconds. In addition, in the time saving state, for the variable display of common symbols when a losing common symbol is stopped and displayed, a common symbol fluctuation pattern in which the common symbol fluctuation time is 5 seconds is determined, and when the winning symbol is stopped and displayed, a common symbol fluctuation pattern is determined. Regarding the variable display, a general pattern fluctuation pattern in which the general pattern fluctuation time is 5 seconds is determined. It should be noted that these general figure fluctuation times can be changed as appropriate.

Then, variable display of the ordinary figure of the ordinary figure fluctuation time associated with the ordinary figure fluctuation pattern determined in the ordinary figure fluctuation pattern determination is performed on the ordinary figure display 82. In this way, by performing the hit determination and the normal pattern variation pattern determination, the normal pattern is variably displayed on the normal pattern display 82.

3-1-3. Auxiliary Game The auxiliary game is a variable display of a common symbol, and is executed when a winning symbol is stopped and displayed (derived) as a display result (result of a common symbol lottery). In the auxiliary game, the electric chew 12D is released.

The elements constituting the auxiliary game (auxiliary game component) include various elements such as the number of times the electric chew 12D is opened and the opening time for each opening. Pachinko game machine PY controls the auxiliary game using the auxiliary game control table. The auxiliary game control table stores auxiliary game components. For example, as shown in FIG. 9(C), it is possible to associate the gaming state (non-time saving state/time saving state) with the auxiliary game control table. That is, it is possible to associate the auxiliary game component with the game state (non-time saving state/time saving state). Note that the specific contents of each element, such as the number of openings and the opening time, can be changed as appropriate.

The pachinko game machine PY can make the opening time of the electric chew 12D different between the auxiliary game in the non-time-saving state and the auxiliary game in the time-saving state. For example, in an auxiliary game in a non-time saving state, the electric chew 12D is opened for a first opening time such as 0.2 seconds during which it is difficult for the electric chew 12D to win a game ball. On the other hand, in the auxiliary game in the time saving state, for example, if the game ball is opened twice for 2.5 seconds with a 1.0 second interval (closed) in between, the first opening time is longer than the first opening time, and the game ball enters the electric chew 12D. The electric chew 12D is opened only for the second opening time which is easy to open.

Note that, hereinafter, the auxiliary game in the non-time saving state is also referred to as the "short opening auxiliary game". On the other hand, the auxiliary game in the time saving state is also referred to as the "long opening auxiliary game". In addition, the opening time for each auxiliary game is the total time for that auxiliary game, and for example, it may be opened multiple times in one auxiliary game, such as opening once and then opening again after a closing interval. It may be configured as follows.

3-2. Games Related to Special Figures Next, games related to special figures will be explained. The pachinko game machine PY can execute the special drawing 1 lottery when the fired game ball enters the first starting hole 11. When the special figure 1 lottery is carried out, the special figure 1 is displayed variably on the special figure 1 display 81a (stop display after a variable display is performed) to notify the result of the special figure 1 lottery. Here, the special symbols 1 that are stopped and displayed include jackpot symbols and losing symbols. That is, the results of the special drawing 1 lottery include jackpots and losses.

When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is executed, a new gaming state is set, and the game based on the winning prize ends. Furthermore, when the losing symbols are stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is not played and the game based on the winning prize ends.

Similarly, the pachinko game machine PY can execute the special drawing 2 lottery when the fired game ball enters the second starting slot 12. When the special figure 2 lottery is performed, the special figure 2 is displayed variably (stopped after being displayed variablely) on the special figure 2 display 81b to notify the result of the special figure 2 lottery. Here, the special symbols 2 that are stopped and displayed include jackpot symbols and losing symbols. That is, the result of the special drawing 2 lottery includes a jackpot and a loss.

When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is executed, a new gaming state is set, and the game based on the winning prize ends. Furthermore, when the losing symbols are stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is not played, and the game based on the winning prize ends.

In addition, in the following, when a game ball enters the first starting port 11, it is referred to as "establishment of the first starting condition", and when a gaming ball enters the second starting port 12, it is referred to as "establishment of the second starting condition". That's what it means. Further, "the first starting condition is met" and "the second starting condition is met" are collectively referred to as "the starting condition is met." In addition, the losing symbols of the special symbols are also referred to as "losing special symbols" to distinguish them from the losing symbols of the above-mentioned ordinary symbols.

The pachinko game machine PY performs a series of games such as a variable display of special symbols and a jackpot game based on the establishment of a starting condition, the acquisition of special symbol related determination information, and the performance of a special symbol lottery. Then, in order to perform variable display of the special figure, various determinations are made regarding the special figure related determination information. As shown in FIG. 8(B), the acquired special symbol related determination information includes a special symbol random number, a jackpot symbol type random number, a reach random number, and a special symbol variation pattern random number.

The special symbol random number is a random number (determination information) for determining a jackpot. The jackpot symbol type random number is a random number (judgment information) for determining the jackpot symbol type. The reach random number is a random number (judgment information) for performing reach determination. The special symbol variation pattern random number is a random number (judgment information) for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. Each random number has an appropriate range. Next, each determination made using the special figure related determination information will be explained.

3-2-1. Jackpot Judgment The jackpot judgment is to use a jackpot judgment table to determine whether or not it is a jackpot (whether or not to execute a jackpot game), in other words, whether it is a jackpot or a loss. For example, as shown in FIG. 10(A), the jackpot determination table can be provided in association with a gaming state to be described later. Specifically, the jackpot determination table includes a jackpot determination table used in the normal probability state (hereinafter referred to as "normal probability jackpot determination table") described later, and a jackpot determination table (hereinafter referred to as "jackpot determination table for normal probability") used in the high probability state described later. , "high probability jackpot determination table").

In each jackpot determination table associated with the gaming state, special symbol random number determination values (special symbol random number determination values) are assigned to jackpots and losses that are the results of the jackpot determination. The pachinko game machine PY compares the acquired special symbol random number with the jackpot determination table associated with the gaming state to determine whether it is a jackpot or a loss. As shown in FIG. 10(A), the high probability jackpot determination table has more special symbol random number determination values that are determined to be a jackpot than the normal probability jackpot determination table.

It should be noted that the method of allocating the special symbol random number determination value to the jackpot probability and the determination results of various jackpot determinations can be changed as appropriate.

3-2-2. Jackpot symbol type determination Jackpot symbol type determination determines the type of jackpot symbol (jackpot symbol type) using a jackpot symbol type determination table as shown in FIG. 10(B), for example, when the result of jackpot determination is a jackpot. It is to be. It is possible to associate the type of jackpot symbol with the content of the jackpot, in other words, the constituent elements of the jackpot (content advantageous to the player) consisting of gaming benefits given to the player.

The jackpot symbol type determination table shows the type of special symbol that is variably displayed (special symbol 1/special symbol 2), in other words, the winning pattern that is caused by the jackpot symbol type determination (that caused the jackpot symbol type determination) is associated with the type of starting port (first starting port 11/second starting port 12). That is, the jackpot symbol type determination table includes a jackpot symbol type determination table (first jackpot symbol type determination table) used when performing a variable display of special figure 1, and a jackpot symbol type determination table used when performing a variable display of special figure 2. There is a symbol type determination table (second jackpot symbol type determination table).

Multiple types of jackpot symbols can be set. In each jackpot symbol type determination table, a jackpot symbol type random number determination value (jackpot symbol type random number determination value) is assigned to the jackpot symbol type that is the result of the jackpot symbol type determination. Therefore, the pachinko game machine PY compares the acquired jackpot symbol type random number with the jackpot symbol type determination table to determine the type of jackpot symbol. In the first jackpot symbol type determination table and the second jackpot symbol type determination table, the jackpot symbol type random number determination values are appropriately distributed to various jackpot symbols.

The types of the jackpot symbol of special symbol 1 and the jackpot symbol of special symbol 2 can be set as appropriate, but for example, as in the jackpot symbol type determination table shown in FIG. 10(B), the jackpot symbol of special symbol 1 As such, three types of jackpot symbols are provided: jackpot symbol A, jackpot symbol B, and jackpot symbol C, and three types of jackpot symbols are provided as the jackpot symbol of special pattern 2, jackpot symbol D, jackpot symbol E, and jackpot symbol F. can be provided. Then, like the jackpot symbol type determination table shown in FIG. 10(B), in the first jackpot symbol type determination table and the second jackpot symbol type determination table, the jackpot symbol type random number determination values are appropriately distributed to various jackpot symbols. ing. Note that the distribution rate of the jackpot symbol type can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, the types of jackpot symbols can be increased or decreased as appropriate.

3-2-3. Reach Judgment For reach judgment, for example, when the result of jackpot judgment is a loss, use a reach judgment table as shown in FIG. It is to decide.

The reach determination table can be associated with the gaming state (non-time saving state/time saving state). When associated with a gaming state, for example, the reach determination table includes a reach determination table used in the non-time saving state (non-time saving reach determination table) and a reach determination table used in the time saving state (time saving reach determination table). judgment table).

In each reach determination table, the reach random number determination value (reach random number determination value) is divided into the reach determination results "with reach (reach occurs)" and "without reach (reach does not occur)". There is. Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine PY compares the obtained reach random number with the reach determination table and determines whether there is a reach or there is no reach (whether or not a reach occurs).

As shown in FIG. 10(C), the number of reach random number determination values that are determined as "reach exists (reach occurs)" can be made different between the non-time-saving reach determination table and the time-saving reach determination table. It is possible. In addition, in the following, the result of reach determination, which is performed on the premise that the result of jackpot determination is "lose", is referred to as "reach with reach" (reach occurs), and "no reach" is referred to as "reach with reach (reach occurs)". This is sometimes referred to as ``no reach failure.'' Also, a "loss without reach" is sometimes referred to as a "do-no-lose", and a "lose with a reach" is sometimes referred to as a "lose-to-reach".

3-2-4. Special symbol fluctuation pattern determination Special symbol fluctuation pattern determination is performed using special symbol fluctuation pattern determination tables (special symbol fluctuation patterns) as shown in FIGS. The purpose is to determine a variation pattern (special figure variation pattern) of variable display of special figures using a determination table (determination table).

The special figure variation pattern is identification information for identifying predetermined matters regarding the special figure variation time, the so-called "shaku", the production flow (production content) of the special figure variation production described later, etc. In addition, the special figure fluctuation pattern can also include identification information regarding the result of the jackpot determination and the result of the reach determination, in addition to the special figure fluctuation time and the performance flow (performance content) of the special symbol fluctuation performance. In addition, the type and number of special figure fluctuation patterns can be changed as appropriate.

The special pattern fluctuation pattern determination table is based on the type of special symbol (special pattern 1/special pattern 2) that performs variable display that is the target of determination, in other words, the starting opening where the prize was won due to the special pattern fluctuation pattern determination. It is possible to relate to the type (first starting port 11/second starting port 12). That is, the special figure variation pattern judgment table includes a special figure variation pattern judgment table (special figure 1 variation pattern judgment table: Figure 11) used when performing the variable display of special figure 1, and a variable display of special figure 2. There is a special figure variation pattern determination table (special figure 2 variation pattern determination table: FIG. 12) used when performing this.

Each special figure fluctuation pattern determination table can be associated with a gaming state (non-time saving state/time saving state). Specifically, the special figure 1 variation pattern judgment table includes a special figure 1 variation pattern judgment table (non-time saving special figure 1 variation pattern judgment table) used in the non-time saving state and a special figure 1 variation pattern judgment table used in the time saving state. There is a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table (time-saving special figure 1 variation pattern determination table). On the other hand, regarding the special figure 2 variation pattern judgment table, there is also a special figure 2 variation pattern judgment table used in the non-time saving state (special figure 2 variation pattern judgment table for non-time saving) and a special figure 2 variation pattern judgment table used in the time saving state. There is a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table (time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table).

In addition, each special figure fluctuation pattern determination table associated with the gaming state (non-time saving state/time saving state) can be further associated with the jackpot determination result and the reach determination result. That is, the non-time-saving special figure 1 variation pattern determination table and the time-saving special figure 1 variation pattern determination table include one for jackpot, one for loss with reach, and one for loss without reach. Similarly, the non-time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table and the time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table include one for jackpots, one for lose with reach, and one for lose without reach.

Furthermore, each special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for no reach and loss associated with the gaming state can also be associated with the number of reserved special figures 1. For example, there is a special pattern 1 fluctuation pattern judgment table for no-reach loss that is used when the number of reserved special symbols 1 (U1) is 0 to 2, and a table that is used when the number of reserved special symbols 1 (U1) is 3 to 4. There is a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for no-reach misses. Similarly, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for each reach-less loss associated with the gaming state can also be associated with the special figure 2 pending number. Specifically, there is a special pattern 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table for no-reach loss that is used when the number of special symbols 2 reserved (U2) is 0 to 2, and a special symbol 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table for no-reach loss that is used when the number of special symbols 2 reserved (U2) is 3 to 4. There is a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for no-reach misses that is used for.

Then, the special figure display device 81 displays a variation of the special figure of the special figure variation time according to the special figure variation pattern determined by each special figure variation pattern determination. Then, after the variable display of the special pattern, if the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed as the display result of the special pattern variable display (result of the special pattern lottery), the next variable display of the special pattern will not be performed immediately, and the variable display will continue. , a jackpot game is executed.

Furthermore, it is possible to associate each special figure variation pattern with the production flow of the special figure variation production as shown in the third column from the right in the table of FIGS. 11 and 12. Here, typical effects that constitute the effect flow of the special figure variation effect associated with the special figure variation pattern will be explained.

The performances that make up the performance flow of the special figure variation performance include normal variation, reach, normal reach (N reach), long reach (L reach), special reach (SP reach), and battle performance.

Normal fluctuation indicates that the performance symbols that had been stopped and displayed have started to fluctuate, and each of the performance symbols that make up each production symbol has been fluctuated and displayed at such high speed that it is difficult to recognize, suggesting that the variable display of the special symbol has started. It is a performance that In addition, the special symbol fluctuation performance (the part from the start of the variation of the production pattern to the stop of variation) related to the no-reach loss variation, and the part until the reach is established (confirmed) in the special symbol variation production where the reach occurs, usually fluctuates. It may consist of

In N reach, immediately after a reach is established (confirmed) through normal fluctuations, for example, the production symbols that make up the reach are temporarily stopped at the same position for a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds), and the remaining one is This is a performance in which the performance symbols slow down and fluctuate at a slower speed than normal fluctuations. The degree of expectation of a jackpot suggested by N reach is higher than normal fluctuations and lower than L reach and SP reach, which will be described later. When the special symbol fluctuation performance ends at N reach, the remaining one performance symbol that fluctuates at that low speed stops. In the case of a loss, the remaining one performance pattern stops at a performance pattern different from the performance pattern that constitutes the reach. If the special symbol fluctuation performance does not end at N reach, the remaining one performance symbol changes again at high speed, and develops (switches) from N reach to L reach and SP reach while maintaining reach.

L reach is a performance that can be executed both in the case of a jackpot and in the case of a loss, and is a performance that suggests whether or not a jackpot gaming state will occur, and suggests that there is a possibility of a jackpot gaming state. Furthermore, L reach is a performance that can be executed after N reach, for example, and is performed for a longer time than N reach, suggesting that the expectation of a jackpot is higher than N reach. Even in L reach, the established reach is maintained, but the effect symbols that make up the reach are reduced and are moved to a predetermined position that does not interfere with the background image than in the case of N reach (for example, the left effect pattern EZ1 described later is With the right effect pattern EZ3 moved to the upper right of the display section 50a (at the upper left of the display section 50a), the background image is switched to the L reach exclusive background image (the L reach exclusive video is played). Note that in L reach, 2DCG animation images are mainly displayed on the display section 50a. As for the content of L Reach, a video of a scene different from a match related to SP Reach, which will be described later, is displayed, such as the main character undergoing special training to learn a special move.

SP reach is a performance that can be executed both in the case of a jackpot and in the case of a loss, and is a performance that suggests whether or not a jackpot gaming state will occur, and suggests that there is a possibility of a jackpot gaming state. Furthermore, SP reach is a performance that can be executed after, for example, N reach, and is performed for a longer time than L reach, suggesting that the expectation of a jackpot is higher than L reach. Even in SP reach, the established reach is maintained, but the effect symbols that make up the reach are reduced and are moved to a predetermined position that does not interfere with the background image than in the case of N reach (for example, the left effect symbol EZ1 described later is At the upper left of the display section 50a, with the right effect symbol EZ3 moved to the upper right of the display section 50a, the background image is switched to the SP reach-specific background image (the SP reach-specific video is played). Note that in SP reach, 3DCG images are mainly displayed on the display section 50a. As the content of SP Reach, a video of a match between a team to which the main character belongs and a team to which a rival of the main character belongs is displayed.

The battle performance is, for example, a performance that can be executed after reach in a time-saving state, and is a performance that suggests that the jackpot expectation is higher than the normal fluctuation. Even in battle production, the achieved reach is maintained, but the production symbols that make up the reach are reduced and moved to predetermined positions (for example, the left production symbol EZ1 is at the upper left of the display section 50a, and the right production symbol EZ3 is placed at the upper left of the display section 50a. (upper right corner), the background image will switch to the battle production-specific background image (the battle production-specific video will play). Furthermore, in the battle performance, 3DCG images are mainly displayed on the display section 50a.

In addition, in the "state in which the reach is maintained" in the N reach, L reach, SP reach, and battle performance, the performance symbols that constitute the reach in the N reach, L reach, SP reach, and battle performance are displayed on the display section 50a. This includes not only a state where it is visible from the display section 50a, but also a state where the effect pattern constituting the reach is difficult or impossible to see from the display section 50a for a predetermined period of time in relation to a dedicated background image. Further, the contents of the normal variation, N reach, L reach, SP reach, and battle performance can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, the effects that make up the special figure variation effect are not limited to these, and can be added or reduced as appropriate.

In addition, as shown in the second column from the right of the table in FIGS. 11 and 12, it is possible to give a name to the special pattern variation pattern by associating it with the jackpot determination result and the content of the special pattern variation production. . The special pattern variation pattern related to a jackpot is sometimes collectively referred to as a "jackpot variation", and the special pattern variation pattern related to a loss is sometimes collectively referred to as a "loss variation".

Furthermore, the special pattern variation pattern in which SP reach is performed regardless of the jackpot judgment result is "SP reach variation", the special pattern variation pattern in which L reach is performed is "L reach variation", and the special pattern variation pattern in which N reach is performed is special pattern variation. The special pattern variation pattern where the production ends is sometimes collectively referred to as "N reach variation". In addition, loss fluctuations with reach are sometimes referred to as "loss fluctuations with reach", and loss fluctuations without reach are sometimes collectively referred to as "normal loss fluctuations".

3-2-5. Pre-reading Judgment Before making a jackpot judgment, the pachinko gaming machine PY can make a pre-reading judgment based on the acquired special figure related judgment information using a pre-reading judgment table as shown in FIGS. 13 to 14, for example. be. The look-ahead determination table is based on the type of starting opening (first starting opening 11/second starting opening 12) related to the starting winning, in other words, the type of special figure that is variably displayed depending on the starting winning (special drawing 1/special drawing). 2). That is, the pre-reading determination table includes a first pre-reading determination table (FIG. 13) in the case where a prize is won in the first starting opening 11 and a variable display of special drawing 1 is performed, and a first reading determining table (FIG. 13) when a prize is won in the second starting opening 12 and a special drawing is displayed. There is a second look-ahead determination table (FIG. 14) in which variable display of No. 2 is performed. Note that the prefetch determination performed based on the first prefetch determination table is also referred to as a "first prefetch determination," and the prefetch determination performed based on the second prefetch determination table is also referred to as a "second prefetch determination."

Further, the pre-reading determination table can also be associated with gaming states (normal gaming state/high probability high base gaming state/low probability high base gaming state) which will be described later. That is, the lookahead determination table includes a lookahead decision table used in the normal gaming state (a lookahead decision table for normal gaming state), and a lookahead decision table used in the high probability high base game state (high probability high base game state). There is a look-ahead determination table for the state) and a look-ahead determination table for the low probability high base gaming state (a look ahead determination table for the low probability high base gaming state).

In other words, the lookahead determination table includes a first lookahead decision table used in the normal gaming state, a first lookahead decision table used in the high probability high base gaming state, and a first lookahead decision table used in the high probability high base gaming state. A first lookahead determination table used, a second lookahead determination table used in the normal gaming state, a second lookahead determination table used in the high probability high base gaming state, and a second lookahead determination table used in the low probability high base gaming state. There is a second look-ahead determination table used for.

In addition, by the pre-reading determination using the pre-reading determination table shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the special symbol fluctuation pattern related to the variable display of the special symbol performed by winning the starting openings 11 and 12 is specified. That is, before the variable display of the special figure based on the winning is performed, the special figure fluctuation pattern related to the variable display of the special figure is specified as the pre-reading determination result. In the process of specifying the special figure fluctuation pattern, the propriety of the jackpot is also specified as a pre-read determination result.

The pre-reading determination result including information regarding the special figure fluctuation pattern etc. is associated with the start winning command. As will be described later, the start winning command is transmitted to the production control board 120 as a pre-read determination result along with its generation. Note that the type of information to be specified as the prefetch determination result can be changed as appropriate. For example, information regarding the type of jackpot symbol can also be included in the pre-reading determination result.

As described above, a variable display of the special symbol is performed on the special symbol display 81 by performing the jackpot determination, the jackpot symbol type determination, the reach determination, and the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination. Then, in the special pattern variable display, when the losing pattern is stopped and displayed as a display result (result of the special pattern lottery), if there is a special pattern pending, the next special pattern will continue to be variablely displayed, and the special pattern pending. If there is no one, it will be in a so-called "waiting state". On the other hand, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a display result (result of special symbol lottery) in the variable display of the special symbol, the next special symbol is not variably displayed and the jackpot game is subsequently executed. It should be noted that the fact that the game is determined to be a loss in the jackpot determination, and the fact that the losing symbol is stopped and displayed in the special symbol variable display may also be referred to as "losing/becoming a loss." In addition, the fact that a jackpot is determined in the jackpot determination and the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the special symbol variable display may be referred to as "hitting the jackpot/becoming a jackpot." Next, the jackpot game will be explained.

3-3. Jackpot Game A jackpot game consists of multiple round games involving the opening and closing of the jackpot 14, an opening (also referred to as OP) from the start of the jackpot game until the start of the first round game, and a final round game. It includes an ending (also referred to as ED) from the end of the round game until the end of the jackpot game. Each round game starts with the end of the opening or the end of the previous round game, and ends with the start of the next round game or the start of the ending.

Note that it is possible not to provide OP and ED. Furthermore, hereinafter, a predetermined number of round games (in a predetermined order) will be simply referred to as a "round." For example, the first round game is also referred to as "one round (1R)," and the tenth round game is also referred to as "10 rounds (10R)."

The pachinko game machine PY then controls the jackpot game using the jackpot game control table. The jackpot game control table can be set for each type of jackpot symbol. That is, it is possible to associate a jackpot game with a type of jackpot symbol. One or more types of jackpot games can be set.

The jackpot game control table stores elements constituting the jackpot game (jackpot game constituent elements). The jackpot game components include the number of round games, the number of times the jackpot opening 14 is opened in each round game, the type and opening time (opening pattern) of the jackpot opening for each opening, and the time to be closed until the next opening. (closing time), opening time (opening time), and ending time (ending time).

The pachinko game machine PY can control the jackpot game using a jackpot game control table as shown in FIG. 15(A), for example. That is, it is possible to set the type of jackpot game and the jackpot game components for each jackpot game as shown in FIG. 15(A). Here, the jackpot game set in FIG. 15(A) will be explained.

In the jackpot game associated with jackpot symbol A (hereinafter also referred to as "first jackpot game"), a round game is played 10 times. In each round game from 1R to 10R, the grand prize opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. Furthermore, there is an opening in which the jackpot 14 is kept closed for 10.0 seconds from the start of the first jackpot game until the start of the first round game. Furthermore, there is an ending in which the jackpot 14 remains closed for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game until the end of the first jackpot game.

In the jackpot game associated with jackpot symbol B (hereinafter also referred to as "second jackpot game"), a round game is played five times. In each round game from 1R to 5R, the big prize opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. Furthermore, there is an opening in which the jackpot 14 is kept closed for 10.0 seconds from the start of the second jackpot game until the start of the first round game. Furthermore, there is an ending in which the big prize opening 14 is kept closed for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game until the end of the second jackpot game.

In the jackpot game associated with jackpot symbol C (hereinafter also referred to as "third jackpot game"), a round game is played five times. In each round game from 1R to 5R, the big prize opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. Furthermore, there is an opening in which the jackpot 14 is kept closed for 10.0 seconds from the start of the third jackpot game until the start of the first round game. Furthermore, there is an ending in which the big prize opening 14 is kept closed for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game until the end of the third jackpot game.

In the jackpot game associated with jackpot symbol D (hereinafter also referred to as "fourth jackpot game"), a round game is played 10 times. In each round game from 1R to 10R, the grand prize opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. Furthermore, there is an opening in which the big prize opening 14 is kept closed for 10.0 seconds from the start of the fourth jackpot game until the start of the first round game. Furthermore, there is an ending in which the big prize opening 14 is kept closed for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game until the end of the fourth jackpot game.

In the jackpot game associated with the jackpot symbol E (hereinafter also referred to as "fifth jackpot game"), a round game is played six times. In each round game from 1R to 6R, the big prize opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. Furthermore, there is an opening in which the jackpot 14 is kept closed for 10.0 seconds from the start of the fifth jackpot game until the start of the first round game. Furthermore, there is an ending in which the grand prize opening 14 is kept closed for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game until the end of the fifth jackpot game.

In the jackpot game associated with the jackpot symbol F (hereinafter also referred to as "sixth jackpot game"), a round game is played six times. In each round game from 1R to 6R, the big prize opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. In addition, there is an opening in which the jackpot 14 is kept closed for 10.0 seconds from the start of the sixth jackpot game until the start of the first round game. Furthermore, there is an ending in which the grand prize opening 14 is kept closed for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game until the end of the fifth jackpot game.

In addition, in each round game, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are detected by the big winning hole sensor 14a, even before the maximum opening time of the big winning hole 14 has elapsed, the big winning hole is activated. The winning hole 14 is closed and the round game ends. Further, the types and specific contents of the jackpot game components can be changed as appropriate.

In addition, in the jackpot game control table shown in FIG. 15(A), which type of jackpot game will be executed is determined by the type of jackpot symbol, but the jackpot game may be executed by a method different from this. You may also do so. For example, if a device is provided in the gaming area 6 that can allocate the prizes to two winning holes, if a winning hole is won in one of the winning holes, only a jackpot game consisting of a predetermined number of round games will be executed, but if a prize is won in the other winning hole, a predetermined winning hole will be executed. Either a jackpot game consisting of a larger number of round games or a jackpot game consisting of a smaller number of round games than a predetermined number may be executed with a predetermined probability by lottery or the like.

3-4. Game State Next, the game state that can be controlled by the pachinko game machine PY will be explained. The pachinko game machine PY has a jackpot game state in which a jackpot game is being executed and a non-jackpot game state in which a jackpot game is not being executed. The non-jackpot gaming states include a normal gaming state, which is a basic gaming state, and a specific gaming state, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. Factors that are "advantageous to the player" related to this specific gaming state include the jackpot probability and the ease with which the second starting port 12 can be opened. That is, the jackpot probability and the ease of opening the second starting port 12 can be associated with the specific gaming state.

What is advantageous to the player regarding the jackpot probability is that the jackpot probability is higher than in the normal gaming state, and it becomes easier to win the jackpot. Furthermore, the ease of opening the second starting port 12 that is advantageous to the player means that the ease of opening the second starting port 12 is higher than in the normal gaming state, and the second starting port 12 is opened per unit time. This means that it will take longer.

The specific gaming states include a first specific gaming state in which both the jackpot probability and the opening time per unit time of the second starting port 12 are advantageous to the player, and a second specific gaming state in which only the jackpot probability is advantageous to the player. Three types can be set: a specific gaming state and a third specific gaming state in which only the opening time per unit time of the second starting port 12 is advantageous to the player. It should be noted that instead of all of these three types of specific gaming states being installed in the pachinko gaming machine PY, some of the three types of specific gaming states can also be installed.

Here, as a partial gaming state focusing on the jackpot probability, a state where the jackpot probability is higher than the normal gaming state and which is advantageous to the player regarding the jackpot probability is referred to as a "high probability state". On the other hand, the jackpot probability is the normal probability in the normal gaming state, and a state in which the jackpot probability is not advantageous to the player is referred to as a "normal probability state."

In addition, as a partial gaming state that focuses on the opening time of the second starting port 12 per unit time, a gaming state in which the opening time of the second starting port 12 per unit time is longer than the normal gaming state is called a "time saving state". Toi. On the other hand, a gaming state in which the opening time of the second starting port 12 per unit time is the opening time in the normal gaming state is referred to as a "non-time saving state". Here, the fact that the opening time of the second starting port 12 per unit time becomes longer means that it becomes easier to make the game ball enter the second starting port 12. Therefore, the time saving state can be positioned as a gaming state that is advantageous to the player because it is easier to win a prize to the second starting opening 12 (ease of winning a prize to the second starting opening 12) than the normal gaming state. .

Here, the non-time saving state and the time saving state will be explained in detail. As described above, in the time saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time is longer than in the non-time saving state. That is, the time-saving state is a state in which it is easier to win a prize in the second starting port 12 than in the non-time-saving state. Here, a specific method for making it easier to win a prize in the second starting slot 12 in the time-saving state than in the non-time-saving state will be described.

For example, by making the time saving state a state in which the normal pattern variation time is likely to be shorter than in the non-time saving state, it is possible to make it easier to win a prize at the second starting port 12 in the time saving state. For example, as mentioned above, regardless of the result of the hit determination, in the time saving state, the normal pattern fluctuation time (5.0 seconds) is shorter than the normal pattern fluctuation time (30.0 seconds) determined in the non-time saving state. Let it be determined. As a result, in the time saving state, the number of times the regular lottery is executed per unit time is greater. In this case, regardless of the difference between the non-time-saving state and the time-saving state, if the probability of winning in the hit judgment and the opening time of the electric chew 12D in one auxiliary game are the same, then the number of regular lottery drawings per unit time is the same. As the number of executions increases, the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time becomes longer.

In addition, by making the time saving state a state where the opening time of the electric chew 12D in one auxiliary game is likely to be longer than in the non-time saving state, it is possible to make it easier to win a prize in the second starting port 12 in the time saving state. . For example, as mentioned above, in the non-time saving state, the electric chew 12D opens for 0.2 seconds in one auxiliary game, whereas in the time saving state, the electric chew 12D opens for 5.0 seconds in one auxiliary game. Make it open for seconds. In this case, regardless of the difference between the non-time-saving state and the time-saving state, if the probability of winning in the hit judgment and the normal pattern fluctuation time are the same, the number of times the auxiliary game is executed per unit time will be the same, so once The longer the electric chew 12D is opened in the auxiliary game, the longer the electric chew 12D is opened per unit time.

Furthermore, by making the time-saving state a state in which it is easier to determine a win in the winning determination compared to the non-time-saving state, it is possible to make it easier for the second starting port 12 to win a prize in the time-saving state. For example, as mentioned above, in the non-time-saving state, the probability of winning is determined to be 6600/65536, while in the time-saving state, the probability of winning is determined to be 59936/65536. . In this case, regardless of the difference between the non-time-saving state and the time-saving state, if the opening time of the electric chew 12D and the normal figure variation time in one auxiliary game are the same, the probability of a hit being determined is high. Since the number of hit determinations per unit time increases, the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time becomes longer.

In this way, in the time saving state, it is easier to win than in the non-time saving state, the normal figure fluctuation time is likely to be shorter, and the opening time of the electric chew 12D in one auxiliary game is likely to be longer. By satisfying the three conditions, in the time-saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time becomes longer than in the non-time-saving state, making it easier to win a prize in the second starting port 12. As a result, the so-called "base", which is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of fired balls, increases. Therefore, in the time-saving state where the base is high, it is possible to aim for a jackpot win without greatly reducing the number of game balls in possession compared to the normal gaming state. In other words, it can be said that the time-saving state is more advantageous for the player than the non-time-saving state.

Note that in the time saving state, all three conditions for increasing the opening time per unit time of the second starting port 12 may not all be met, but only some of the conditions may be met. Finally, in the time-saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time is longer than in the non-time-saving state, and winning into the second starting port 12 may be facilitated.

In addition, in the time-saving state, the number of executions of the special pattern variable display per unit time is small, or special The average figure fluctuation time may be made low. As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace at which the reserved special drawings are consumed becomes faster, and effective winnings (winnings that can be stored as reserved special drawings) in the starting opening are more likely to occur. Therefore, players can aim for a jackpot while the game progresses smoothly.

In addition, in the following, the first specific gaming state will be referred to as a "high probability high base gaming state" and the second specific gaming state will be referred to as a "high probability low "Base gaming state" and the third specific gaming state are also referred to as "low probability high base gaming state." Furthermore, the normal gaming state is also referred to as a "low probability low base gaming state."

Therefore, the low probability low base gaming state can be said to be a gaming state controlled in a normal probability state and a non-time saving state. Similarly, the low probability high base gaming state is controlled as a normal probability state and a time saving state, the high probability low base gaming state is controlled as a high probability state and a non time saving state, and the high probability high base gaming state is controlled as a high probability state and a time saving state. It can be said that it is a gaming state in which

In this way, the pachinko gaming machine PY can be controlled in a low probability low base gaming state, a low probability high base gaming state, a high probability low base gaming state, a high probability high base gaming state, and a jackpot gaming state. In addition, in the jackpot gaming state, the jackpot gaming state can also be said to be a gaming state advantageous to the player because the jackpot opening 14 is open for a long time and a large amount of game balls can be acquired. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state and the specific gaming state can also be called "advantageous gaming states" that are more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state.

Furthermore, the high probability high base gaming state and the high probability low base gaming state are gaming states that are more advantageous to the player than the low probability low base gaming state in that the jackpot probability is higher than the normal probability state. be. In addition, the high probability high base gaming state and the low probability high base gaming state are more advantageous to the player than the low probability low base gaming state in that the ease of winning the second starting slot 12 is higher than in the non-time saving state. It is in a gaming state. Furthermore, in the jackpot game state, the jackpot game state is a low-probability, low-base game because the jackpot game state is a low-probability low-base game because the number of prize balls for one winning is greater than the first starting hole 11 and the second starting hole 12. This is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the current state.

Further, when the power of the pachinko game machine PY is turned on, the normal game state is first set. Further, the jackpot game state is set by the stop display of jackpot symbols. On the other hand, the specific gaming state is set by winning a jackpot and executing a jackpot game. Next, the setting of the specific gaming state will be explained.

3-5. Setting a gaming state upon completion of a jackpot game Pachinko gaming machine PY can set a new gaming state upon completion of a jackpot game. That is, after a jackpot game, the game can be controlled and progressed in a new game state. The duration of this gaming state can be set as appropriate. For example, as a new gaming state, a specific gaming state can be continued until the next jackpot is won. Furthermore, it is also possible to limit the period during which a specific gaming state can continue.

When limiting the duration of a specific gaming state, the specific gaming state can be ended when the termination condition for the duration is satisfied. Then, when the specific gaming state ends, the normal gaming state can be set. Further, regarding the high probability high base gaming state, when the termination condition is satisfied, a low probability high base gaming state or a high probability low base gaming state may be set. In this case, the newly set low probability high base gaming state or high probability low base gaming state may continue until the next jackpot is won. Furthermore, the same or different end conditions may be provided for the newly set low probability high base gaming state or the high probability low base gaming state, and when the end condition is met, the normal gaming state may be set.

Furthermore, the termination conditions for the duration of the specific gaming state can be set as appropriate. As the termination condition, for example, the number of execution times of special figure variable display can be set. In addition, it is not limited to the number of executions of the special figure variable display, but also the elapsed time after the jackpot game, the number of game balls fired after the jackpot game, the number of times the game ball passes through the gate 13 after the jackpot game, or whether to end the specific game state. It is possible to set the termination condition to be the result of terminating the lottery (so-called "fall lottery"). Furthermore, these elements may be set as end conditions singly or in combination.

In addition, these ending conditions may be set the same for all specific gaming states that can be set after a jackpot game, or may be set for some specific gaming states among the specific gaming states that can be set. You may do so. Furthermore, the termination conditions may be different for each specific game state.

Furthermore, the game state controlled after a jackpot game, the presence or absence of an end condition, and the content of the end condition can be associated with the jackpot symbol type related to the jackpot game. For example, when the jackpot symbol type is set as described above, as shown in FIG. The game may be controlled based on the state. Here, this high-probability, high-base game state can be continued until a jackpot is won without setting an end condition. Furthermore, after the jackpot game related to the jackpot symbol C and the jackpot symbol E ends, the game may be controlled in a low probability high base gaming state. Here, an end condition can be set for this low probability high base game state, and the end condition can be set to 100 times of variable display of special symbols. In addition, the relationship between this jackpot type symbol, the specific game state controlled after the jackpot game, the presence or absence of an end condition, and the content of the end condition is an example, and is not limited to this.

In addition, focusing on the gaming profit of a jackpot, a jackpot in which the game progresses with a high probability after a jackpot game is also referred to as a "high probability jackpot." Further, a jackpot in which the game progresses in a high probability state and in a time saving state after a jackpot game is also referred to as a "probable jackpot". In addition, a jackpot in which the game progresses in a normal probability state and a time-saving state after a jackpot game is also referred to as a "time-saving jackpot."

4. Main performances performed by the gaming machine Next, the main performances performed by the pachinko gaming machine PY will be explained using FIGS. 16 to 32.

4-1. Production Mode First, the production mode will be explained. The production mode is a division of production (or a superordinate attribute). The pachinko game machine PY can set a customer waiting performance mode, a normal performance mode, a variable probability performance mode, a time-saving performance mode, and a jackpot performance mode as performance modes.

In the customer waiting production mode, the special figure variable display is performed in the "low probability low base gaming state", "low probability high base gaming state", "high probability low base gaming state" and "high probability high base gaming state". This is a production mode that can be set when there is no special figure variable display and indicates a standby state in which special figure variable display is not performed. A customer waiting performance is performed when a customer waiting performance mode is set. In the customer waiting performance, for example, as shown in FIG. 16(A), a customer waiting demonstration video G100 introducing the pachinko game machine PY is displayed on the display section 50a. Furthermore, when the first performance button 40k is operated while the customer waiting demonstration video G100 is displayed, as shown in FIG. is displayed. Settings related to the effects include volume settings for the sound output from the speaker 52, brightness settings for the display section 50a, and frequency settings for the effects to be performed. Note that setting items related to presentation can be set as appropriate. Further, the setting screen G101 can be made not to be displayed from the customer waiting demonstration video G100 by the player's operation.

The normal production mode is a production mode that can be set in the "low probability low base gaming state" and indicates the normal gaming state. Further, a plurality of lower performance modes belonging to the normal performance mode can be provided. For example, a first normal presentation mode, a second normal presentation mode, a third normal presentation mode, etc. can be provided as presentation modes at a lower level belonging to the normal presentation mode.

In addition, below, the production mode of the lower hierarchy which belongs to production mode is also called "production stage." Accordingly, the first normal presentation mode is also referred to as the "first normal presentation stage," the second normal presentation mode is also referred to as the "second normal presentation stage," and the third normal presentation mode is also referred to as the "third normal presentation stage." say. In addition, unless there are special circumstances, basically the production mode that is set when the special figure variation display starts for the first time after the power of the pachinko game machine PY is turned on is the first normal production stage ( (first normal performance mode). However, the type of production mode that is initially set is not particularly limited and may be changed as appropriate.

In this way, when a plurality of performance stages belonging to the normal performance mode are provided, the performance stages can be repeatedly switched in order when a predetermined switching condition is satisfied. The switching condition can be set as appropriate, but for example, the switching condition can be set to a predetermined number of special symbol variable effects being performed without winning the jackpot. Further, as a switching condition, it can be set that a specific effect, such as a special symbol variation effect based on SP reach/loss variation, is executed.

In addition, as will be described later, a reach may occur in special figure fluctuation effects, but the special figure variation effect is the entire section of the special figure variation effect when a reach does not occur, and a reach is established when a reach occurs. It can be divided into the first stage before the reach occurs, and the second stage after the reach is established in the case where a reach occurs. Note that the first part consists of the above-mentioned "normal fluctuation".

In the first stage of the first normal presentation stage, a background image (FIG. 17A: first normal background image G111) mainly representing a city view is displayed on the display section 50a. In the first stage of the second normal performance stage, a background image mainly representing the field of a baseball field (FIG. 17(B): second normal background image G112) is displayed on the display section 50a. In the first stage of the third normal performance stage, a background image mainly representing the inside of the restaurant (FIG. 17(C): third normal background image G113) is displayed on the display section 50a. On the other hand, in the latter part of the first to third normal performance stages, the first normal background image G111, the second normal background image G112, and the third normal background image G113 are not displayed. A special background image will be displayed depending on the type of reach.

Note that the dedicated background image according to the type of reach in the normal production mode may be a common background image in the normal production mode regardless of the type of production stage, or may be a different background image for each production stage.

Further, the normal performance mode may be set even in the "high probability low base game state", and the normal performance mode may be a performance mode indicating a non-time saving state. Alternatively, a predetermined performance mode that is set only in the "high probability low base game state" and is different from the normal performance mode may be provided. Further, a predetermined performance mode different from the normal performance mode may be set in a low probability low base game state and a high probability low base game state that occur under certain conditions.

The variable probability production mode is a production mode that can be set in the "high probability high base gaming state" and indicates the high probability high base gaming state. In the first stage of the probability variation production mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 17(D), a background image representing the universe (probability variation background image G120) is displayed on the display unit 50a, and probability variation BGM is output from the speaker 52. . In addition, in the latter part of the variable probability performance mode, a dedicated background image corresponding to the type of reach in the variable probability performance mode is displayed.

The time-saving production mode can be set in the "low-probability, high-base gaming state" or "high-probability, high-base gaming state," and is either the low-probability, high-base gaming state or the high-probability, high-base gaming state; This is a production mode that indicates the state. In the first stage of the time-saving production mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 17(E), a background image representing the sky (time-saving background image G130) is displayed on the display unit 50a, and time-saving BGM is output from the speaker 52. . In addition, in the latter part of the time-saving production mode, a dedicated background image is displayed according to the type of reach in the time-saving production mode.

In addition, the time-saving performance mode can be set only in the low probability high base gaming state, and can also be set as a performance mode indicating the low probability high base gaming state.

In addition, for either or both of the fixed variable production mode and the time-saving production mode, in the same way as the normal production mode, a plurality of production stages for the production mode are provided, and when a predetermined switching condition is met, the production stage is switched. You can also do it.

The jackpot production mode is a production mode that can be set when a jackpot game is being played in the "jackpot game state", and is a production mode that indicates that a jackpot game is being played. In the jackpot performance mode, for example, during the opening of a jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 18(A), an opening image G1 that suggests the start of a jackpot game or a right-hand hit image G2 that encourages "right-hand hitting" is displayed on the display section 50a. A jackpot opening performance will be held where the will be displayed. In addition, during the opening, as a jackpot opening effect, a background image (opening background image G200) corresponding to the type of jackpot game is displayed on the display section 50a in the background of the opening image G1 and the right-handed image G2. .

In addition, in the jackpot production mode, during the round game in the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 18(B), the right-handed image G2 is continuously displayed from the opening on the display section 50a, and the round image indicating the number of rounds is displayed on the display section 50a. A round effect is performed in which G3 and a prize ball number image G4 indicating the number of paid out prize balls are displayed. In addition, during a round game, as a round effect, a background image (round background) corresponding to the type of jackpot game is displayed on the display section 50a as a background of the right-handed hit image G2, the round image G3, and the prize ball number image G4. Image G201) is displayed, and BGM corresponding to the type of jackpot game is output from the speaker 52.

Furthermore, during the ending of the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 18(C), the display section 50a displays an ending image G5 that suggests the production mode to be set after the jackpot game and the total number of prize balls that have been paid out. A jackpot ending effect is performed in which the total prize ball count image G6 is displayed. In addition, during the ending, as a jackpot ending effect, a background image (ending background image G202) corresponding to the type of jackpot game is displayed on the display section 50a in the background of the ending image G5 and the total prize ball count image G6. be done.

In addition, hereinafter, the jackpot opening performance, the round performance, and the jackpot ending performance are collectively referred to as the "jackpot game performance" as the performance executed in the jackpot game. That is, a jackpot game performance is performed in the jackpot performance mode.

4-2. Special figure variation effect Next, the special figure variation effect will be explained. When the variable display of the special pattern starts, the pachinko gaming machine PY displays the special pattern variation pattern related to the variable display of the special pattern and the special pattern lottery result (jackpot determination result, jackpot symbol type determination result, reach determination result, A special figure variation effect is executed based on the special figure variation pattern determination result).

In the special symbol variation performance, a variation display of performance symbols is performed on the display unit 50a in a manner superimposed on a predetermined background image. In the fluctuating display of performance symbols, the performance symbols change and then stop. That is, after the special symbol fluctuation time and the variable display of the performance symbols are performed, the fluctuations are stopped and the static display of the performance symbols is performed. Then, basically, the result of the special drawing lottery is notified by the stop display of the performance symbols.

It should be noted that in the special symbol variation performance performed on the display section 50a, it is also possible to use images other than the variation display of production symbols. Furthermore, in addition to the image display device 50 including the display section 50a, a special feature using various presentation devices such as a speaker 52, a frame lamp 53, a board moving device 55, a first presentation button device 40, and a second presentation button device 41 is used. It is possible to perform figure fluctuation effects.

Next, the effect patterns displayed on the display section 50a in the special figure variable effect executed in response to the special figure variable display will be explained. The production pattern is also identification information for indicating the special drawing lottery result, and multiple types are provided. Specifically, one of the constituent elements of the effect pattern constitutes identification information for indicating the special drawing lottery result, and a plurality of types of effect patterns are provided depending on the difference in the identification information.

For example, as shown in FIG. 19(A), the effect patterns can be composed of numbers 1 to 9, and nine effect patterns can be provided. Then, a performance pattern including the number "1" is defined as a performance pattern G10a. Similarly, the performance symbols including numbers "2" to "9" are designated as performance symbols G10b to G10e. For convenience, when the individual performance symbols are handled without distinction, they are collectively referred to as "performance symbol G10."

In addition, the numerical parts of the production patterns G10c and G10g related to "3" and "7" are red, and "1", "2", "4", "5", "6", "8", and The numerical parts of the production patterns G10a, G10b, G10d, G10e, G10f, G10h, and G10i of "9" are blue. That is, colors are included in the constituent elements of the effect pattern G10. Note that the configuration of the performance symbol G10 and what the identification information is set to may be changed as appropriate. For example, other components such as characters associated with each number may be added to the production pattern G10.

Next, the effect pattern display area for displaying the effect pattern G10 will be explained. For example, as shown in FIG. 19(B), the display section 50a is divided into three parts approximately equally in the horizontal direction, and the left, center, and right sides are divided into a left presentation pattern area 50b1, a middle presentation pattern area 50b2, and a right presentation pattern. This can be the area 50b3. The performance pattern G10 is displayed in any of the left performance pattern area 50b1, the middle performance pattern area 50b2, and the right performance pattern area 50b3.

Mainly, in the first part of the special symbol variation performance, the performance pattern G10 displayed in the left performance pattern area 50b1 is collectively referred to as "left performance pattern EZ1", and the performance pattern G10 displayed in the middle performance pattern area 50b2 is collectively referred to as "left performance pattern EZ1". They are collectively referred to as "middle performance symbols EZ2," and the performance symbols G10 displayed in the right performance symbol area 50b3 are collectively referred to as "right performance symbols EZ3." That is, in the left performance pattern area 50b1, middle performance pattern area 50b2, and right performance pattern area 50b3, the performance pattern G10 consisting of numbers 1 to 9 is displayed in common, but the performance pattern G10 consisting of the numbers 1 to 9 is displayed in the relative display position. When distinguishing G10, it is written as a left performance pattern EZ1, a middle performance pattern EZ2, and a right performance pattern EZ3.

In addition, as described later, in the special pattern variation performance, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are displayed in a variable manner, but ultimately the special symbol lottery results (jackpot determination result, jackpot symbol type, reach determination result) are shown. The stop display of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed in this manner. When announcing a jackpot as a result of the special drawing lottery, performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed so that three performance symbols G10 of the same number are lined up side by side (so-called "Zero"). Therefore, hereinafter, the effect pattern G10 consisting of the same numbers forming the effect patterns EZ1 to EZ3 that are stopped and displayed when notifying a jackpot will be referred to as a "jackpot effect pattern." For example, if the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are displayed as "7, 7, 7," the jackpot design will be "performance symbol G10g," and if they are statically displayed as "9, 9, 9," the jackpot design will be " The production pattern is G10i. Furthermore, the jackpot effect symbols may be abbreviated by numbers included in the effect symbols. For example, if the jackpot effect pattern is "performance pattern G10g", the jackpot effect pattern will be "7", and if the jackpot effect pattern is "performance pattern G10i", the jackpot effect pattern will be "9". Furthermore, as will be described later, in the special symbol variation performance, the special symbol lottery result is completely displayed when the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are definitively stopped and displayed. However, basically, in the middle of the special symbol variation performance, before the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are definitively stopped and displayed, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed (temporary stop display). This is because the contents of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that have been temporarily stopped and displayed may be changed. For example, after the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a mode indicating a jackpot (relatively disadvantageous to the player), they are changed to a mode indicating another jackpot (relatively advantageous to the player). It may be done. Therefore, when the performance patterns EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner that first indicates a jackpot (before they are changed), the performance pattern G10 consisting of the same numbers that constitute the performance patterns EZ1 to EZ3. It is also referred to as a ``jackpot effect pattern''.

In addition, in the special pattern variation production, the variation display of production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, but in the middle of the variation display of production symbols EZ1 to EZ3, the left production symbol EZ1 and the right production symbol EZ3 are the production symbol G10 with the same number. Reach may be temporarily stopped (temporary stop display). As will be described later, reach is an effect that suggests that there is a possibility of a jackpot gaming state, and by reaching reach, the chance of winning a jackpot has increased. Therefore, the performance pattern G10 consisting of the same numbers forming the left performance pattern EZ1 and the right performance pattern EZ3 related to the reach is referred to as a "reach performance pattern". For example, when the left production symbol EZ1 and the right production symbol EZ3 temporarily stop display at the production symbol G10a of “1”, the reach production symbol becomes “production symbol G10a”, and when they temporarily stop display at the production symbol G10a of “3” , the reach effect pattern becomes “effect pattern G10c”. Furthermore, the reach effect design may be abbreviated by the number included in the effect pattern. For example, if the ready-to-win performance symbol is "performance symbol G10a", the ready-to-win performance symbol is abbreviated as "1", and if the ready-to-win performance symbol is "performance symbol G10c", the ready-to-reach performance symbol is abbreviated as "3".

Further, as shown in FIG. 19(B), it is possible to provide a small pattern area 50c in which small patterns are variably displayed in one section of the left end (lower left corner) of the lower end of the display section 50a. In the small symbol area 50c, small symbols can be variably displayed in accordance with the variable display of the special symbol. Although the design of the small symbol can be set as appropriate, for example, the number part of the performance symbol G10 may be reduced as it is.

In addition, in FIG. 19(B), the left presentation pattern area 50b1, the middle presentation pattern area 50b2, the right presentation pattern area 50b3, and the small pattern area 50c are clearly indicated by dashed lines, but these are the left presentation pattern area 50b1, These are described to represent the ranges of the middle effect symbol area 50b2, right effect symbol area 50b3, and small symbol area 50c, and are not actually displayed.

Furthermore, as described above, the performances that constitute the performance flow of the special figure variation performance include normal variation, N reach, L reach, SP reach, and battle performance. Some of these will now be explained.

4-2-1. Normal variation Pachinko gaming machine PY is capable of first performing normal variation in the special figure variation performance. The normal variation functions as an effect that suggests that the variable display of the special figure has started. Next, normal fluctuations will be specifically explained. As small symbols, a left small symbol KZ1, a medium small symbol KZ2, and a right small symbol KZ3 corresponding to the left performance symbol EZ1, middle performance symbol EZ2, and right performance symbol EZ3 are variably displayed in the small symbol area 50c.

For example, as shown in FIG. 20(A), on the display section 50a, the left effect pattern EZ1, the medium effect pattern EZ2, and the right effect pattern EZ3 are stopped and displayed, and the left small pattern KZ1, the medium small pattern KZ2, and the right small pattern When the variable display of the special pattern starts from the state where the symbol KZ3 is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the special pattern is not performed, and the variable display of the special pattern is started, the variable display of the special pattern starts as shown in FIG. 20(B) As shown in the figure, the special figure variation effect is started along with the start. Specifically, the variable display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is started, and the variable display of the left small symbol KZ1, the medium and small symbols KZ2, and the right small symbol KZ3 is started.

The display mode of the variable display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the display mode of the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 can be made different. For example, the variable display of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed by scrolling each production symbol EZ1 to EZ3 from the top to the bottom of the display section 50a, and the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is performed by scrolling each of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 from the top to the bottom of the display section 50a. It is also possible to change the positions one after another at a fixed position. Note that the display mode of the variable display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the display mode of the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 may be the same.

In addition, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are displayed in a variable manner at high speed immediately after the start of the variable display. While the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are being displayed in a high-speed variable manner, the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are basically images on the background side thereof, such as background images G111 to G114. is displayed with transparency for easy viewing.

Then, if the special pattern variation pattern of the variable display of this special pattern is a special pattern variation pattern with no reach and no loss (for example, normal loss variation), the variable display of the special pattern ends (special pattern (stop display), the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed at the loss eyes (so-called "rose eyes") that are unique to no-reach losses.

Towards the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3, for example, first, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 20(D), the right effect symbol EZ3 temporarily stops (temporarily stops) at approximately the center position in the vertical direction, and furthermore, as shown in FIG. Temporarily stops (temporary stop) at the center position.

Finally, the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3, which are temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) in a horizontally lined state at approximately the vertical center position, are completely stopped all at once as shown in FIG. 20(F). , and the stop is confirmed (the stop display of production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed). When the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3, which have been temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped), come to a complete stop, that is, when the final stop display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, the three small symbols KZ1 to EZ3 KZ3 stops all at once at the same random number as the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3, and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are also stopped and displayed.

In addition, when we say that the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 temporarily stop, we mean that the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 do not move greatly as in a scroll display, but rather shake slightly or make small reciprocating motions on the spot. say. Therefore, strictly speaking, the state in which the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed is different from the state in which the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are definitively stopped and displayed, but this provisional stop display and A definitive stop display is sometimes referred to as a "stop display" in a broad sense. In addition, in the example of FIG. 20, when the stop display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, the performance symbols are stopped in the order of left performance symbol EZ1 → right performance symbol EZ3 → middle performance symbol EZ2, but the order of stopping ( The method) is not limited to this and can be set as appropriate.

4-2-2. Reach Next, we will explain how reach is established. Even if the special figure variation pattern of the variable display of the special figure is a special figure variation pattern with reach and loss (for example, N loss variation), basically the same as the case without reach described above, on the display section 50a, As shown in FIG. 21(A), the variable display of the special symbols starts from a state where the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are definitely stopped and displayed, and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed, As shown in FIG. 21(B), the variable display of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 starts, and at the same time, the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 starts.

After that, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. As shown in 21(D), the right effect symbols EZ3 related to the same number "5" are temporarily stopped (temporary stop) in line in the horizontal direction at approximately the center position in the vertical direction, and a reach is established. When a reach is achieved, an image G11 indicating that a reach is achieved (a reach suggesting image) is displayed. Incidentally, even if the reach is achieved with the left performance symbol EZ1 and the right performance symbol EZ3, the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 continues to be performed.

Furthermore, in the example of FIG. 21, when the reach is established, the production symbols are temporarily stopped (temporary stop) in the order of left production symbol EZ1 → right production symbol EZ3, but the order (method) of temporary stopping is as follows. It is not limited to , and can be set as appropriate. Furthermore, the numbers of the production symbols that constitute the reach are not limited to "5" either. Further, the position where the vehicle is temporarily stopped (temporary stop) is not limited to the substantially central position in the vertical direction. Further, the direction in which the effect symbols forming the reach are lined up is not limited to the horizontal direction, but may be in other directions such as a diagonal direction.

In this way, the entire period of the special symbol variation performance when there is no reach and a loss, and the section from the start of the special symbol variation performance when the reach occurs to the time when the reach is established can be made into normal variation. However, the time until the reach is established can be appropriately set based on the special symbol fluctuation pattern and the like. Furthermore, it is also possible to perform various preview performances such as a so-called "pseudo series", a cut-in preview, and a dialogue preview until the reach is established. Alternatively, it is also possible to enter the so-called "zone" before the reach is established.

4-2-3. N-Reach Pachinko gaming machine PY is capable of performing N-Reach when a reach is established after a normal fluctuation. N reach is a performance that suggests that the lottery result of the special drawing lottery may have been a "big hit", and functions as a performance to make the player expect a big win. Next, N reach will be specifically explained.

When reach is established, for example, as shown in FIG. 21(D), N reach is performed from that point on. In N reach, as shown in FIG. 22(A), the state when reach is established is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). When the N reach is started, as shown in FIG. 22(B), the medium effect pattern EZ2, which is fluctuatingly displayed (scrolling) at high speed in the normal mode, gradually slows down.

If the special pattern variation pattern of the variable display of the special pattern is a special pattern variation pattern with reach and loss (for example, N loss variation), from the state where reach is established, the middle production pattern EZ2 will temporarily be at approximately the center position in the vertical direction. The game stops (temporarily stops), and a stop display of the production pattern indicating a loss is performed. At this time, reach has been established, so as shown in Figure 22 (C-1), a medium effect symbol consisting of a number ("4" in Figure 22 (C-1)) different from the numbers that constitute the reach EZ2 temporarily stops. Then, with the end of the variable display of the special figure (stop display of the special figure), the temporary stop state becomes a complete stop state, as shown in FIG. The left effect pattern EZ1, the middle effect pattern EZ2, and the right effect pattern EZ3 are stopped and displayed.

In addition, when the production patterns EZ1 to EZ3 that have been temporarily stopped (temporary stop) completely stop at a loss that is unique to a loss with a reach, that is, when the stop display of the production patterns EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, 3 The three small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 stop all at once at the same loss points as the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3, which are unique to a reach loss, and the stop display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is also performed. Note that the contents of N reach can be changed or added as appropriate.

If the special symbol fluctuation performance does not end at N reach, as shown in Figure 22 (C-2), the remaining one medium performance symbol EZ2 that has not stopped while the reach is maintained will fluctuate at high speed again, and the figure As shown in 22 (D-2), N reach may develop (switch) to L reach or SP reach through whiteout, which indicates development in production.

4-2-4. L Reach Pachinko gaming machine PY can perform L Reach after N Reach. The L reach is a performance that suggests that the possibility that the result of the special drawing lottery will be a "big hit" is higher than the N reach, and functions as a performance to make the player expect a jackpot. Note that even in the case of L reach, the established reach is maintained, but for example, as shown in FIG. It moves to a predetermined position that does not overlap with the small symbol area 50c in the section 50a (for example, the left presentation symbol EZ1 is at the upper left of the display section 50a, and the right presentation symbol EZ3 is at the upper right of the display section 50a).

Moreover, at the start of L reach, for example, as shown in FIG. 23(A), a background image exclusively for L reach (background image for L reach G114) is displayed on the display unit 50a. The L reach background image G114 is composed of a moving image in which a predetermined Thule develops. The content of the story of the video related to the L reach background image G114 can be set as appropriate, but in the basic embodiment, the content is such that the main character confesses his feelings to a girl.

When the L reach background image G114 is displayed, the scene starts with the main character waiting for a girl at a meeting place, as shown in FIG. 23(A). Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 23(B), a girl appears at the meeting place. At this time, at approximately the center of the display section 50a, a production symbol with the number "5" that constitutes the reach and a production symbol with the number "4" that does not constitute the reach appear as the medium production symbol EZ2. It rotates slowly, coming out from the back side to the front side, and then returning to the back side.

While the rotation of the number "4" production symbol and the number "5" production symbol continues, Thule related to the L reach background image G114 progresses. Then, as shown in FIG. 23(C), a scene appears in which the main character confesses his feelings to the girl. At this time, at approximately the center of the display section 50a, the effect pattern with the number "5" that makes up the reach and the effect pattern with the number "4" that does not make up the reach seem to mutually repel the opponent. collide with each other. The number "5" production symbol constitutes a reach, and the number "4" production symbol does not constitute a reach, so the number "4" production symbol is blown away and the number "5" production symbol is If it remains, the stop display of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is established in a manner that indicates a jackpot, while if the production symbol with the number "5" is blown away and the production symbol with the number "4" remains, the production is in a manner that indicates a loss in reach. The stop display of symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is established. Therefore, the scene in FIG. 23(C) is the final phase of the L reach, and a performance suggesting a jackpot (jackpot suggestion performance) is executed or a performance suggesting a loss (loss suggestion performance) is executed. This constitutes a branching point (a so-called "win/lose branching point").

At the winning/losing point, if the special pattern variation pattern of the variable display of the special symbol is a jackpot variation (L jackpot variation), a smiling girl will appear close-up on the display section 50a, as shown in FIG. 24 (A-1). After this is displayed, as shown in FIG. 24 (B-1), the main character who is happy after successfully confessing is displayed, and a predetermined sound effect is output from the speaker 52. At this time, along with the left performance symbol EZ1 and right performance symbol EZ3 of the number "5" that constitute the reach, the middle performance symbol EZ2 of the number "5" that constitutes the reach is temporarily stopped at the center of the display section 50a. displayed in the following manner. That is, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a jackpot.

The display of the main character happy after successfully confessing and the output of a predetermined sound effect constitute a jackpot suggestion production. After the jackpot suggesting performance, as shown in FIG. 24 (C-1), the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a jackpot.

On the other hand, after the winning/losing point, if the special symbol variation pattern of the variable display of the special symbol is a loss variation with reach (L loss variation), the jackpot suggestion effect is not performed and the figure is displayed in the L reach background image G114. As shown in FIG. 24 (A-2), a close-up of a girl with a sad expression is displayed on the display section 50a, and then, as shown in FIG. 24 (B-2), she is disappointed because she failed to confess. The main character is displayed. At this time, along with the left performance symbol EZ1 and right performance symbol EZ3 of the number "5" that constitute the reach, the middle performance symbol EZ2 of the number "5" that does not constitute the reach is temporarily stopped at the center of the display section 50a. is displayed. That is, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating that the reach is out of reach.

The display of the main character being disappointed after failing to confess constitutes a presentation that suggests failure. After the loss suggestion performance, as shown in FIG. 24 (C-2), the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed in the losing position for reach.

4-2-5. SP Reach Also, the pachinko gaming machine PY is capable of performing SP Reach after N Reach. The SP reach is a performance that suggests that the possibility that the result of the special drawing lottery will be a "big hit" is higher than the L reach, and functions as a performance to make the player expect a jackpot. Note that even in SP reach, the established reach is maintained, but for example, as shown in FIG. It moves to a predetermined position that does not overlap with the small symbol area 50c in the section 50a (for example, the left presentation symbol EZ1 is at the upper left of the display section 50a, and the right presentation symbol EZ3 is at the upper right of the display section 50a).

Furthermore, at the start of SP reach, for example, as shown in FIG. 25(A), a background image exclusively for SP reach (SP reach background image G115) is displayed on the display unit 50a. The SP reach background image G115 is composed of a moving image in which a predetermined Thule develops. The content of the story of the video related to the SP reach background image G115 can be set as appropriate, but in the basic embodiment, the story consists of a confrontation between the main character and an enemy character who is a rival of the main character. ing. Note that the main character is a baseball pitcher, the enemy character is a baseball batter, and the two face off in the positions of a pitcher and a batter in a baseball game.

When the SP reach background image G115 is displayed, an enemy character first appears as shown in FIG. 25(A), and then an enemy character appears in the center of the display section 50a as shown in FIG. 25(B). An image (SP reach start title image) G11 indicating that SP reach has started is displayed. The SP reach start title image G11 is composed of a title image G11a representing the title of the SP reach "In FIG. Ru.

Next, as shown in FIG. 25(C), a scene in which the main character and the enemy character are facing each other is displayed. After that, in the SP reach background image G115, as shown in FIG. 26(A), the main character throws a ball, and as shown in FIG. 26(B), the ball advances toward the enemy character, and as shown in FIG. As shown in C), the enemy character starts swinging the bat. Next, as shown in FIG. 26(D), the ball and the bat approach each other, and a scene is reached in which the confrontation between the protagonist character and the enemy character is about to come to an end. This scene constitutes a turning point (win-lose turning point) in the confrontation between the pitcher and the batter, where the main character wins, suggesting a jackpot, or loses, suggesting a loss.

After this winning/losing point, if the special pattern variation pattern of the variable display of the special symbol is a jackpot variation (SP jackpot variation), as shown in FIG. After winning the battle, as shown in FIG. 27 (B-1), the main character strikes out the enemy character and screams on the mound, and a predetermined sound effect is output from the speaker 52. be done. At this time, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a jackpot.

The display of the main character shouting after winning the battle and the output of a predetermined sound effect constitute a jackpot suggestion performance. After the jackpot suggesting performance, as shown in FIG. 27 (C-1), the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a jackpot.

On the other hand, after the winning/losing point, if the special symbol variation pattern of the variable display of the special symbol is a reach loss variation (SP loss variation), the jackpot suggestion effect is not performed and the SP reach background image G115 is displayed as shown in FIG. 27 ( As shown in A-2), the enemy character hits a home run and loses the match, and as shown in FIG. 27 (B-2), the main character is disappointed on the mound. At this time, the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a reach loss.

The display of the main character being disappointed after losing the battle constitutes a presentation suggesting a loss. After the loss suggestion performance, as shown in FIG. 27 (C-2), the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed in the losing eye for reach.

Next, the movable object performance and operation performance performed in the special figure variation performance will be explained. The movable body performance and operation performance may be performed as part of the above-mentioned SP reach, L reach, N reach, or jackpot game performance, etc., or may be performed independently of these performances. Sometimes it is done. First, I will explain the moving object performance.

4-3. Movable Body Performance The pachinko game machine PY is capable of performing a movable body performance that involves the movement of a movable body at a predetermined timing in a predetermined performance such as a special figure variation performance or a jackpot game performance. The movable object performance is a performance using a movable device such as the board movable device 55, and functions as a performance that suggests the degree of expectation of a jackpot or development to SP reach.

For example, when the movable object effect functions as an effect that suggests the development to SP reach, as shown in Fig. 28 (A), when developing from N reach to SP reach in the special figure variation effect, first As shown in (B), the plate movable device 55 is activated, and the plate movable body 55k is lowered to the operating position when viewed from the front, and is held at that position for a predetermined period of time. Furthermore, at this time, an effect image G13 associated with the operation of the movable board 55k is also displayed on the entire display section 50a. Then, as shown in FIG. 28(C), the effect image G13 is erased, the board movable body 55k rises to the standby position, and the board movable device 55 returns to the normal standby state. When the board moving device 55 returns to the normal standby state, it develops into SP reach. Note that the operation details of the movable device in the movable body performance can be changed or added as appropriate.

4-4. Operation Performance Next, the operation performance will be explained. The pachinko game machine PY performs an operation promotion performance at a predetermined timing in a predetermined performance such as a special figure fluctuation performance or a jackpot game performance, and an operation result performance according to the operation of the first performance button 40k, the second performance button 41k, etc. It is possible to perform operations including. The operation promotion performance is a performance that encourages the player to operate the operation means, and the operation result performance is a performance that is performed in response to the operation of the operation means in the operation promotion performance, and each is a performance to make the player expect a jackpot. It functions as a performance.

For example, as mentioned above, when a winning or losing point is reached in L reach or SP reach, a period (operation valid period) occurs during which the pressing operation of the first production button 40k is valid, and along with the occurrence of this operation valid period, , as shown in FIG. 29(A), a performance (operation promotion performance) that prompts the user to operate the first performance button 40k is performed.

In the operation promotion performance, an operation promotion performance image G12 is displayed on the display section 50a. The operation promotion performance image G12 includes an image (operation target image) G12a representing the first performance button 40k to be operated, and an image (press operation image) G12b representing the operation mode (i.e., press operation) of the first performance button 40k. and an image (operation valid period remaining time image) G12c representing the remaining time of the operation valid period (operation valid period) related to the operation of the first effect button 40k.

Note that the operation valid period remaining time image G12c is composed of a generally curved progress bar, and changes as time passes so that the player can easily understand the remaining time of the operation valid period. Note that FIG. 29(B) shows a state in which the operation valid period has occurred and 1/3 of the operation valid time has elapsed.

Then, when the special pattern variation pattern of the variable display of the special pattern is a jackpot variation (SP jackpot variation), after the first production button 40k is pressed during the operation validity period, or after the first production button 40k is pressed during the operation validity period, After the remaining time of the valid operation period runs out without 40k being operated, the operation result presentation is performed.

As shown in FIG. 29(C), for example, as shown in FIG. 29(C), the operation result is that the panel movable device 55 is operated, the panel movable body 55k is lowered to the operating position, is held at that position for a predetermined time, and the rotating member 55k1 is lowered. rotates for a predetermined time. In this way, the operation result presentation also includes the movable object presentation. Furthermore, at this time, an effect image G13 accompanying the movement of the board movable body 55k is displayed on the entire display section 50a as an operation result effect. Then, as shown in FIG. 29(D), the effect image G13 is erased, the rotation of the rotating member 55k1 is stopped, and the movable board 55k is raised, thereby ending the operation result presentation. When the operation result presentation is completed, a jackpot suggestion presentation is performed.

On the other hand, if the special symbol variation pattern of the variable display of the special symbol is reach loss variation (SP loss variation), even if the first production button 40k is pressed during the operation validity period, or the first production button 40k is pressed. Even if the remaining time of the performance button operation validity period runs out without being executed, the operation result performance is not performed and the loss suggesting performance is performed.

Note that the operation result presentation is not limited to the operation of the board moving device 55 or the display of the effect image G13, but can be changed or added as appropriate. Further, the operation performance is not limited to the special symbol variation performance, but can also be executed in the jackpot performance.

4-5. Pre-reading effect Next, a pre-reading effect that can be executed before the special figure variable display subject to special figure reservation is executed will be explained. The pachinko gaming machine PY is capable of performing a look-ahead effect for the special figure 1 hold or special figure 2 hold for which no jackpot judgment has been made, based on the result of the look-ahead judgment, at any timing of the special figure fluctuation effect. . The pre-read performance is a performance that suggests the degree of expectation of a jackpot for the special figure 1 reservation or the special figure 2 reservation, and functions as a performance that makes the player expect a jackpot even before the variable display of the special figure corresponding to the reservation. As an example of a look-ahead performance, there is a reservation change notice using a reservation performance that represents special map reservation. Here, the pending performance and pending change notice performed in the normal performance mode will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 30(A), the hold effect is performed in a hold display area 50d formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in a section in the substantially center of the lower end of the display section 50a. The hold display area 50d is composed of a first area 50d1, a second area 50d2, a third area 50d3, and a fourth area 50d4, which are obtained by dividing the hold display area 50d into four substantially equally in the left and right direction. That is, in the hold display area 50d, the first area 50d1 to the fourth area 50d4 are arranged in order from the left end to the right end.

In the first area 50d1, the first variable display of special figure 1 is displayed based on the special figure 1 related random number that occurs first among the reserved special figure 1 reserves and corresponds to the special figure 1 reserve. A hold icon representing special figure 1 hold is displayed. Similarly, in the second area 50d2 to fourth area 50d4, the second to fourth reserved special figure 1 reservations are generated based on the special figure 1 related random numbers corresponding to the special figure 1 reservations. A hold icon representing special figure 1 hold, in which special figure 1 variable display is performed, is displayed second to fourth.

In addition, below, the special figure 1 reservation corresponding to the reservation icon displayed in 1st area|region 50d1 is called "special figure 1 reservation of reservation order 1." Similarly, the special figure 1 reservation corresponding to the reservation icons displayed in the second area 50d2, third area 50d3, and fourth area 50d4 is referred to as "special figure 1 reservation in reservation order 2" and "special figure 1 reservation in reservation order 3." "Special figure 1 reservation" and "Special figure 1 reservation of reservation order 4". That is, the existing special drawing 1 reservations are referred to as "reservation order 1" to "reservation order 4" in the order in which they occur.

Moreover, the display area 50e is formed to the left of the hold display area 50d. In the display area 50e, the icon representing the special figure 1 variable display currently being executed is displayed. Therefore, the object indicated by the icon displayed in the display area 50e is different from the object indicated by the hold icon displayed in the hold display area 50d, and strictly speaking, the "hold effect" corresponding to special drawing 1 hold is Although not included, since the display of the hold icon and the display of the icon are related, hereinafter, the display of the hold icon and the display of the icon will be collectively referred to as "hold effect". Further, the hold icon and the icon are collectively referred to as an "icon." Furthermore, the special figure 1 variation display being executed that the icon indicates is also referred to as "the variation".

In addition, in FIG. 30(A), the hold display area 50d and the display area 50e are clearly indicated by dashed lines, and the first area 50d1 to the fourth area 50d4 are clearly shown by broken lines; This is written to represent the range of the first area 50d1 to the fourth area 50d4 and the display area 50e, and is not actually displayed.

Next, a specific example of the hold effect will be explained. In the following explanation, variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 will be omitted. As a premise, it is assumed that the special figure 1 variable display is in progress (the special figure variable effect is in progress) and the number of special figure 1 reservations (U1) is "2". Under this situation, as shown in FIG. 30(B), in the aforementioned first area 50d1 (not shown), the special figure 1 hold that occurred first among the currently held special figure 1 hold (order of hold) A reservation icon HA2 representing a special figure 1 reservation (reservation order 2) is displayed, and in the aforementioned second area 50d2 (not shown), a reservation icon HA2 representing a special figure 1 reservation (reservation order 2 A hold icon HA3 representing special figure 1 hold) is displayed. Further, in the aforementioned display area 50e (not shown), the icon HA1 representing the currently executed special figure 1 variable display is displayed. Note that the display mode of the icons HA1 to HA3 displayed in FIG. 30(B) is the normal mode.

In this manner, in the hold performance, special drawings 1 are displayed in order of occurrence from the left end to the right of the hold display area 50d. That is, the variable display of reserved special symbols, in other words, the variable display of unexecuted special symbols based on the special symbol related determination information stored in the special symbol reservation storage unit 105, is individually displayed with a reservation icon. Ru.

Then, as shown in FIG. 30(C), when the stop display of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, the icon HA1, which had been representing the special symbol variation display being executed until immediately before, is erased. Continuously, when variable display of special symbols (special figure variation effect) is started based on the special figure 1 hold representing the hold icon HA2, the hold icon HA2 and the hold icon HA3 are shifted. Specifically, the hold icon HA2 displayed in the first area 50d1 (not shown) moves to the display area 50e (not shown), and the hold icon HA3 displayed in the second area 50d2 (not shown) moves to the corresponding display area 50e (not shown). to the first area 50d1. That is, the displayed hold icon HA2 and hold icon HA3 are each shifted one by one to the left. This means that the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the hold icon HA2 is started, and the special figure 1 hold that the hold icon HA3 represents is the special figure 1 hold that occurred first among the currently held special figure 1 hold. This is to adapt the hold icon HA2 and the hold icon HA3 to the situation in response to the special figure variable display being started next.

Further, the pending icon HA2 displayed in the display area 50e represents the special figure 1 variable display being executed, so it becomes the icon HA2 when displayed in the display area 50e. That is, the word "icon" is prefixed to "pending" for the icon displayed in the pending display area 50d, and "relevant" for the icon displayed in the display area 50e. In other words, when the hold icon is displayed, if the start condition for the special symbol fluctuation display is satisfied for the special symbol reservation indicated by the hold icon, the special symbol fluctuation display related to the establishment of the start condition is A corresponding hold icon is displayed as the icon.

In addition, when changing from a hold icon to the relevant icon, in other words, when moving the icon from the hold display area 50d to the relevant display area 50e, the size of the icon may remain the same or may be enlarged. In FIG. 30(C), the icon is enlarged approximately twice when moving from the reserved display area 50d to the display area 50e.

Then, from this situation, when a game ball enters the first starting port 11 and a special drawing 1 reservation occurs, a new reservation is made according to the occurrence of the special symbol 1 reservation, as shown in FIG. 30(E). Icon HA4 is displayed in the aforementioned second area 50d2 (not shown).

In this way, when a prize is won in the first starting slot 11 and a special drawing 1 related random number is acquired, one common icon is displayed. This icon will disappear when the special figure 1 variable display based on the winning prize ends, but while it is displayed, it will remain in the state in which the special figure 1 variable display is placed (on hold and in progress). Depending on the icon, the icon exists under different names (pending icon and the icon).

By the way, as mentioned above, the start winning command includes win/fail information and special figure fluctuation pattern information. Then, the pachinko game machine PY can display the hold icon in a normal mode or a special mode based on this validity information and special symbol variation pattern information. Displaying this hold icon in a special manner is called a "hold notice."

When the display mode of the pending icon is a special mode, that is, when a pending notice is given, the player can expect that he may win a jackpot with the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the pending icon. Next, a specific example of the suspension notice will be explained. As a specific example of the suspension notice, assume that the display mode of the suspension icon HA4 shown in FIG. 30(E) becomes a special mode.

One type of reservation notice is a reservation notice that enters a special mode immediately after the reservation icon is displayed, in other words, a reservation notice is given when special drawing 1 reservation occurs (at the time of winning at the first starting gate 11). There are types. For example, as shown in FIG. 31(A), from the situation before the hold icon HA4 is displayed (the situation in FIG. 30(D)), a game ball enters the first starting port 11, and the special figure 1 is put on hold. When this occurs, similarly to the case of FIG. 30(E), in response to the occurrence of the special drawing 1 holding, the holding icon HA4 in the normal mode is displayed in the aforementioned second area 50d2 (not shown). In addition, in the drawing, the hold icon in the normal mode appears to be completely stationary, but in reality, even if you try to make it completely stationary, the display position does not move, but the It may also be configured so that it sways slightly in the field.

Immediately thereafter, as shown in FIG. 31(B), the display mode of the hold icon HA4 changes from the normal mode to the special mode (gray in FIG. 31(B)) (the hold notice is given). In the example of FIG. 31, the hold icon HA4 is displayed in the normal mode for a moment after being displayed, but it may be displayed in a special mode and the period during which it is displayed in the normal mode may be eliminated.

As another type of reservation notice, there is a reservation notice type in which the reservation icon takes a special mode when it moves, in other words, a reservation icon change notice is given when the special figure 1 reservation is shifted. For example, as shown in FIG. 32(A), from the situation before the hold icon HA4 is displayed (the situation in FIG. 30(D)), a game ball enters the first starting port 11, and the special figure 1 is put on hold. When this occurs, as shown in FIG. 32(B), in response to the occurrence of the special drawing 1 holding, the holding icon HA4 in the normal mode (white in FIG. 32(B)) moves to the aforementioned second area 50d2 (not shown). will be displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 32(C), when the stop display of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, the icon HA2, which had been representing the special symbol variation display being executed until immediately before, is erased. Subsequently, when the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol variation effect) is started based on the special symbol 1 reservation represented by the reservation icon HA3, as shown in FIG. 32(D), the special symbol is displayed in the first area 50d1. The hold icon HA3 that was displayed moves to the corresponding display area 50e (not shown), and the hold icon HA4 that was displayed in the second area 50d2 moves to the first area 50d1 (not shown). Here, when the hold icon HA4 moves from the second area 50d2 to the first area 50d1, its display mode changes from a normal mode to a special mode (gray in FIG. 32(D)) (a notice of hold is given) .

Furthermore, it is possible to provide a plurality of types of special modes related to the reservation notice, so that the degree of jackpot expectation can be made different depending on the type of the special mode. For example, it is assumed that the display mode of the hold icon is associated with the color of the hold icon, and white, green, red, and gold are set as the display mode of the hold icon. Here, white is the normal mode, and green, red, and gold are the special modes. The jackpot expectation level indicated by the display mode of the pending icon can be set to increase in the order of white < green < red < gold.

In addition, the pre-reading performance can be performed for both or one of the special figure 1 reservation and the special figure 2 reservation. Further, the pre-read effect is not limited to the display mode of the hold icon HA, but includes images other than the hold icon HA on the display section 50a such as a background image, sound output from the speaker 52, light emission from the frame lamp 53, and board movement. It is possible to perform the operation using a presentation device other than the image display device 50, such as the operation by the device 55. Furthermore, as a production mode of the look-ahead production, in addition to a production mode that continues without interruption from the execution until the special symbol change display starts, such as a pending icon change notice by the pending icon HA, there is also a stoppage of the production pattern. It is also possible to use a performance mode that is executed intermittently and continuously, such as every time a display is performed or a variable display of performance symbols is started.

5. Game control by game control microcomputer 101 [Game control main processing]
Next, game control by the game control microcomputer 101 will be explained based on FIGS. 33 to 42. Note that the flowchart for controlling the game described below is an example. As for the plurality of processes in the flowchart, the order of execution can be changed as appropriate or the processes can be executed in parallel as long as there is no inconsistency in the process contents.

Further, counters, timers, flags, status, buffers, etc. that appear in the game control by the game control microcomputer 101, which will be explained below, are provided in the game RAM 104. Further, the initial value of the counter is "0", the initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF", and the initial value of the status is "1".

When the pachinko game machine PY is powered on, the game control microcomputer 101 provided in the game control board 100 reads out and executes the game control main processing program shown in FIG. 33 from the game ROM 103. As shown in the figure, in the game control main process, first, a power-on process (S001) is performed.

In the power-on process, the gaming control microcomputer 101 first sets permission for access to the gaming RAM 104. This makes it possible to write and read information to and from the gaming RAM 104. Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether the RAM clear switch 192 mounted on the game control board 100 has been specifically operated (ON or not).

If the RAM clear switch 192 has not been specifically operated, the game control microcomputer 101 subsequently determines whether or not the power-off flag is ON. The power outage flag is a flag that indicates the occurrence of a power outage, and is a flag that is turned on in a power outage monitoring process that will be described later.

If the power-off flag is ON, the game control microcomputer 101 calculates a checksum and compares it with the checksum calculated at the time of the power-off. The checksum is calculated by considering the gaming information stored in the gaming RAM 104 as numerical values.

If the checksum values match, the gaming control microcomputer 101 determines that the storage contents of the gaming RAM 104 are normal, and manages the setting of the working area of the gaming RAM 104 when the power is restored. In this setting process, the power restoration information is read from the gaming ROM 103, and this power restoration information is set in the working area of the gaming RAM 104. Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 101 turns off the power-off flag and performs a power-on command setting process.

In the power-on command setting process, the game control microcomputer 101 performs a setting process for outputting a power-on command to the production control board 120 after a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed. Specifically, a predetermined time until the power-on command is output is set in a timer, and subtraction of the time set in the timer is started. Then, when the value of the subtracted timer becomes "0", it means that a predetermined time has elapsed, so a power-on command is set in a predetermined output buffer of the gaming RAM 104. Thereby, the set power-on command is outputted to the production control board 120 in an output process (S101) described later. Furthermore, the power restoration information includes information indicating the gaming state at the time of power outage. Therefore, the gaming control microcomputer 101 sets a command (gaming state designation command) indicating the gaming state at the time of power outage included in the power restoration information in a predetermined output buffer along with the power-on command. Thereby, the set gaming state designation command is outputted to the production control board 120 together with the power-on command in an output process (S101) to be described later.

In addition, if the power-off flag is not ON, the power may not have been properly shut off, or if the RAM clear switch 192 has been operated in a specific manner, the game control microcomputer 101 will Clear all stored game information. Thereafter, the gaming control microcomputer 101 initializes the work area of the gaming RAM 104. In this initial setting process, the initial setting information read from the gaming ROM 103 is set in the working area of the gaming RAM 104. Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 outputs a RAM clear notification command to the production control board 120 to notify that the RAM has been cleared, and performs a power-on command setting process.

After the power-on process, the game control microcomputer 101 disables interrupts (S002) and executes the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S003). In this normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S003), the counter values of various random numbers related to the regular symbol related determination information and the special symbol related determination information are updated by adding one. Counters related to various random numbers (random number counters) are means for generating random numbers using software. When the counter value (random number counter value) of each random number counter reaches the upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. Note that the initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" or may be changed randomly. Further, at least a portion of each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated using a known random number generation circuit including a counter IC or the like.

When the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S003) is completed, an interrupt is permitted (S004). While interrupts are enabled, game control side timer interrupt processing (S005) can be executed. The game control side timer interrupt process (S005) is executed based on an interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to the gaming CPU 102 at a cycle of, for example, 4 msec. That is, the game control side timer interrupt process (S005) is executed at a cycle of 4 msec. Then, after the game control side timer interrupt process (S005) ends and until the next game control side timer interrupt process (S005) starts, the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S003) Update processing of various random number counter values is repeatedly performed. In addition, if an interrupt pulse is input to the gaming CPU 102 while interrupts are disabled, the gaming control side timer interrupt processing (S005) will not start immediately, but will start after interrupts are enabled (S004). .

[Game control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, the game control side timer interrupt processing (S005) will be explained. As shown in FIG. 34, in the game control side timer interrupt processing (S005), output processing (S101) is first executed. In the output process (S101), commands etc. set in the output buffer provided in the game RAM 104 of the game control board 100 in each process described below are output to the production control board 120, payout control board 170, etc.

In the input process (S102) performed after the output process (S101), the game control microcomputer 101 takes in the detection signal from the lower tray full switch that detects the fullness of the surplus ball storage hole 35A, and inputs the detection signal from the lower tray full switch to the game as the lower tray full data. The data is stored in the output buffer of the RAM 104.

The normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S103) performed next is the same as the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S003) performed in the game control main process of FIG. 33. That is, the updating process of various random number counter values related to the general figure related determination information and the special figure related determination information is performed during the execution period of the game control side timer interrupt process (S005) and the other period (main side timer interrupt process (S005) ) after the end of the period until the next game control side timer interrupt process (S005) is started).

Next to the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S103), the game control microcomputer 101 performs a sensor detection process (S104), then performs a normal operation process (S105), and further performs a special operation process (S106). conduct. The sensor detection process, normal operation process, and special operation process will be described later.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 executes other processes (S107) and ends the game control side timer interrupt process (S005). Other processing (S107) includes power-off monitoring processing when the power is cut off, updating of a timer provided in the gaming RAM 104, and the like. Further, as other processing (S107), a payout control process is performed to pay out prize balls to the player. In the payout control process, the prize ball counter for the first starting hole 11, the prize ball counter for the second starting hole 12, the prize ball counter for the big winning hole 14, and the prize ball counter for the general winning hole 10 are set to " A check is made to see if it exceeds "0", and if it exceeds "0", a prize ball request signal is transmitted to the payout control board 170. Then, when transmitting the prize ball signal, an update process is performed to subtract "1" from the prize ball counter related to the signal.

Then, the gaming control microcomputer 101 repeatedly executes steps S002 to S004 of the gaming control main processing until the next interrupt pulse is input to the gaming CPU 102, and when the interrupt pulse is input (approximately 4 msec later) ), the game control side timer interrupt process (S005) is executed again. In the output processing (S101) of the gaming control side timer interrupt processing (S005) executed again, the gaming control microcomputer 101 outputs the data that was set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 in the previous gaming control side timer interrupt processing (S005). Outputs commands etc.

[Sensor detection processing]
Next, sensor detection processing will be explained using FIGS. 35 and 36. In the sensor detection process (S104), first, it is determined whether a game ball has won in the general winning hole 10, that is, whether a game ball has been detected by the general winning hole sensor 10a (S201). If a game ball has not entered the general winning hole 10 (NO in S201), the process advances to step S203, and if a game ball has entered the general winning hole 10 (YES in S201), a predetermined number of game balls have been entered into the game ball. General winning hole prize ball processing for paying out prize balls is performed (S202). In the general winning hole prize ball process, the number of prize balls ("3" in the basic embodiment) corresponding to the winning into the general winning hole 10 is added to the prize ball counter for the general winning hole 10.

In step S203, it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the gate 13, that is, whether the game ball has been detected by the gate sensor 13a. If the game ball has not passed through the gate 13 (NO in S203), the process advances to step S207. On the other hand, if the game ball has passed through the gate 13 (YES in S203), whether the normal operation status (described later) is 1 or not, in other words, whether the normal figure variable display or the auxiliary game is being performed. It is determined whether or not (S204). If the normal operation status is not 1 (NO in S204), the process advances to step S207, and if the normal operation status is 1 (YES in S204), the counter value of the normal symbol random number counter (label-TRND-F) is The normal symbol random number indicated by is acquired as the common symbol related determination information (S205), the acquired common symbol related determination information is stored in the common symbol retention storage section 86 provided in the gaming RAM 104 (S206), and step S207 Proceed to.

In step S207, it is determined whether a game ball has entered the second starting port 12, that is, whether a game ball has been detected by the second starting port sensor 12a. If the game ball has not entered the second starting port 12 (NO in S207), the process advances to step S214, and if the game ball has entered the second starting port 12 (YES in S207), the game ball has been placed in the predetermined position. Second starting hole prize ball processing is performed to pay out the number of prize balls (S208). In the second starting hole prize ball process, the number of prize balls (“2” in the basic embodiment) corresponding to the winning to the second starting hole 12 is added to the prize ball counter for the second starting hole 12.

Next, if the number of special drawings 2 pending (specifically the value of the counter (special drawing 2 holding number counter) provided in the gaming RAM 104 that counts the number of special drawings 2 holding) is "4" (upper limit memory number) or more, It is determined whether there is one (S209). If the number of reserved special drawings 2 is "4" or more (YES in S209), the process advances to step S214, but if the number of reserved special drawings 2 is not "4" or more (less than "4"), ( NO in S209), the special figure 2 reservation number addition process is performed (S210). In the special figure 2 reservation number addition process, the special figure 2 reservation number counter is incremented by 1, and the special figure 2 reservation number indicated by the special figure 2 reservation display 83b is increased by 1.

Next, special symbol random number counter (label-TRND-T), jackpot symbol type random number counter (label-TRND-OS), reach random number counter (label-TRND-RC), and special symbol variation pattern random number counter (label-TRND- The special figure 2 related determination information consisting of HP) is acquired and stored in the special figure related determination information buffer provided in the gaming RAM 104 (S211).

Next, a second prefetch determination process is performed (S212). In the second look-ahead determination process, the second start winning command is specified by comparing the current gaming state with the special figure 2 related determination information acquired in step S211 in the second look-ahead determination table shown in FIG. A second starting winning command is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 stores the special figure 2 related determination information acquired in step S211 in the special figure 2 reservation storage section 105b (S213).

Subsequently, in step S214, it is determined whether a game ball has entered the first starting port 11, that is, whether a game ball has been detected by the first starting port sensor 11a. If the game ball has not entered the first starting port 11 (NO in S214), the process proceeds to step S221, and if the game ball has entered the first starting port 11 (YES in S214), the game ball has been placed in the predetermined position. First starting hole prize ball processing is performed to pay out the number of prize balls (S215). In the first starting hole prize ball process, the number of prize balls ("4" in the basic embodiment) corresponding to the winning into the first starting hole 11 is added to the prize ball counter for the first starting hole 11.

Next, the number of special figure 1 reservations (specifically, the value of the counter (special figure 1 reservation number counter) provided in the gaming RAM 104 that counts the number of special figure 1 reservations) is "4" (upper limit memory number) or more. It is determined whether or not (S216). If the number of reserved special drawings 1 is "4" or more (YES in S216), the process proceeds to step S221, but if the number of reserved special drawings 1 is not greater than (less than) "4" (NO in S216), the process proceeds to step S221. ), the special figure 1 reservation number addition process is performed (S217). In the special figure 1 reservation number addition process, the special figure 1 reservation number counter is incremented by 1, and the special figure 1 reservation number indicated by the special figure 1 reservation display 83a is increased by 1.

Next, special symbol random number counter (label-TRND-T), jackpot symbol type random number counter (label-TRND-OS), reach random number counter (label-TRND-RC), and special symbol variation pattern random number counter (label-TRND- The special figure 1 related determination information consisting of HP) is acquired and stored in the special figure related determination information buffer provided in the gaming RAM 104 (S218).

Next, a first look-ahead determination process is performed (S219). In the first lookahead determination process, the first start winning command is identified by comparing the current gaming state and the special figure 1 related determination information acquired in step S218 in the first lookahead determination table shown in FIG. A first start winning command is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 stores the special figure 1 related determination information acquired in step S218 in a storage area corresponding to the current number of special figure 1 reserves in the special figure 1 reserve storage section 105a (S220).

In step S221, it is determined whether a game ball has won in the big winning hole 14, that is, whether a game ball has been detected by the big winning hole sensor 14a. If a game ball has not entered the grand prize opening 14 (NO in S221), the sensor detection process is terminated, and if a gaming ball has entered the grand prize opening 14 (YES in S221), the memory is stored in the gaming RAM 104. It is determined whether the counter value of the provided big winning opening prize counter is "11" or more (S222). The big winning hole prize counter is a counter for counting the number of prizes won in the big winning hole 14 in one round game of the big winning game. It should be noted that the big winning opening winning counter is cleared every time each round game ends. In the basic embodiment, the prescribed number of prizes to win is set to "10". Therefore, the process of step S222 is performed.

If the counter value of the big winning opening prize counter is "11" or more (YES in S222), the sensor detection process is ended, and the counter value of the big winning opening prize counter is not more than "11", that is, less than "11". If so (NO in S222), the counter value of the big winning hole prize counter is incremented by 1 (S223), and the big winning hole prize ball processing is performed to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls to the player (S224). ), the sensor detection process ends. In addition, in the grand winning hole prize ball process, the number of prize balls ("14" in the basic embodiment) corresponding to the winning to the grand winning hole 14 is added to the prize ball counter for the grand winning hole 14.

Note that sensors other than sensors 10a to 14a are provided as sensors capable of detecting game balls, and processes other than those shown in FIGS. 35 to 36 are performed based on the sensor detecting a game ball. Also good.

[Normal operation processing]
Next, normal operation processing regarding control of the normal figure display 82 and the electric chew 12D will be explained. As shown in FIG. 37, the processing regarding the general figure display 82 and electric chew 12D is divided into four statuses (stages). Then, "normal operation status=1, 2, 3, 4" is assigned to each of these statuses. In the normal operation process (S105), the game control microcomputer 101 first checks the "normal operation status" (S1101). When the "normal operation status" is "1", a normal symbol standby process (S1102) is performed, and when the "normal operation status" is "2", a normal symbol variation process (S1103) is performed, When the "normal operation status" is "3", a normal symbol confirmation process (S1104) is performed, and when the "normal operation status" is "4", an auxiliary game control process (S1105) is performed. Note that the "normal operation status" is initially set to "1".

The normal symbol standby process (S1102) is a process that is performed during standby when the variable display of the normal symbol and the auxiliary game are not performed. In the normal symbol standby process (S1102), a hit determination is performed based on the normal symbol random number stored in the regular symbol reservation storage section 86. Furthermore, the normal pattern fluctuation pattern is determined based on the current game state, and the normal pattern fluctuation pattern is displayed on the normal pattern display 82 for the normal pattern fluctuation time according to the determined general pattern fluctuation pattern. , and change the normal operation status to "2". In addition, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a normal pattern fluctuation start command in accordance with the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination result in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 at the start of the normal pattern fluctuation display.

The normal symbol variation process (S1103) is a process that is performed when the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In the normal symbol variation process (S1103), it is determined whether or not the common symbol variation time has elapsed since the fluctuating display of the common symbol that is being executed has started (whether or not to end the fluctuating display of the common symbol), and If it is determined that the figure variation time has elapsed, the normal figure is stopped and displayed based on the hit determination result, and the normal operation status is changed to "3". Furthermore, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a normal pattern fluctuation stop command to the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 at the start of the normal pattern fluctuation display.

The ordinary symbol confirmation process (S1104) is a process that is performed when the ordinary symbol is stopped and displayed. In the normal symbol confirmation process (S1104), it is determined whether a predetermined stop time (for example, 0.8 seconds) has elapsed since the stop display of the common symbol that is being executed has started (whether to end the stop display of the common symbol). If it is determined that a predetermined stop time has elapsed, it is determined whether or not the common symbol that is being stopped and displayed is a winning symbol. If it is not a winning symbol (if the stopped and displayed regular symbol is a losing symbol), the normal operation status is changed to "1". On the other hand, if the winning symbols are stopped and displayed, the normal operation status is changed to "4" and the auxiliary game is started based on the current game state and the auxiliary game control table. Furthermore, the game control microcomputer 101 sets an auxiliary game start command to the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 at the time of starting the auxiliary game.

The auxiliary game control process (S1105) is a process that is performed when the auxiliary game is being played. In the auxiliary game control process (S1105), the auxiliary game is controlled based on the current gaming state and the auxiliary game control table. Then, when the auxiliary game ends, the normal operation status is changed to "1".

[Special operation processing]
Next, special operation processing regarding the control of the special figure display 81, the special figure pending display 83, and the big prize winning device 14D will be explained. As shown in FIG. 38, the processing regarding the special figure display 81, special figure reservation display 83, and big winning device 14D is divided into five statuses (stages). Then, "special operation status=1, 2, 3, 4, 5" is assigned to each of these statuses. The game control microcomputer 101 first checks the "special operation status" (S1501).

The game control microcomputer 101 performs special symbol standby processing (S1502) when the "special operation status" is "1", and when the "special operation status" is "2", the special symbol fluctuation Perform the process (S1503), and if the "special action status" is "3", perform the special symbol confirmation process (S1504), and if the "special action status" is "4", jackpot game control Processing (S1505) is performed, and if the "special operation status" is "5", gaming state setting processing (S1506) is performed. Note that the "special operation status" is initially set to "1".

The special symbol standby process (S1502) is a process that is performed during standby when variable display of special symbols and jackpot games are not being performed. The special symbol standby process will be detailed later.

The special symbol variation process (S1503) is a process performed when the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. The special symbol variation process will be detailed later.

The special symbol confirmation process (S1504) is a process performed when the special symbol is stopped and displayed. The special symbol confirmation process will be detailed later.

The jackpot game control process (S1505) is a process performed in the jackpot game. The game control microcomputer 101 performs a jackpot game according to the jackpot game control table by performing jackpot game control processing. When the jackpot game ends, the special operation status is changed to "5". Note that when each round game is started, a round number designation command indicating the number of rounds is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104. Further, when all the round games are finished and the ending is started, an ending command indicating the ending corresponding to the jackpot symbol related to the jackpot game is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104. In addition, the game control microcomputer 101 sets the special operation status "4" and the state where the jackpot game is controlled is the "jackpot game state", and the setting of the special operation status "4" is called "jackpot". It is called "gaming state".

The game state setting process (S1506) is a process for setting the game state to be controlled after the jackpot game when the jackpot game ends. For example, when controlling in a high probability state after a jackpot game, the high probability flag is turned on in the high probability flag area of the gaming RAM 104 to set the high probability state. Furthermore, at this time, if the duration of the high probability state is to be limited, the duration is also set. For example, if the termination condition for the high probability state is the number of times the special figure variable display is executed, that number (hereinafter referred to as "high probability specified number of times") is set in the high probability remaining number of times counter provided in the gaming RAM 104. . In addition, when controlling in a time saving state after a jackpot game, the time saving flag is turned ON in the time saving flag area of the gaming RAM 104 to set the time saving state. Furthermore, at this time, if the duration of the time saving state is to be limited, the duration is also set. For example, when the end condition of the time saving state is the number of executions of the special figure variable display, the number of times (hereinafter referred to as "time saving specified number of times") is set in the remaining time saving number counter provided in the gaming RAM 104.

In addition, the gaming control microcomputer 101 sets a gaming status command indicating the gaming status after the jackpot game in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 in the gaming status setting process.

[Special symbol standby processing]
Next, the special symbol standby process will be explained using FIG. 39. In the special symbol standby process (S1502), first, it is determined whether the special symbol 2 pending number is "0" (S1601). If the special figure 2 reservation number is "0" (YES in S1601), that is, if there is no memory of the special figure 2 related judgment information acquired due to winning in the second starting opening 12, It is determined whether the number of 1 reservations is "0" (S1608). Then, if the number of reserved special drawings 1 is also "0" (YES in S1608), that is, if there is no memory of the special drawing 1 related judgment information acquired due to winning in the first starting opening 11, It is determined whether the customer waiting flag is ON (S1618). Here, if the customer waiting flag is ON (YES in S1618), the special symbol waiting process is finished, and if the customer waiting flag is not ON (NO in S1618), the customer waiting command is set in the output buffer (S1619). , turns on the customer waiting flag (S1620), and ends the special symbol waiting process. In addition, when the customer waiting flag is turned on, it means that neither the special figure variable display nor the jackpot game is being played. ``state''.

In addition, if the number of special drawings 2 reserved is "0" but the number of special drawings 1 holding is not "0" (YES in S1601 and NO in S1608), that is, there is no special drawing 2 related determination information, but the first start If there is one or more stored pieces of special figure 1 related determination information acquired due to winning in the mouth 11, special figure 1 determination processing (S1609) and special figure 1 variation pattern determination processing (S1610) are performed.

In the special symbol 1 determination process (S1609), the first stored special symbol random number among the special symbol random numbers stored in the special symbol 1 pending storage unit 105a is read out, and the special symbol random number is read out based on the jackpot determination table associated with the gaming state. Then, a judgment is made as to whether it is a jackpot or a loss (jackpot judgment).

Here, if the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the jackpot symbol type random number is read out and the jackpot symbol type is determined based on the first jackpot symbol type determination table (jackpot symbol type determination). Then, jackpot symbol data representing the jackpot symbol type is set in a special symbol buffer provided in the gaming RAM 104, and a symbol designation command representing the jackpot symbol type is set in the output buffer provided in the gaming RAM 104.

Furthermore, if the result of the jackpot determination is a "loss", loss symbol data representing a loss is set in the special pattern buffer, and a symbol designation command representing a loss is set in the output buffer.

Next, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process (S1610) will be explained using FIG. 40. In the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process, first, it is determined whether or not it is currently in a non-time saving state (S1651). If it is a non-time-saving state (YES in S1651), select the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for the non-time-saving state (S1652) and proceed to step S1654; if it is not in a non-time-saving state (NO in S1651), the time-saving After selecting the state special figure 1 variation pattern determination table (S1653), the process advances to step S1654.

In step S1654, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether the jackpot determination result is a "jackpot". If it is not a jackpot (NO in S1654), the process advances to step S1655, and if it is a jackpot (YES in S1654), a jackpot symbol is selected from the special symbol 1 variation pattern determination table selected in either step S1652 or step S1653. After selecting the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table (S1659), the process advances to step S1660.

In step S1655, the game control microcomputer 101 performs reach determination. In the reach determination, a reach random number is read out, and the reach random number is compared with a reach determination table according to the current gaming state (non-time saving state/time saving state) to determine whether there is a reach or no reach.

The game control microcomputer 101 next determines whether or not the result of the reach determination in step S1655 is "with reach" (S1656). If there is a reach (YES in S1656), select a special figure 1 variation pattern judgment table for loss with reach from the special figure 1 variation pattern judgment table selected in either step S1652 or step S1653 (S1658). After that, the process advances to step S1660, and if there is no reach (NO in S1656), the current number of reserved special symbols 1 is checked, and the result is selected in the special symbol 1 variation pattern determination table selected in either step S1652 or step S1653. After selecting the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for no-reach loss according to the number of reserved special figures 1 (S1657), the process proceeds to step S1660.

In step S1660, the game control microcomputer 101 reads out the special pattern variation pattern random number, and compares the special pattern variation pattern random number with the special pattern 1 variation pattern determination table selected in any of steps S1657 to S1659. Determine the special figure 1 variation pattern The special figure 1 variation pattern is determined. Next, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a special figure 1 variation start command indicating the determined special figure 1 variation pattern in the output buffer (S1661), and starts the special figure 1 variation according to the determined special figure 1 variation pattern. The time is set in the special operation timer (S1662), the special symbol 1 variation pattern determination process is ended, and the process returns to the special symbol standby process.

Note that the special operation timer is updated by 4ms in other processing in the game control side timer interrupt processing. In addition, the set special figure 1 variation start command includes information regarding the type of special symbol (that it is special figure 1) and information about the special figure variation pattern judgment performed in the special figure 1 variation pattern judgment process (S1610). Contains information about the results (information on special pattern fluctuation patterns, including information on whether there is a reach or not and special symbol fluctuation time).

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 causes the special pattern 1 display 81a to start displaying the special pattern 1 in a variable manner based on the special pattern variation time corresponding to the special pattern 1 variation pattern determined in step S1610 (S1611). .

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 shifts the storage location (storage area) of various counter values in the special figure 1 reservation storage section 105a from the current position to the side where it is read out, and also shifts the storage location (storage area) of the various counter values in the special figure 1 reservation storage section 105a Special figure 1 reservation storage section shift processing is performed to clear the storage area corresponding to the first reservation (the storage area farthest from the read side) (S1612). In this way, the special drawing 1 reservations are consumed in the order in which they were reserved.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 subtracts "1" from the special figure 1 reservation number counter (S1613), and changes the special figure 1 reservation number indicated by the special figure 1 reservation display 83a by decreasing it by "1" ( S1614), and changes the special operation status to "2" (S1615).

The game control microcomputer 101 then determines whether or not the customer waiting flag is ON (S1616), and if it is ON (YES in S1616), turns the customer waiting flag OFF (S1617), and performs special symbol waiting processing. If it is not ON (NO in S1616), the special symbol standby process ends without executing step S1617.

In addition, if the number of special drawings 2 reserved is not "0" in step S1601 (NO in S1601), that is, one or more pieces of special drawings 2 related judgment information acquired due to winning in the second starting port 12 are stored. If there is, special figure 2 determination processing (S1602) and special figure 2 variation pattern determination processing (S1603) are performed. The special figure 2 judgment process (S1602) and the special figure 2 variation pattern judgment process (S1603) are basically the same processing contents as the special figure 1 judgment process (S1609) and the special figure 1 variation pattern judgment process (S1610). .

The special figure 2 determination process (S1602) is basically the same except that the table used for jackpot determination is the second jackpot determination table, and the table used for jackpot symbol type determination is the second jackpot symbol type determination table. Since this is the same process as the special figure 1 determination process (S1609), the explanation will be omitted. Also, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination process (S1603) is basically the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process (S1603), except that the table used in the special figure 2 variation pattern determination is the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table. Since this process is similar to S1610), the explanation will be omitted.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 causes the special figure 2 display 81b to start variable display of the special figure 2 based on the special figure variation time according to the special figure variation pattern determined in step S1603 (S1604).

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 shifts the storage location (storage area) of various counter values in the special figure 2 reservation storage section 105b from the current position to the side where it is read out, and also shifts the storage location (storage area) of the various counter values in the special figure 2 reservation storage section 105b to Special figure 2 pending storage section shift processing is performed to clear the storage area corresponding to the fourth pending item (the storage area farthest from the read side) (S1605). In this way, the special drawing 2 reservations are consumed in the order in which they were reserved.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 subtracts "1" from the special map 2 reservation number counter (S1606), and changes the special map 2 reservation number indicated by the special map 2 reservation display 83b by decreasing it by "1" (S1607). ), the special operation status is changed to "2" (S1615), and the process advances to step S1616.

In the basic embodiment as described above, the variable display of the special symbol based on the special symbol 1 reservation is performed only when the special symbol 2 reservation is "0" (YES in S1601). That is, the extinguishment of the special figure 2 reservation is executed in priority to the extinguishment of the special figure 1 reservation. In the basic embodiment, it is easier for the player to win a jackpot symbol with a large profit in the lottery based on the special symbol 2 reservation than in the lottery based on the special symbol 1 reservation. In addition, the extinguishment of the special figure 1 reservation may be executed in priority to the extinguishment of the special figure 2 reservation. Moreover, the extinguishment of the special figure 1 hold and the extinguishment of the special figure 2 hold may be performed in the order in which the hold occurs, regardless of the type of special figure.

[Special symbol variation processing]
Next, the special symbol variation process will be explained using FIG. 41. In the special symbol variation process, the game control microcomputer 101 first determines whether or not to end the variation display of the special symbol, that is, when the special symbol variation time set in the special operation timer in step S1603 or step S1610 has elapsed (special It is determined whether the operation counter=0) (S1701). If you do not want to end the fluctuating display of special symbols (NO in S1701), you can end the special symbol fluctuating process, and if you want to end the fluctuating display of special symbols (YES in S1701), you can display the fluctuating special symbols on the special symbol display 81. At the same time, special symbols are stopped and displayed according to the symbol data (jackpot symbol data or loss special symbol data) set in the special symbol buffer in step S1602 or step S1609 (S1702).

Next, a preset special symbol confirmation time (for example, 0.8 seconds) is set in the special operation timer (S1703), and a special symbol variation stop command indicating the end of the variation display of the special symbol is output to the buffer. (S1704), changes the special operation status to "3" (S1705), and ends the special symbol variation process.

[Special design confirmation process]
Next, the special symbol determination process will be explained using FIG. 42. In the special symbol confirmation process (S1504), the game control microcomputer 101 first determines whether or not to end the stop display of the special symbol, that is, when the special symbol confirmation time set in the special operation timer in step S1703 has elapsed (special It is determined whether the operation counter=0) (S1751). If you do not want to end the special symbol stop display (NO in S1751), if you end the special symbol confirmation process and end the special symbol stop display (YES in S1751), you are currently in a normal probability state (high probability flag is OFF). It is determined whether or not (S1752). Note that the elapse of the special symbol confirmation time after the stop display of the special symbol starts is sometimes referred to as "the special symbol is confirmed."

If the game control microcomputer 101 is not currently in the normal probability state (NO in S1752), the process proceeds to step S1757, and if it is currently in the normal probability state (YES in S1752), it is in the time saving state (time saving flag is ON). It is determined whether or not (S1753). If the game control microcomputer 101 is not in the time-saving state (NO in S1753), the process advances to step S1757, and if it is currently in the time-saving state (YES in S1753), it displays the remaining variable displays of special symbols that can be executed in the time-saving state. The value of the remaining time saving number counter that measures the number of times (remaining number of time saving) is subtracted by "1" (S1754), and it is determined whether the value of the remaining time saving number counter is "0" (S1755). If the value of the remaining time saving counter (remaining number of time saving) is not "0" (NO in S1755), the process advances to step S1757, and if the value of the remaining time saving number counter (remaining number of time saving) is "0" (in S1755) YES), the time-saving state is shifted to a non-time-saving state (the time-saving flag is turned OFF) (S1756), and the process proceeds to step S1757.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 checks the current game state, sets a game state command indicating the game state in the output buffer (S1757), and determines whether the special symbol currently being stopped and displayed is a jackpot symbol. (S1758). If it is not a jackpot symbol (NO in S1758), change the special operation status to "1" (S1762), finish the special symbol confirmation process, and if it is a jackpot symbol (YES in S1758), reset the gaming state ( The normal gaming state is set. Specifically, the high probability flag and time saving flag are turned OFF, and the values of the high probability remaining number of times counter and time saving remaining number of times counter are set to "0") (S1759).

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 performs a jackpot game preparation process (S1760), changes the special operation status to "4" (S1761), and ends the special symbol confirmation process. In the jackpot game preparation process, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a jackpot game control table corresponding to the type of jackpot symbol in a predetermined area of the gaming RAM 104. In addition, a jackpot opening flag indicating that the opening is in progress according to the jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed is turned on in a predetermined area of the gaming RAM 104, and a predetermined opening time (the jackpot game starts) is set according to the type of the jackpot symbol. Set the time from the time the game is played until the start of one round) to the special operation timer. Furthermore, in accordance with the type of jackpot symbol, an opening command (jackpot opening command) indicating the type of jackpot symbol is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104. The opening command corresponding to the type of jackpot symbol (jackpot opening command) indicates that a jackpot game (opening of the jackpot game) corresponding to the type of the stopped and displayed jackpot symbol is started.

6. Control of production by production control board 120 [Production control main processing]
Next, the control of effects by the effect control board 120 will be explained using the flowcharts shown in FIGS. 43 to 47. Note that the flowchart for controlling the effects described below is an example. As for the plurality of processes in the flowchart, the order of execution can be changed as appropriate or the processes can be executed in parallel as long as there is no inconsistency in the process contents.

In addition, counters, timers, flags, buffers, etc. that appear in the explanation of the control of effects by the effect control board 120 below are provided in the effect RAM 124. When the power of the pachinko game machine PY is turned on, the performance control microcomputer 121 provided in the performance control board 120 reads out the sub-control main processing program shown in FIG. 43 from the performance ROM 123 and executes it.

As shown in the figure, in the production control main process, first, a power-on process is performed in response to power-on (S4001). In the power-on process, for example, settings for the performance CPU 122, SIO, PIO, CTC (circuit for managing interrupt time), etc. are performed.

Next, interrupts are prohibited (S4002), and random number seed update processing is executed (S4003). In the random number seed update process (S4003), the values of various performance determination random number counters for making determinations regarding various performances are updated. Note that the random numbers for performance determination include various random numbers for determining performance content, such as a random number for determining a stop symbol pattern and a random number for determining a special symbol variation performance pattern, which will be described later.

As an example, the method of updating the random number counter for judgment regarding various performances can be the same as the random number updating process performed by the game control board 100 described above. When updating, the random numbers may be added by 2 instead of being added by 1. This also applies to the random number update process performed by the game control board 100 described above.

When the random number seed update process is completed, a command transmission process is executed (S4004). In the command transmission process, various commands stored in the output buffer in the performance RAM 124 of the performance control board 120 (for example, a special figure fluctuation performance start command, a customer waiting start command, an opening performance start command, a round performance start command, which will be described later) are sent. command, ending effect start command, etc.) to the image control board 140.

The image control board 140 that has received the command displays an image on the display section 50a (performs various effects using the image) in accordance with the received command. In addition to the various performances performed by the image control board 140, the production control board 120 also outputs audio from the speaker 52 via the audio control circuit 161 (executes various performances using audio), and controls the sub-drive board. 162 to cause the frame lamp 53 to emit light (to perform various effects by emitting light), and to operate the board movable body 55k (to perform various effects by movement). The various performances include special figure variation performances, jackpot game performances (jackpot opening performances, round performances, jackpot ending performances), customer waiting performances, operation performances, and pre-reading performances.

The performance control microcomputer 121 then permits an interrupt (S4005). Thereafter, steps S4002 to S4005 are looped. While interrupts are enabled, reception interrupt processing (S4010), 1ms timer interrupt processing (S4011), and 10ms timer interrupt processing (S4012) can be executed. The 1ms timer interrupt processing (S4011) and the 10ms timer interrupt processing (S4012) will be described later.

The reception interrupt process (S4010) is executed every time a strobe signal, that is, various commands sent from the game control board 100, is input to the external INT input section of the production control microcomputer 121. In the reception interrupt process (S4010), the production control microcomputer 121 stores various commands transmitted and received by the output process (S101) of the game control board 100 in the reception buffer of the production RAM 124. This reception interrupt processing is executed with priority over other interrupt processing (S4011, S4012).

[1ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, 1ms timer interrupt processing will be explained using FIG. 44. The 1ms timer interrupt process (S4011) is executed every time an interrupt pulse of 1ms period is input to the production control board 120. The performance control microcomputer 121 first performs input processing (S4101) in the 1ms timer interrupt processing (S4011). In the input process, the production control microcomputer 121 creates first production button switch data based on the detection signal from the first production button sensor 40a. The performance control microcomputer 121 creates second performance button switch data based on the detection signal from the second performance button sensor 41a.

Subsequently, the performance control microcomputer 121 performs light emission data output processing (S4102). In the light emission data output process, the effect control microcomputer 121 uses the light emission data created in the light emission data creation process (S4203) in the 10ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in order to cause the frame lamp 53 to emit light at a timing that matches the image effect, etc. is output to the sub-drive board 162. That is, the performance control microcomputer 121 causes the frame lamp 53 to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode according to the light emission data.

Next, the performance control microcomputer 121 performs a movable device control process (S4103). In the movable device control process, the performance control microcomputer 121 creates or outputs drive data (data for driving the movable board 55k) in order to drive the movable board 55k at a predetermined timing. That is, the performance control microcomputer 121 drives the board movable body 55k in a predetermined operation mode according to the drive data.

Next, the production control microcomputer 121 performs a timer update process (S4104). In the timer update process, various timers provided in the performance RAM 124, which will be described later, are updated in order to manage and control time related to various predetermined performances. In this process, the timer provided in the effect RAM 124 is updated by 1 msec.

Then, the production control microcomputer 121 performs watchdog timer processing to reset the watchdog timer (S4105), and ends the 1ms timer interrupt processing.

[10ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, 10ms timer interrupt processing will be explained using FIG. 45. The 10ms timer interrupt process (S4012) is executed every time an interrupt pulse with a period of 10msec is input to the production control board 120. In the 10ms timer interrupt process, the production control microcomputer 121 first performs a received command analysis process to analyze the command stored in the receive buffer in step S4010 (S4201). The received command analysis process will be explained in detail in the basic embodiment described below.

Next, the performance control microcomputer 121 performs audio control processing (S4202). In the audio control process, audio data (data that controls the output of audio from the speaker 52) is created and sent to the audio control circuit 161 based on the performance content indicated by the special figure variation performance data set in the performance RAM 124. is output.

Next, the performance control microcomputer 121 performs a light emission data creation process (S4203). In the light emission data creation process, light emission data is created based on the performance contents indicated by the special symbol variation performance data set in the performance RAM 124, and the like.

[Received command analysis processing]
Next, the received command analysis process will be explained using FIGS. 46 and 47. In the received command analysis process, the performance control microcomputer 121 first determines whether or not it has received a start winning command (first start winning command or second start winning command) from the gaming control board 100, in other words, it has received a start winning command. It is determined whether the data has been stored in the buffer (S4301). If the performance control microcomputer 121 has received the start winning command (YES in S4301), it proceeds to step S4302, whereas if it has not received the start winning command (NO in S4301), it proceeds to step S4303.

In step S4302, the performance control microcomputer 121 performs a starting winning process in response to the game ball winning in the first starting opening 11 or the second starting opening 12. In the starting winning process, the received starting winning command is stored in the starting winning command pending storage section 125 in the performance RAM 124. Next, the performance control microcomputer 121 analyzes the stored starting winning command and determines whether or not to execute a pre-read performance that indicates the expected level of jackpot. In addition to a pending notice in which a pending icon is displayed in a special manner, the pre-reading effect includes a continuous notice effect that is performed over a plurality of consecutive variable displays of special symbols. When it is decided to execute these pre-read effects, a pre-read effect start command for executing the decided effects is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124.

When the prefetch effect start command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is sent to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 starts the predetermined effect from the image ROM 142. The image is read out and a pre-read effect using the image is performed on the display section 50a of the image display device 50. In addition, while the image control board 140 is performing the prefetch effect using images, the effect control microcomputer 121 controls audio according to the prefetch effect content indicated by the prefetch effect start command sent to the image control board 140. The sound is output from the speaker 52 via the circuit 161 (executing a pre-reading performance using audio), and the frame lamp 53 is made to emit light via the sub-drive board 162 (executing a pre-reading performance using light emission), and the board movable body It is possible to operate 55k (execute a pre-read effect by operation).

In step S4303, the performance control microcomputer 121 determines whether the symbol designation command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether the symbol designation command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the production control microcomputer 121 has not received the symbol designation command (NO in S4303), the process proceeds to step S4305, while if it has received the symbol designation command (YES in S4303), the production control microcomputer 121 transfers the symbol designation command to the production RAM 124. The symbol designation command is stored in the symbol designation command storage section 126 (S4304).

In step S4305, the performance control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the special figure fluctuation start command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether the special figure fluctuation start command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the special figure variation start command has not been received (NO in S4305), the process advances to step S4307, while if the special figure variation start command has been received (YES in S4305), the production contents of the special figure variation production are determined. , performs a special figure variation effect start process (S4306) for starting the special figure variation effect.

In the special figure variation production start process, the production control microcomputer 121 first stores a special figure variation start command in the special figure variation start command storage section 127 in the production RAM 124. Next, based on the contents of the stop special symbol (type of jackpot symbol, losing special symbol) indicated by the symbol designation command already stored in step S4304 and the special symbol variation pattern indicated by the special symbol variation start command, the production symbol EZ1 is stopped and displayed. -EZ3, and a stop symbol pattern determination table for performing a stop symbol determination for determining small symbols KZ1 to KZ3. A plurality of stop symbol pattern determination tables are provided in association with special symbols and special symbol variation patterns. Therefore, the performance control microcomputer 121 selects one stop symbol pattern determination table associated with the stop special symbol and the special symbol fluctuation pattern. In each stop symbol pattern determination table, the values of random numbers for stop symbol pattern determination (stop symbol pattern determination value) are distributed. Next, the performance control microcomputer 121 acquires the value indicated by the stop symbol pattern determination random number counter as a stop symbol pattern determination random number, and performs a stop symbol pattern determination based on the acquired stop symbol pattern determination random number.

In the stop symbol pattern determination, the performance control microcomputer 121 collates the acquired random number for stop symbol pattern determination with the selected stop symbol pattern table and determines the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 to be stopped and displayed. Then, data representing the determined performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are set in a predetermined area of the performance RAM 124. For example, if the special symbol variation pattern is a no-reach variation, a combination of production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is selected so as to result in a so-called "missing pattern". In addition, if the special pattern fluctuation pattern is a reach/loss fluctuation, the left performance pattern EZ1 and the right performance pattern EZ3 are the same, and the medium performance pattern EZ2 is different from them. The KZ3 combination is selected. Furthermore, if the special symbol variation pattern is a jackpot variation, a combination of production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is selected to form a so-called "Zero" according to the production mode and the type of jackpot symbol. .

Next, the performance control microcomputer 121 generates a special figure fluctuation performance pattern in which the performance contents of the special figure fluctuation performance are associated, based on the performance mode in which it is staying and the special figure fluctuation pattern indicated by the special figure fluctuation start command. Select a special figure variation performance pattern determination table for determining the special figure variation performance pattern to be determined. A plurality of special figure variation performance pattern determination tables are provided in association with production modes and special figure variation patterns. Therefore, the production control microcomputer 121 selects one special symbol variation production pattern determination table that is associated with the special symbol variation pattern. In each special figure fluctuation performance pattern judgment table, the value of the random number for special figure fluctuation performance pattern judgment (special figure fluctuation performance pattern Judgment values) are distributed. Next, the performance control microcomputer 121 acquires the value indicated by the random number counter for special figure fluctuation performance pattern determination as a random number for special figure fluctuation performance pattern determination, and selects a special figure based on the acquired random number for special figure fluctuation performance pattern determination. Performs fluctuation performance pattern judgment.

The performance control microcomputer 121 collates the acquired random number for determining the special pattern variation performance pattern with the selected special pattern variation performance pattern table in the special pattern variation performance pattern determination, determines the special pattern variation performance pattern, and determines the special pattern variation performance pattern. The data representing the special figure variation performance pattern (special figure variation performance pattern data) is set in a predetermined area of the performance RAM 124, and a special figure variation performance start command indicating the special figure fluctuation performance pattern is set in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124. set.

When the special figure variation effect start command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 executes a predetermined command from the image ROM 142. The special figure variation effect is performed using the image on the display section 50a of the image display device 50.

Further, the special figure variation performance start command includes information regarding the production flow associated with the special figure variation pattern indicated by the special figure variation start command. In addition, the special figure variation effect start command includes, in addition to the special figure variation effect using the images performed on the image display device 50, the special figure variation effect using the sound output from the speaker 52, and the special figure variation effect using the light emitted from the frame lamp 53. It includes the performance content of the figure fluctuation performance and the performance content of the special figure fluctuation performance based on the operation performed by the board movable body 55k.

In addition, the production control microcomputer 121 controls the special symbol variation production content indicated by the special symbol variation production start command sent to the image control board 140 while the special symbol variation production using images is being performed by the image control board 140. In response to this, the speaker 52 outputs audio via the audio control circuit 161 (executes a special figure variation effect using audio), and causes the frame lamp 53 to emit light via the sub-drive board 162 (executes a special figure variation effect by emitting light). (performs a variable effect), and operates the board movable body 55k (executes a special figure variable effect by operation).

In step S4307, the performance control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the special symbol fluctuation stop command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether the special symbol fluctuation stop command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the production control microcomputer 121 has not received the special symbol fluctuation stop command (NO in S4307), the process proceeds to step S4309, while if it has received the special symbol fluctuation stop command (YES in S4307), the special symbol fluctuation stops. A special symbol variation performance end process (S4308) is performed to end the performance (stop the variable display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 and perform a stop display).

In the special pattern fluctuation performance end process, the performance control microcomputer 121 analyzes the special pattern fluctuation stop command, and ends the special pattern fluctuation performance appropriately based on the analysis result (performance patterns EZ1 to EZ3, and small pattern KZ1). A special figure fluctuation performance end command for stopping the fluctuation display of KZ3 is set in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124. When the image control board 140 receives the special symbol variation production end command, it ends the special symbol variation production that is being executed (stops the variation production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and small symbols KZ1 to KZ3).

In step S4309, the performance control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the game state command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the game state command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the production control microcomputer 121 has not received the gaming state command (NO in S4309), it proceeds to step S4311, whereas if it has received the gaming state command (YES in S4309), it analyzes the gaming state command. , identifies the gaming state represented by the gaming state command, and performs a gaming state setting process for setting the gaming state (S4310).

The production control microcomputer 121 sets a gaming state flag corresponding to the gaming state indicated by the gaming state command in the gaming state flag area of the production RAM 124 in the gaming state setting process. For example, the production control microcomputer 121 sets the gaming state flag "00H" in the gaming state flag area of the production RAM 124 if the gaming state indicated by the gaming state command is the normal gaming state. Further, the production control microcomputer 121 sets the gaming state flag "01H" in the gaming state flag area of the production RAM 124 if the gaming state indicated by the gaming state command is a high probability high base gaming state. Further, the performance control microcomputer 121 sets a gaming state flag "02H" in the gaming state flag area of the performance RAM 124 if the gaming state indicated by the gaming state command is a low probability high base gaming state.

In step S4311, the performance control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not a customer waiting command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the customer waiting command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the performance control microcomputer 121 has not received the customer waiting command (NO in S4311), the process proceeds to step S4313, whereas if it has received the customer waiting command (YES in S4311), it performs a customer waiting performance standby process. (S4312), the received command analysis process ends.

In the customer waiting performance standby process, the performance control microcomputer 121 controls the waiting time (customer waiting performance waiting time: for example, 20 seconds) from the stop display of the performance pattern to the start of the customer waiting performance. Set it on a timer. The performance control microcomputer 121 can determine whether or not this waiting time has elapsed, and if it determines that the waiting time has elapsed, it sends a customer waiting performance start command to the performance RAM 124 to start the customer waiting performance. set in the output buffer of

In step S4313, the performance control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the jackpot opening command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the jackpot opening command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the performance control microcomputer 121 has not received the jackpot opening command (NO in S4313), the process proceeds to step S4315, while if it has received the jackpot opening command (YES in S4313), it starts the opening of the jackpot game. An accompanying jackpot opening performance start process is performed (S4314).

In the jackpot opening production start process, the performance control microcomputer 121 analyzes the jackpot opening command and, based on the analysis result, determines whether to execute the jackpot opening performance corresponding to the opening of the jackpot game to be executed from now on. If it is determined and executed, select the performance content of the jackpot opening performance (jackpot opening performance pattern), and write a jackpot opening performance start command in the performance RAM 124 to start the jackpot opening performance with the selected jackpot opening performance pattern. Set to output buffer.

In step S4315, the performance control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the round number designation command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether the round number designation command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the number of rounds designation command has not been received (NO in S4315), the process proceeds to step S4317, while if the number of rounds designation command has been received (YES in S4315), round production start processing is performed in conjunction with the start of the round game. (S4316).

In the round performance start process, the production control microcomputer 121 analyzes the number of rounds designation command, determines whether or not to execute a round production according to the round game to be started from now on, and if it is to be executed, executes the round production. The performance content (round performance pattern) is selected, and a round performance start command corresponding to the selected round performance pattern is set in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124.

In step S4317, the performance control microcomputer 121 determines whether the ending command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether the ending command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the ending command has not been received (NO in S4317), the received command analysis process is finished, while if the ending command has been received (YES in S4317), the jackpot ending performance start process ( After performing S4318) and production mode setting processing (S4319), the received command analysis processing ends.

In the jackpot ending production start process, the production control microcomputer 121 analyzes the ending command and determines whether or not to execute the jackpot ending production according to the ending of the jackpot game that will be executed from now on. The performance content (jackpot ending performance pattern) of the jackpot ending performance is selected, and a jackpot ending performance start command corresponding to the selected jackpot ending performance pattern is set in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124.

In addition, the performance control microcomputer 121 performs a process of setting the performance mode after the jackpot game (setting the performance mode) based on the analysis result of the ending command, specifically, the jackpot symbol indicated by the ending command, in the performance mode setting process. control processing).

For example, when the jackpot symbol indicated by the jackpot ending command is the jackpot symbol A or the jackpot symbol D, the production control microcomputer 121 sets it to a probability variable production mode that suggests a high probability high base gaming state. Then, a performance mode flag indicating the variable probability performance mode is turned on in a predetermined area of the performance RAM 124, and a variable probability performance mode start command indicating setting of the variable probability performance mode is set in the output buffer of the RAM 124 for performance. When the variable performance mode start command set in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 executes the command at the timing when the ending ends. , displays the background image G120 for probability variation as a background image, and outputs the BGM for probability variation as BGM.

In addition, when the jackpot symbol indicated by the jackpot ending command is jackpot symbol B, jackpot symbol C, or jackpot symbol E, the performance control microcomputer 121 selects either a high probability high base gaming state or a low probability high base gaming state. Set a time-saving mode in which it is difficult or impossible to determine whether the Then, the performance control microcomputer 121 turns on the performance mode flag indicating the time-saving performance mode in a predetermined area of the performance RAM 124, and sends a time-saving performance mode start command indicating that the time-saving performance mode is set to the output buffer of the performance RAM 124. Set to . When the time-saving production mode start command set in the output buffer of the production RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 executes the command at the timing when the ending ends. , the time-saving background image G130 is displayed as the background image, and the time-saving BGM is output as the BGM.

<First embodiment>
Next, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described based on the basic embodiment of the present invention described above. In the following, differences from the basic embodiment will be mainly described as the first embodiment. Furthermore, the same reference numerals and terms are used for the same configurations as those in the basic embodiment or similarly corresponding configurations.

The pachinko game machine PY1 according to the first embodiment is composed of a so-called "one-type, two-type mixed machine." In one pachinko game machine PY1, when a special drawing 1 lottery is held and a jackpot is won when a game ball enters the first starting slot 11, a jackpot game in which the first jackpot 14 (described later) is opened is played. When a special drawing 2 lottery is held based on the specification called "Type 1 (so-called "DigiPachi type")" and the winning of the game ball into the second starting hole 12, and you win a small prize, A small winning game in which a second big prize opening 15 (described later) is opened is executed, and a game ball that enters the second big prize opening 15 opened in the small winning game is placed in a specific area 16 (so-called "V zone"), which will be described later. There is also a specification called "second type (so-called "feather monotype")" in which a jackpot game is executed when the player passes (so-called "V winning").

Here, FIG. 48 shows a front view of the game board unit YU of the pachinko game machine PY1. As shown in FIG. 48, the gaming area 6 includes a first grand prize device 14D and a second grand prize device 15D that can be reversibly changed between a state in which game balls cannot win and a state in which they can win. is provided. The first big winning device 14D corresponds to the big winning device 14D of the basic embodiment. Therefore, the first grand prize winning device 14D is formed with a first grand prize opening 14 that can change between a closed mode in which a game ball cannot enter and an open mode in which a game ball can enter. 14 takes a closed mode and an open mode by a first AT opening/closing member 14k provided in the first big prize winning device 14D. Further, the first big winning device 14D is provided with a first big winning hole sensor 14a that detects that the game ball has entered the first big winning hole 14 (winning).

The second grand prize device 15D is provided directly under the downstream side of the first grand prize device 14D, and is partially configured in the same manner as the first grand prize device 14D. The second grand prize winning device 15D is formed with a second grand prize opening 15 that can change between a closed mode in which a game ball cannot enter and an open mode in which a game ball can enter. , it takes a closed mode and an open mode by the second AT opening/closing member 15k provided in the second big winning device 15D. Further, the second big winning device 15D is provided with a second big winning hole sensor 15a that detects that the game ball has entered the second big winning hole 15 (winning).

In addition, in the first embodiment, 15 prize balls are paid out as the balls enter the first big winning hole 14. In addition, 15 prize balls are paid out as the balls enter the second grand prize opening 15.

Next, the structure of the game board 1 after the game ball enters the second grand prize opening 15 will be explained. FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the configuration of the game board 1 after the game ball enters the second grand prize opening 15. As shown in FIG. 49, as a configuration after the game ball enters the second grand prize opening 15, a specific area 16 and a non-specific area 17 are provided through which the gaming ball that entered the second grand prize opening 15 can pass. It is being Further, a sorting member 16k is provided which can sort the game balls that have entered the second big prize opening 15 into a specific area 16 and a non-specific area 17.

The distribution member 16k is configured to be movable forward and backward by a distribution solenoid 16s (see FIG. 50). The distribution solenoid 16s is electrically connected to the game control microcomputer 101, and the game control microcomputer 101 can control the distribution solenoid 16s in a small winning game to be described later.

The game control microcomputer 101 moves the distribution member 16k forward and backward using the distribution solenoid 16s, so that the game ball that has entered the second grand prize opening 15 can pass through the specific area 16, but cannot pass through the non-specific area 17. Either a first passing state in which the ball cannot pass through, or a second passing state in which the game ball that enters the second grand prize opening 15 can pass through the non-specific area 17 but cannot pass through the specific area 16. It is possible to make the state. The sorting member 16k is normally held at the advanced position so as to enter the second passing state, and when playing a small winning game, it retreats to the retracted position for a predetermined period of time (for example, 2.8 seconds) and returns to the first passing state. Change. Details of the operation of the distribution member 16k in the small winning game will be described later.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is provided with a specific area sensor 16a (see FIG. 50) that detects game balls that have passed through the specific area 16, but does not detect game balls that have passed through the non-specific area 17. The specific area sensor 16a is electrically connected to the game control microcomputer 101, and when detecting a game ball, outputs a detection signal indicating that the game ball has passed through the specific area 16 to the game control board 100.

In addition, a transparent window (not shown) made of synthetic resin is provided in front of the specific area 16 and the non-specific area 17, so that the game ball that has entered the second grand prize opening 15 can pass through the specific area 16 and the non-specific area. The player can visually confirm which of the 17 passes the player has passed.

Next, the electrical configuration of the game control board 100 side in the pachinko game machine PY1 will be explained. FIG. 50 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the game control board 100 side in the pachinko gaming machine PY1. As shown in FIG. 50, various actuators connected to the game control board 100 include a first AT solenoid 14s, a second AT solenoid 15s, and a distribution solenoid 16s.

The game control board 100 sends signals for controlling the driving of the first AT solenoid 14s, the second AT solenoid 15s, and the distribution solenoid 16s to each of the first AT solenoid 14s, the second AT solenoid 15s, and the distribution solenoid 16s. It is possible to output The first AT solenoid 14s is connected to the first AT opening/closing member 14k, and when the first AT solenoid 14s is driven, the first AT opening/closing member 14k performs an opening/closing operation. The second AT solenoid 15s is connected to the second AT opening/closing member 15k, and when the second AT solenoid 15s is driven, the second AT opening/closing member 15k performs an opening/closing operation. The distribution solenoid 16s is connected to the distribution member 16k, and the distribution member 16k moves forward and backward with respect to the front surface of the game board 1 when the distribution solenoid 16s is driven.

In addition, as various sensors connected to the game control board 100, the first big winning hole sensor 14a, the second big winning hole sensor 15a, and the specific area sensor 16a are connected to the game control board 100 so that they can output detection signals. has been done. The first big winning hole sensor 14a is capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the first big winning hole 14, and when detecting a game ball, sends a detection signal indicating that the game ball has entered the first big winning hole 14. Output to the game control board 100. The second big winning hole sensor 15a can detect the game ball that has entered the second big winning hole 15, and when it detects the game ball, it sends a detection signal indicating that the game ball has entered the second big winning hole 15. Output to the game control board 100. The specific area sensor 16a can detect a game ball that has passed through the specific area 16, and when it detects a game ball, it sends a detection signal to the game control board 100 indicating that the game ball has passed through the specific area 16 (V winning). Output.

Next, the game states that can be controlled by the pachinko game machine PY1 will be explained. In the pachinko game machine PY1, only one type of normal probability state is set as a gaming state related to the probability of winning a jackpot in jackpot determination. On the other hand, as the gaming states related to the ease of winning in the second starting opening 12, a non-time saving state (low base state) and a time saving state (high base state) are set, as in the basic embodiment. Therefore, hereinafter, the low probability low base gaming state may be referred to as the "normal gaming state", and the low probability high base gaming state may be simply referred to as the "time saving state".

Note that the ease of winning a prize in the second starting port 12 is based on the ease of opening the second starting port 12, and in the time saving state, the opening time of the second starting port 12 per unit time is the same as that of the normal game. Since the time saving state is longer than the normal gaming state, the time saving state can also be positioned as a gaming state in which the second starting port 12 is easier to open compared to the normal gaming state. Furthermore, the fact that the game ball is likely to enter the second starting hole 12 can be interpreted as the fact that the special drawing 2 lottery based on winning the second starting hole 12, in other words, the jackpot determination is likely to occur. Therefore, the time saving state can be positioned as a gaming state in which the conditions for performing special drawing 2 lottery, jackpot determination regarding special drawing 2, and special drawing 2 variable display are more likely to be satisfied than in the normal gaming state.

Furthermore, in the normal gaming state, the pachinko game machine PY1 does not aim to win the first starting hole 11 by continuously firing the game ball with a left-handed hit so as to cause the first starting hole 11 to win. It is configured so that it is easier to continue firing the game ball with a right hit so as to cause the second starting hole 12 to win a prize. Furthermore, in the normal gaming state, it is more likely that the game ball will land in the first starting hole 11 than in the second starting hole 12 by continuing to fire the game ball with the right shot aiming to make it win in the second starting hole 12. It is configured so that it is easier to continue firing the game ball by hitting to the left while aiming at it, and to win the prize at the first starting opening 11.

Next, jackpot determination according to the first embodiment will be explained. An example of the configuration of the jackpot determination table referred to in the jackpot determination according to the first embodiment is shown in FIG. 51(A). As shown in FIG. 51(A), as a jackpot judgment table, a jackpot judgment table (first jackpot judgment table) related to special drawing 1 used in jackpot judgment (first jackpot judgment) based on winning in the first starting opening 11 is used. ), and a jackpot judgment table (second jackpot judgment table) related to the special drawing 2 used in jackpot judgment (second jackpot judgment) based on winnings in the second starting opening 12.

According to the first jackpot determination table, in the first jackpot determination, it is determined to be a jackpot or a loss. On the other hand, according to the second jackpot determination table, in the second jackpot determination, a jackpot, a small win, or a loss is determined. As will be described later, when a small hit is determined in the second jackpot determination, a stop display of the special figure 2 is executed in a manner that finally indicates a small win on the special figure 2 variable display (a predetermined result of "small win") is executed. is derived), and a small winning game is executed according to the stop display. Then, when the game ball that has entered the second big prize opening 15 in the small winning game passes through the specific area 16, the big winning game is executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 51(A), in the first jackpot determination, the probability of being determined to be a jackpot is set to 1/319. On the other hand, in the second jackpot determination, the probability of determining a jackpot is set to 1/319, and the probability of determining a small win is set to 79/319. Similar to the basic embodiment, in each jackpot judgment table, the judgment value of the special symbol random number (special symbol random number judgment value) is shown in FIG. 51(A) for the jackpot judgment result, small win, and loss. They are distributed appropriately to achieve the selectivity shown. However, the jackpot selection rate and the small win selection rate are not particularly limited and can be changed as appropriate. Further, in the first jackpot determination, a small win may be included as a jackpot determination result. Alternatively, in the second jackpot determination, the jackpot determination result may not include a jackpot.

Next, the jackpot symbols according to the first embodiment will be explained. As mentioned above, the jackpot symbol is a special symbol that indicates the type of jackpot as well as the jackpot win. The jackpot symbol is determined by jackpot symbol type determination, and the jackpot symbol type determination is performed using a jackpot symbol type determination table. A configuration example of the jackpot symbol type determination table according to the first embodiment is shown in FIG. 51(B).

As shown in FIG. 51(B), two types of jackpot symbols, a jackpot symbol A and a jackpot symbol B, are provided as the jackpot symbols of the special drawing 1. According to the jackpot symbol type determination table related to special drawing 1, jackpot symbol A is selected with a probability of 50%, and jackpot symbol B is selected with a probability of 50%. In addition, one type of jackpot symbol, jackpot symbol C, is provided as the jackpot symbol of special drawing 2. According to the jackpot symbol type determination table related to special figure 2, the jackpot symbol C is selected with a probability of 100%.

Next, a jackpot game according to the first embodiment will be explained. In the first embodiment, in the jackpot game, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, and in the small win game that is executed after the small win symbol is stopped and displayed, the game ball that has won the second jackpot 15 opened is It is executed when the specific area 16 is passed (V winning). The jackpot game components constituting the jackpot game, in other words, the jackpot game control table for controlling the jackpot game, determine the type of the special symbol that is stopped and displayed, in detail, the jackpot symbol that is the trigger for executing the jackpot game. It is associated with the type and the type of small winning symbol. FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the jackpot game control table according to the first embodiment.

Note that even if the small winning symbols are stopped and displayed, if the game ball does not pass through the specific area 16 in the small winning game, the jackpot game will not be executed. Therefore, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the direct trigger for executing the jackpot game is when the game ball passes through the specific area 16 (V winning), but the game ball does not enter the second big winning opening 15. and the game ball cannot pass through the specific area 16, winning the second grand prize opening 15 can be achieved by opening the second grand prize opening 15, and opening the second major prize opening 15 is a small hit. Since it is executed as a game, the stop display of small winning symbols is also included in the trigger for executing the jackpot game. In addition, in the following, the fact that a small win is determined in the jackpot judgment and the small win symbol is stopped and displayed in the special pattern variable display is referred to as "getting a small hit/becoming a small hit", and the game ball is Passing through the specific area 16 is sometimes referred to as "hitting the jackpot/hitting the jackpot."

As shown in FIG. 52, the jackpot game associated with jackpot symbol A (hereinafter also referred to as "first jackpot game") and the jackpot game associated with jackpot symbol B (hereinafter also referred to as "second jackpot game") ), and the round game related to the jackpot game (hereinafter also referred to as "third jackpot game") associated with the jackpot symbol C is executed 10 times.

Further, the number of times the round game related to the jackpot game (hereinafter also referred to as "fourth jackpot game") associated with the small winning symbol is executed is 10 times. The fourth jackpot game is a small win game (hereinafter also referred to as "small win game") that is executed by stopping display of the small win symbol, and when the game ball passes through the specific area 16, the small win game ends. It is executed according to what you want to do.

Further, in the first embodiment, the jackpot game component also includes the type of jackpot opening to be opened. As shown in FIG. 52, the first jackpot 14 is set to open in all round games of all jackpot games, regardless of the special symbol type. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 52, regardless of the special symbol type, for all round games of all jackpot games, the number of openings of the first big prize opening 14 in the round game is set to one, and for each opening. The relevant time (opening time) is set to 29.5 seconds, and the time required for closing after opening (closing time) is set to 2.0 seconds. Note that the closing time is not set for the last round game in each jackpot game. This is because after the opening of the first grand prize opening 14 related to the last round game ends, an ending is performed in which the first grand prize opening 14 is kept closed.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, regardless of the special symbol type, the opening time ("OP time" in FIG. 52) of all jackpot games is set to 10.0 seconds, and the ending time ("OP time" in FIG. 52) of all jackpot games is set to 10.0 seconds. The "ED time") is set to 10.0 seconds.

Note that the specific values related to the jackpot game components are not particularly limited and may be changed as appropriate. For example, the opening time and ending time may be different depending on the gaming state when the special symbol is stopped and displayed. Further, the types of the big winning holes 14 and 15 to be opened may be different depending on the order of the round games. Furthermore, depending on the order of the round games, the number of times the big winning holes 14, 15 are opened, the total time that the big winning holes 14, 15 are open in the round game, and the closing of the big winning holes 14, 15 after opening. The relevant time (closing time) may be different. Furthermore, the number of times the round game is executed in the jackpot game and the total time during which the jackpot openings 14 and 15 can be opened may vary depending on the type of small winning symbol.

Next, a small winning game according to the first embodiment will be explained. The pachinko game machine PY1 controls opening and closing of the big prize openings 14 and 15 in the small winning game using the small winning game control table. In the first embodiment, the small winning game control table can be set in association with the gaming state (gaming state at the time of small winning) when the small winning symbol that is the trigger for the small winning game is stopped and displayed. It is possible.

The small winning game control table stores elements (small winning game constituent elements) constituting a small winning game, particularly regarding opening and closing of the large winning openings 14 and 15. The small winning game components include the type of big winning opening to be opened, the number of openings of the big winning opening in the relevant small winning game, the time required for each opening (opening time), the time to be closed until the next opening (closing time), It includes the opening time (opening time), the ending time (ending time), etc. That is, the small winning game component is associated with the small winning game state. FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the small winning game control table according to the first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 53, the small win game control table is associated with the gaming state when a small win occurs. That is, there is a small winning game control table (normal small winning game control table) used when small winning symbols are stopped and displayed during the normal gaming state, and a small winning symbol is used when the small winning symbols are stopped and displayed during the time saving state. There is a small winning game control table used for (time saving small winning game control table).

In addition, below, the small winning game that is controlled and executed using the normal small winning game control table is referred to as the "normal small winning game", and the small winning game that is controlled and executed using the time saving small winning game control table. The small winning game is called a "time saving small winning game".

As shown in FIG. 53, the second large prize opening 15 is opened once in all small winning games. The opening time of the second large prize opening 15 in each small winning game is 1.8 seconds. Further, the opening time of the normal small winning game is 10.0 seconds, and the ending time is 2.0 seconds. On the other hand, the opening time of the time-saving small winning game is 2.0 seconds, and the ending time is 2.0 seconds.

Here, details of the small winning game will be explained using FIG. 54. FIG. 54(A) is a time chart showing the flow of the normal small winning game, and FIG. 54(B) is a time chart showing the flow of the time saving small winning game.

As shown in FIG. 54(A), when the "small winning symbol" is stopped and displayed as the stop display of the special figure 2 in the normal game state, the normal small winning game is played. Then, in response to the start of the normal small winning game, an opening (normal small winning OP) in which the second large prize opening 15 is kept closed is performed. The normal small win OP continues until 10.0 seconds have passed after the start of the normal small win game, and when the normal small win OP ends, the second large prize opening 15 is opened (the normal small win is opened). At the same time, the distribution member 16k is retracted and enters the first passing state. The normal small win release continues until 1.8 seconds have passed after the start of the release or until 10 game balls enter the second big prize opening 15, while the retraction of the distribution member 16k This evacuation continues until 2.8 seconds have elapsed after the start of the evacuation. Then, when the normal small winning opening ends, an ending (normal small winning ED) is performed in which the second large prize opening 15 is closed and the closed state is maintained. The normal small win ED continues until 2.0 seconds have passed after the start of the ED, and the normal small win game ends when the normal small win ED ends.

As shown in FIG. 54(B), when the "small winning symbol" is stopped and displayed as the stop display of the special drawing 2 in the time saving state, the time saving small winning game is performed. Then, in response to the start of the time-saving small winning game, an opening (time-saving small winning OP) is performed in which the second large prize opening 15 is initially kept in a closed state. The time-saving small win OP continues until 2.0 seconds have passed after the start of the time-saving small win game, and when the time-saving small win OP ends, the second big prize opening 15 is opened (the time-saving small win is released). At the same time, the distribution member 16k is retracted and enters the first passing state. The time-saving small win release continues until 1.8 seconds have passed after the start of the release or until 10 game balls enter the second big prize opening 15, while the retraction of the distribution member 16k This evacuation continues until 2.8 seconds have elapsed after the start of the evacuation. Then, when the time-saving small win opening is completed, an ending (time-saving small win ED) is performed in which the second big prize opening 15 is closed and the closed state is maintained. The time-saving small win ED continues until 2.0 seconds have passed after the start of the ED, and the time-saving small win game ends when the time-saving small win ED ends.

During the normal small winning game and the time-saving small winning game, the game ball that enters the second large prize opening 15 flows down to the non-specific area 17 because the distribution member 16k is in the retracted position in the first passing state. On the other hand, in the second passing state, since the distribution member 16k is in the advanced position, it flows down on the distribution member 16k and passes through the non-specific area 17. Then, when the game ball passes through the specific area 16, a jackpot game corresponding to the small winning symbol type is performed in accordance with the end of the small winning game.

In addition, in both the normal small winning game and the time-saving small winning game, while the second big winning opening 15 is open, and until 1.0 seconds have passed after the second big winning opening 15 is closed. During this period, the distribution member 16k is retracted (the first passage state is maintained), and the game ball is in a state where it can pass through the specific area 16 (V winning). Then, in both the normal small winning game and the time-saving small winning game, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 starts firing the game ball by hitting right after the small winning game starts, and then starts firing the game ball in the small winning game. Basically, the game ball is configured to pass through the specific area 16 (V winning) if the ball continues to be shot right-handed (unless there is a particular problem). Also, when a game ball enters the second grand prize opening 15 (wins a prize) during a small winning game, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls regardless of whether the game ball passes through the specific area 16 or not. It will be done.

Next, the game states to which the pachinko game machine PY1 newly transitions upon completion of the jackpot game, and the termination conditions related to each game state will be explained. In the first embodiment, when the jackpot game is executed based on the stop display of jackpot symbols, the game state to which the jackpot game is newly transitioned upon the end of the jackpot game, and the ending conditions for each game state are as follows: It is associated with the symbol type. On the other hand, when the jackpot game is executed based on the passage of the game ball through the specific area 16 (V winning), the game state to which the jackpot game is newly transitioned upon the end of the jackpot game, and the ending conditions related to each game state are , is associated with the corresponding small winning symbol type. In other words, whether the occurrence of a jackpot game is caused by a stop display of a jackpot symbol or a stop display of a small win symbol, the game state to which the jackpot game is newly transitioned when the jackpot game ends, and the ending conditions for each game state are as follows. It can be said that it is associated with the type of special symbol that triggers the occurrence of the jackpot game.

FIG. 55 shows the type of special symbol (special symbol type) that triggers the occurrence of the jackpot game, the gaming state to which the jackpot game transitions when the jackpot game corresponding to the special symbol type ends, and the ending conditions related to the gaming state. It is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a gaming state setting table showing the relationship between.

As shown in FIG. 55, when the special symbol types that trigger the occurrence of the jackpot are jackpot symbol A, jackpot symbol C, and small win symbol, the jackpot games (first jackpot game, first jackpot game, Upon completion of the third jackpot game and the fourth jackpot game, a time saving state is entered. A termination condition is set for this time saving state. In the case of the jackpot symbol A, the jackpot symbol C, and the small prize symbol, the termination condition is that the special pattern 2 variable display is executed 100 times. Therefore, in the time-saving state that changes with the end of the jackpot game that is executed after the jackpot symbol A and the jackpot symbol C are stopped and displayed, and in the small win game that is executed after the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed. The time-saving state that transitions with the end of the jackpot game that is executed after the winning game ball in the 2nd big winning hole 15 passes through the specific area 16 is such that the special figure 2 variable display changes to 100 without the jackpot game being executed. It can continue until it has been executed twice. That is, the prescribed number of times of the time saving state (prescribed time saving number) that is transferred upon the end of the jackpot game executed by the stop display of the jackpot symbol A and the jackpot symbol C, and the stop display of the small win symbol. The prescribed number of times of the time-saving state (the prescribed number of time-savings) that is transferred upon the end of the jackpot game that is executed by passing the specific area 16 of the game ball that won the second big prize opening 15 in the small winning game is 100 times. be.

On the other hand, when the special symbol type that triggers the occurrence of the jackpot is the jackpot symbol B, the state shifts to the normal game state with the end of the jackpot game (second jackpot game) corresponding to the special symbol type. No end conditions are set for this normal gaming state. Therefore, for example, when the jackpot symbol B is stopped and displayed in the normal game state, the game returns to the original game state as the base point of the game via the second jackpot game.

By the way, in the pachinko game machine PY1, the time saving state may occur due to an occurrence trigger different from a jackpot. The occurrence trigger other than this jackpot is that the special symbol variable display is executed a specific number of times without hitting the jackpot in the normal probability state. In the following, the trigger for the occurrence of a time-saving state other than this jackpot will be referred to as "reaching the ceiling." In addition, in order to distinguish the time-saving states based on their triggers, the time-saving state that occurs due to a jackpot is referred to as a "jackpot time-saving", and the time-saving state that occurs due to reaching the ceiling is referred to as a "ceiling time-saving".

In the first embodiment, the specific number of times related to ceiling time reduction is set to 800 times. However, the specific number of times related to ceiling time reduction is not limited to 800 times, and may be set as appropriate. Furthermore, the condition for ending the ceiling time reduction is that the special map 2 variable display is executed 1000 times without hitting the jackpot. That is, the ceiling time reduction can be continued until the special figure 2 variable display is executed 1000 times without hitting the jackpot, and the prescribed number of time reductions related to the ceiling time reduction is 1000 times. However, in the time-saving state, the game is basically aimed at winning the second starting slot 12, and the probability of being judged as a small hit in the jackpot determination regarding special drawing 2 is 79/319, so the special drawing There is a high possibility that it will be a jackpot if the ceiling time can be shortened until the 2-variable display is executed 1000 times.

Note that there are restrictions on the transition to ceiling time reduction. Specifically, after transitioning to the ceiling time reduction, the ceiling will not be reached again unless the game goes through a jackpot (jackpot game). That is, even if the special figure variable display is executed a specific number of times (800 times) without hitting the jackpot after shifting to the ceiling time saving state, a new time saving state will not occur.

In addition, in the first embodiment, in addition to transitioning to the normal gaming state in response to the end of the jackpot game, there is also a transition to the time saving state, but the gaming state related to the jackpot winning probability in the time saving state is Since the prescribed number of times in the time saving state is 100 times, when the special figure 2 variable display is executed 100 times in the time saving state after the jackpot game, the normal game state is entered. Therefore, in the first embodiment, the special figure variable display is executed a specific number of times after the jackpot game ends, regardless of the type of game state (presence or absence of a time-saving state after the jackpot game) that changes depending on the end of the jackpot game. When this happens, the normal gaming state shifts to the time saving state.

Further, although a detailed explanation will be omitted, in the pachinko game machine PY1, when the power is cut off, for example, by turning off the power switch 191, the game control microcomputer 101 controls the game at that time. The information stored in the RAM 104 is backed up. The information stored in this gaming RAM 104 includes data regarding the gaming state. When the power is turned on, for example, by turning on the power switch 191, the gaming control microcomputer 101 powers off the gaming RAM 104 if the RAM clear switch 192 is not operated in a specific manner at that time. Return to previous state. That is, although the pachinko game machine PY1 is newly started up, the gaming state at the time of power cut-off is carried over. On the other hand, the gaming control microcomputer 101 clears the gaming RAM 104 if the RAM clear switch 192 is operated in a specific manner when the power is turned on, such as when the power switch 191 is turned on. Clearing the gaming RAM 104 includes changing the gaming state to the normal gaming state, which is the base point of the game. That is, no matter what the gaming state is when the power is turned off, if the RAM clear switch 192 is specifically operated when the power is turned on, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 starts the game in the normal gaming state.

Furthermore, when the power is turned on to the pachinko game machine PY1, the game control microcomputer 101 sends a game state designation command indicating the game state to be restored to the performance control board 120, if the RAM clear switch 192 is not operated in a specific manner. When the RAM clear switch 192 is specifically operated, a gaming state designation command indicating the normal gaming state is transmitted to the production control board 120.

Furthermore, although the details will be described later, the game control microcomputer 101 counts the remaining number of executions of the special figure variable display until the ceiling is reached (remaining number of times at the ceiling). The ceiling remaining number of times is stored in a predetermined area of the gaming RAM 104. The data indicating the remaining ceiling number of times (ceiling remaining number of times data) is also backed up when the power to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is cut off, similarly to the data regarding the gaming state. In addition, similar to the data regarding the gaming state, if the RAM clear switch 192 is not operated in a specific manner when the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine PY1, the ceiling remaining number of times data is returned to the state before the power was turned off. If the RAM clear switch 192 is specifically operated when the power is turned on to the pachinko game machine PY1, the initial value is returned. That is, if the RAM clear switch 192 is not operated in a specific manner, the remaining ceiling count is taken over from before the power was shut off, and if the RAM clear switch 192 is operated in a specific manner, the remaining ceiling count is reset. Therefore, for example, if the power to the pachinko game machine PY1 is cut off when the remaining number of ceiling games is 100, and if the power is turned on without any specific operation of the RAM clear switch 192, the game control microcomputer 101 If the game is restarted with the remaining number of times being 100 and the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch 192 is being operated in a specific manner, the game control microcomputer 101 restarts the game with the remaining number of times remaining at the ceiling being 800.

Next, a description will be given of the remaining ceiling number suggestion performance that can be executed by the pachinko game machine PY1. The ceiling remaining number of times suggestion performance is a performance that roughly suggests the ceiling remaining number of times. Further, in the first embodiment, the ceiling remaining number of times suggestion effect is executed using the frame lamp 53. In the first embodiment, the frame lamp 53 includes a first light emitting section 53A to a twelfth light emitting section L that can control light emission independently of each other. FIG. 56 is a diagram schematically showing a front view of the pachinko game machine PY1 to explain the first light emitting section 53A to the twelfth light emitting section 53L mounted on the pachinko game machine PY1.

As shown in FIG. 56, the frame lamp 53 including the first to twelfth light emitting parts 53A to 12th light emitting parts L, as a whole, is located on the left side, the right side, and the front side of the upper end of the frame-shaped front frame 23m when viewed from the front. It is formed. On the left side of the front frame 23m, a first light emitting section 53A, a second light emitting section 53B, a third light emitting section 53C, and a fourth light emitting section are arranged side by side from bottom to top, and on the right side of the front frame 23m. , a fifth light emitting section 53E, a sixth light emitting section 53F, a seventh light emitting section 53G, and an eighth light emitting section 53H are arranged from bottom to top, and a ninth light emitting section 53I, A tenth light emitting section 53J, an eleventh light emitting section 53K, and a twelfth light emitting section 53L are arranged side by side from left to right. That is, the first light emitting section 53A, the second light emitting section 53B, the third light emitting section 53C, and the fourth light emitting section 53D constitute the left part of the frame lamp 53, and the fifth light emitting section 53E, the sixth light emitting section 53F, and the fourth light emitting section 53D constitute the left part of the frame lamp 53. The seventh light emitting section 53G and the eighth light emitting section 53H constitute the right part of the frame lamp 53, and the ninth light emitting section 53I, the tenth light emitting section 53J, the eleventh light emitting section 53K, and the twelfth light emitting section 53L constitute the frame lamp 53. It makes up the upper part of.

The first light emitting section 53A, the second light emitting section 53B, the third light emitting section 53C, and the fourth light emitting section 53D; the fifth light emitting section 53E, the sixth light emitting section 53F, the seventh light emitting section 53G, and the eighth light emitting section 53H. The front frame 23m is configured to be substantially symmetrical with respect to the vertical center line of the front frame 23m when viewed from the front. In addition, in front view, the first light emitting part 53A is formed from the left front surface of the front frame 23m to the left side surface of the upper plate 34, and the fifth light emitting part 53E is formed from the right front surface of the front frame 23m to the left side surface of the upper plate 34. It is formed across the right side.

Each of the first light emitting section 53A to the twelfth light emitting section L faces the front, and directly faces the player associated with the pachinko gaming machine PY1. The light-emitting portions of each of the first light-emitting portion 53A to the eighth light-emitting portion 53H are formed to project forward as a whole, and not only from the front side but also from the left side to the front side and to the right. It is formed so that it can be visually recognized in a 180-degree range on the front side, in other words, in a 180-degree range on the front side from the surface of the transparent plate 23t in plan view. Therefore, each of the first light emitting section 53A to the eighth light emitting section 53H emits light over the entire 180 degree range on the front side in plan view. Further, each of the light emitting portions of the ninth light emitting section 53I to the twelfth light emitting section 53L emit light toward the front. However, each of the ninth light emitting section 53I to the twelfth light emitting section 53L is configured to be visible within a range extending from the diagonal left direction to the diagonal right direction on the front side. Therefore, the frame lamp 53 can be used not only for the players who are related to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 as a whole, and who are directly facing the frame lamp 53, but also for the players hanging from the left side, through the front side, and the right side. It is configured so that it can be seen even by a person who is not playing the game and is located 180 degrees away from the front side.

Further, the ceiling remaining number of times suggestion effect suggests a range of ceiling remaining times (ceiling remaining number of times range) depending on the difference in the light emission mode of the frame lamp 53. In the first embodiment, the light emission modes of the frame lamp 53 related to the ceiling remaining number suggestion presentation (ceiling remaining number suggestion presentation modes) include the first light emission mode to the eighth light emission mode (the first ceiling remaining number suggestion presentation mode to the third ceiling remaining number suggestion presentation mode). There are 8 ceiling remaining number suggestion presentation modes). Further, the remaining ceiling number range includes a first remaining ceiling number range to an eighth remaining ceiling number range. There is no overlap between the 1st ceiling remaining number of times range to the 8th ceiling remaining number of times range, and the specific number of times (800 times) that is the maximum value of the remaining ceiling number of times in the 1st remaining ceiling number range to the 8th remaining ceiling number range. to the minimum value "1".

The correspondence relationship between the ceiling remaining number of times suggestion presentation mode and the ceiling remaining number of times range is also one-to-one (unique). That is, the first light emitting mode (the first ceiling remaining number of times suggestion presentation mode) is associated with the first ceiling remaining number range, and the second light emission mode (the second ceiling remaining number of times suggestion presentation mode) is associated with the second ceiling remaining number of times suggestion presentation mode. The remaining number of times range is associated with the third light emitting mode (the third ceiling remaining number of times suggestion presentation mode), the third ceiling remaining number of times range is associated with the third light emission mode (the fourth ceiling remaining number of times suggestion presentation mode), and the fourth light emission mode (the fourth ceiling remaining number of times suggestion presentation mode) is associated with the 4th ceiling remaining count range, the 5th light emission mode (5th ceiling remaining count suggestion production mode) is associated with the 5th ceiling remaining count range, and the 6th light emission mode (6th ceiling remaining count suggestion presentation mode) is associated with the 5th ceiling remaining count range. The 6th ceiling remaining number of times range is associated with the remaining number of times suggestion presentation mode), the 7th ceiling remaining number of times range is associated with the 7th light emitting mode (7th remaining number of times suggestion presentation mode), and the 8th ceiling remaining number of times range is associated with The light emitting mode (eighth ceiling remaining count suggestion presentation mode) is associated with the eighth ceiling remaining count range. Therefore, the light emission in the first light emission mode of the frame lamp 53 suggests that the number of remaining ceilings is within the first remaining ceiling number range, and the light emission in the second light emission mode of the frame lamp 53 indicates that the remaining number of ceilings is within the range of the remaining ceiling number of times. The light emission in the third light emission mode of the frame lamp 53 suggests that the ceiling remaining number of times is within the third ceiling remaining number range, and the light emission in the fourth light emission mode of the frame lamp 53 , suggests that the remaining ceiling number is within the fourth remaining ceiling number range, and the frame lamp 53 emitting light in the fifth light emission mode suggests that the remaining ceiling number is within the fifth remaining ceiling number range, and the frame lamp 53 The light emission in the sixth light emission mode indicates that the remaining ceiling number is within the sixth remaining ceiling number range, and the light emission in the seventh light emission mode of the frame lamp 53 indicates that the remaining ceiling number is in the seventh remaining ceiling number range. This suggests that the light emission of the frame lamp 53 in the eighth light emission mode suggests that the number of remaining ceilings is within the range of the number of remaining ceilings.

In addition, in the ceiling remaining number of times suggestion effect, the first light emitting section 53A to the twelfth light emitting section 53L constituting the frame lamp 53 emit light in the corresponding light emission mode in synchronization. That is, when the ceiling remaining number range is the first ceiling remaining number range, the first light emitting section 53A to the twelfth light emitting section 53L synchronize and emit light in the first light emission mode, and the ceiling remaining number range is the second ceiling remaining number range. When the number of times range is within the range, the first light emitting section 53A to the twelfth light emitting section 53L synchronize and emit light in the second light emitting mode, and when the ceiling remaining number range is within the third ceiling remaining number range, the first light emitting section When the 53A to 12th light emitting parts 53L synchronize and emit light in the third light emitting mode, and the ceiling remaining number range is the fourth ceiling remaining number range, the first light emitting parts 53A to 12th light emitting parts 53L synchronize and emit light in the third light emitting mode. If light is emitted in the fourth light emission mode and the ceiling remaining number of times range is within the fifth ceiling remaining number of times range, the first light emitting section 53A to the twelfth light emitting section 53L will emit light in the fifth light emission mode in synchronization, and the ceiling remaining number of times will be emitted. When the range is the sixth ceiling remaining number of times range, the first light emitting section 53A to the twelfth light emitting section 53L synchronize and emit light in the sixth light emission mode, and when the ceiling remaining number of times range is the seventh ceiling remaining number of times range. When the first light emitting section 53A to the twelfth light emitting section 53L synchronize and emit light in the seventh light emitting mode, and the ceiling remaining number range is the eighth ceiling remaining number range, the first light emitting section 53A to the twelfth light emitting section 53L emit light in the seventh light emission mode. The portion 53L emits light in the eighth light emission mode in synchronization.

Further, although specific numbers for each ceiling remaining number range can be set as appropriate, in the first embodiment, the first ceiling remaining number range is 1≦ceiling remaining number ≦100, and the second ceiling remaining number range is 1≦ceiling remaining number ≦100. The range is 101≦Ceiling remaining count≦200, the third ceiling remaining count range is 201≦Ceiling remaining count≦300, the fourth ceiling remaining count range is 301≦Ceiling remaining count≦400, and the third ceiling remaining count range is 301≦Ceiling remaining count≦400. The 5th ceiling remaining number range is 401≦ceiling remaining number of times≦500, the 6th ceiling remaining number of times range is 501≦ceiling remaining number of times≦600, and the 7th ceiling remaining number of times range is 601≦ceiling remaining number of times≦700. The eighth ceiling remaining number range is 701≦ceiling remaining number of times≦800.

Next, FIG. 57 shows the relationship between the ceiling remaining frequency range and the specific details of the light emission mode of the frame lamp 53. As shown in FIG. 57, the eighth light emitting mode is continuous lighting of white color, the seventh light emission mode is continuous lighting of blue color, and the sixth light emission mode is continuous lighting of green color. The fifth light emission mode is continuous red lighting. Furthermore, the fourth light emitting mode is such that white light is lit for 5 seconds and blue light is lit for 5 seconds, which are repeated as one set, and the third light emission mode is that white light is lit for 5 seconds, blue light is lit for 5 seconds, and green light is lit for 5 seconds. The content is to repeat one set of lighting for seconds, and the second lighting mode is to repeat one set of white lighting for 5 seconds, blue lighting for 5 seconds, green lighting for 5 seconds, and red lighting for 5 seconds. It is. In addition, the first light emission mode is such that the frame lamp 53 is continuously lit with white lighting, blue lighting, green lighting, and red lighting mixed appropriately. However, the specific contents of each light emission mode may be set as appropriate as long as they differ between the light emission modes.

In this way, the ceiling remaining number of times suggestion effect is executed in a light emitting manner according to the ceiling remaining number of times range of the frame lamp 53, but there are periods in which it is executed and periods in which it is not executed. In the first embodiment, the period in which the ceiling remaining number of times suggestion effect is executed is set to the customer waiting state. In other words, as a game related to a special figure, when none of the special figure variable display, the small winning game, and the jackpot game are being executed, the ceiling remaining number suggestion effect is executed, and the special figure variable display, the small winning game, and When any of the jackpot games is being executed, the ceiling remaining number suggestion performance is not executed.

Next, a specific example of the ceiling remaining number suggestion presentation in the pachinko game machine PY1 will be explained. FIG. 58 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the ceiling remaining number of times suggestion effect is executed, and schematically shows the display section 50a and the frame lamp 53 (first light emitting section 53A to twelfth light emitting section 53L). represents. Further, in FIG. 58, when each of the light emitting parts 53A to 53L is represented by diagonal hatching, it represents a state in which the light is off, and when each light emitting part 53A to 53L is represented in white, it represents a state in which the light is turned off. It is assumed that it represents the state.

For example, a special figure that has been fluctuatingly displayed when there is no special figure pending is stopped and displayed in a manner that indicates a loss, and in response to the stopped display of the special figure, as shown in FIG. 58(A), the display unit 50a It is assumed that the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a loss. It is assumed that the frame lamp 53 (first light emitting section 53A to twelfth light emitting section 53L) is off at this time. However, the frame lamp 53 (first light emitting section 53A to twelfth light emitting section 53L) may emit light in a light emitting manner related to a predetermined game that cannot be executed in the ceiling remaining number of times suggestion effect.

When the special symbol confirmation time has elapsed after the special symbol is stopped and the special symbol is confirmed, that is, when the special symbol is in a waiting state, the ceiling will be displayed according to the ceiling remaining frequency range at that time, as shown in Fig. 58 (B). The ceiling remaining number of times suggestion performance is started according to the remaining number of times suggestion performance mode, and the frame lamp 53 (first light emitting section 53A to twelfth light emitting section 53L) emits light in this light emission mode. This ceiling remaining count suggestion effect continues until the next variable display of special figures starts. In other words, the ceiling remaining number of times suggestion effect continues to be executed in the customer waiting state. Therefore, for example, if the customer waiting demo video G100 is configured to be displayed on the entire display section 50a after a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after the special drawing is confirmed, the special drawing will be confirmed. If the new special figure variable display continues to not start even after the predetermined period of time has elapsed, the customer waiting demonstration video G100 is displayed on the display section 50a as shown in FIG. 58(C). Even if this occurs, the ceiling remaining number suggestion effect by the frame lamp 53 continues to be executed.

In this way, the frame lamp 53 (the first light emitting section 53A to the twelfth light emitting section 53L) emits light in a direction indicating the remaining ceiling number of times according to the remaining ceiling number of times range at that time, so that the pachinko machine concerned A person who is located away from the pachinko game machine PY1 within the range where the game machine PY1 can be seen can grasp the remaining ceiling number range by the light emission mode of the frame lamp 53 (first light emitting section 53A to twelfth light emitting section 53L). can. Therefore, without having to go to the trouble of coming in front of the pachinko game machine PY1, it is possible to determine whether or not the game can be played on the pachinko game machine PY1 based on the ceiling remaining number of times range.

Then, when the pachinko machine PY1 starts playing a game while the ceiling remaining number of times suggestion effect is being executed in the customer waiting state, and the special figure variable display starts, as shown in FIG. 58(D). At the same time, the variable display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is started, and the ceiling remaining number suggestion performance ends, and for example, the frame lamp 53 (first light emitting section 53A to twelfth light emitting section 53L) is turned off. However, the frame lamp 53 (first light emitting section 53A to twelfth light emitting section 53L) may start emitting light in a light emitting mode related to a predetermined game that cannot be executed in the ceiling remaining number of times suggestion effect. That is, with the start of the special figure variable display from the customer waiting state, the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 53 (first light emitting section 53A to twelfth light emitting section 53L) changes from the light emitting mode related to the ceiling remaining number of times suggestion effect to the game. You may make it switch to the predetermined|prescribed light emission mode which concerns.

Next, an example of a process for the pachinko game machine PY1 to execute a ceiling remaining number suggestion performance (ceiling remaining number suggestion performance control process) will be described. However, the contents of the process may be changed as appropriate within the range in which the ceiling remaining number of times suggestion effect can be executed in the end.

In the first embodiment, the ceiling remaining number suggestion production control process includes a ceiling remaining number count preparation process, a ceiling remaining number counting execution process, a ceiling remaining number suggestion production setup process, and a ceiling remaining number production execution process. The remaining ceiling number count preparation process, the remaining ceiling number counting execution process, and the remaining ceiling number suggesting production setup process are executed by the game control microcomputer 101, and the remaining ceiling number production execution process is executed by the performance control microcomputer 121. In the first embodiment, it is assumed that a predetermined area of the gaming RAM 104 is provided with a remaining ceiling number counter for counting and storing the number of remaining ceilings. Further, as shown in FIG. 57, a table (ceiling remaining number suggestion presentation mode determination table) in which the ceiling remaining number range and the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 53 related to the ceiling remaining number suggestion presentation (ceiling remaining number suggestion presentation mode) is associated. ) is stored in the performance ROM 123.

First, the preparation process for counting the remaining number of times at the ceiling will be explained. The game control microcomputer 101 counts the number of remaining ceilings, for example, when the ending of a jackpot game ends and when the Pachinko game machine PY1 is powered on and the RAM clear switch 192 is operated in a specific manner. Execute the preparation process. The game control microcomputer 101 sets the remaining ceiling number counter to "800", which is a specific number of times, as a preparation process for counting the number of remaining ceilings, and also sets a measurable flag indicating that the remaining number of ceilings can be measured. A predetermined area of the RAM 104 is turned on.

Next, the ceiling remaining number counting execution process will be explained. For example, if the result of the jackpot determination is other than a jackpot, the game control microcomputer 101 executes the ceiling remaining number counting execution process when the special symbol confirmation time has elapsed after the special symbol fluctuation display stops. In the ceiling remaining number counting execution process, the game control microcomputer 101 first determines whether or not the countable flag is ON. If the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the measurable flag is not turned on, it finishes the process of counting the number of remaining times on the ceiling, and if it determines that the measurable flag is turned on, it then executes the process of counting the number of remaining times on the ceiling. , the counter value of the ceiling remaining number counter is subtracted by "1", and it is determined whether the counter value of the ceiling remaining number counter is "0". Here, if the counter value of the ceiling remaining number of times counter is not "0", it means that the special figure variable display of the specific number of times is not executed in the normal gaming state, so the game control microcomputer 101 shifts to ceiling time saving. In order to maintain the game state as it is, the process for counting the remaining number of times at the ceiling is finished. On the other hand, if the counter value of the ceiling remaining number of times counter is "0", it means that the special figure variable display has been executed for a specific number of times in the normal gaming state, so the game control microcomputer 101 changes to the ceiling time shortening mode. Then, as a ceiling remaining number counting execution process, the time saving flag is turned on in the time saving flag area of the gaming RAM 104, and "1000", which is the specified time saving number related to the ceiling time saving, is set in the time saving remaining number counter provided in the gaming RAM 104. Then, a game state command indicating the time saving state is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104, the countable flag is turned off, and the ceiling remaining number counting execution process is completed. In this way, the countable flag is turned OFF when transitioning to ceiling time saving, and the measurable flag is turned ON when the jackpot game ends or when the RAM clear switch 192 is operated in a specific manner. After shifting to the time saving mode, even if special figure variable display is executed a specific number of times without hitting a jackpot or without clearing the RAM, the shift to the ceiling time saving mode does not occur.

Next, the ceiling remaining number of times suggestion production setup processing will be explained. When the game control microcomputer 101 shifts to a customer waiting state (the customer waiting flag is turned on), it executes a ceiling remaining number suggestion production setup process. The game control microcomputer 101 sets a command indicating the remaining ceiling number of times (ceiling remaining number designation command) in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 as a ceiling remaining number of times suggestion production setup process. As described above, when the game control microcomputer 101 turns on the customer waiting flag, it sets a customer waiting command in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104. Therefore, in the output processing (S101) of the next game control side timer interrupt (S005), the ceiling remaining number designation command will be transmitted to the production control board 120 along with the customer waiting command.

When the production control microcomputer 121 receives the ceiling remaining number designation command together with the customer waiting command, it executes the ceiling remaining number production execution processing. As part of the ceiling remaining number production execution processing, the production control microcomputer 121 refers to the ceiling remaining number suggestion production mode determination table and selects a frame related to the ceiling remaining number suggestion production based on the ceiling remaining number indicated by the ceiling remaining number designation command. The lighting mode of the lamp 53 (ceiling remaining number suggestion presentation mode) is determined, and the frame lamp 53 is made to emit light with the light emission content indicated by the determined lighting mode (ceiling remaining number suggestion presentation mode) (the ceiling remaining number of times suggestion presentation is executed). . For example, the performance control microcomputer 121 determines the light emission mode of the frame lamp 53 related to the ceiling remaining number of times suggestion effect (ceiling remaining number of times (suggestive performance mode) can be determined.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY1, in the normal gaming state, when a specific condition including that the special symbol is executed a specific number of times (800 times) without being stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol, the second The remaining number of variable displays of the special symbol (ceiling remaining number of times) is the first number of times (for example, the first ceiling remaining number of times range) until the starting port 12 enters the time-saving state where it is easy to open and the time-saving state is reached due to the establishment of a specific condition (ceiling remaining number of times). , execute a first light emitting effect (ceiling remaining number suggestion presentation based on the first ceiling remaining number suggestion presentation mode) that causes the frame lamp 53 to emit light in a first emission mode (for example, a first ceiling remaining number suggestion presentation mode). When the remaining number of times (ceiling remaining number of times) is a second number of times different from the first number of times (e.g., second ceiling remaining number of times range), the frame lamp 53 is set to the second light emitting mode (e.g., second ceiling number of times remaining). Since the second light emitting effect (the ceiling remaining number of times suggestion effect based on the second ceiling remaining number of times suggestion effect) that emits light in the second ceiling remaining number of times suggestion effect mode) may be executed, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 may be displayed within the range where the relevant pachinko gaming machine PY1 is visible. A person located at a distance from PY1 can grasp the remaining ceiling number range by the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 53, and can grasp the ceiling remaining number range based on the ceiling remaining number range without going to the trouble of coming in front of the pachinko machine PY1. Since it is possible to determine whether or not a game can be played on the pachinko game machine PY1, the user-friendliness of the pachinko game machine PY1 is improved, and the player can play the game in the situation he/she desires, thereby increasing the interest in the game. . Furthermore, when the execution conditions including the variable display of special symbols, the jackpot game, and the small win game are not executed, a performance suggesting the remaining number of ceilings is executed, which may interfere with the performance related to the game. can be prevented. Furthermore, since the frame lamp 53 is provided on the front side of the front frame 23m, it becomes easier for a person who is located away from the pachinko game machine PY1 to see the ceiling remaining number of times suggestion effect, and the effect of the ceiling remaining number of times suggestion effect is improved. improves.

(Example of modification of the first embodiment)
Next, a modification example of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the first embodiment will be described. Note that it is also possible to appropriately combine the modification examples described below.

The specific values of the specific number of times to reach the ceiling and the specified number of times of ceiling time reduction are not limited to those in the first embodiment, and may be changed as appropriate. Further, in the first embodiment, each ceiling remaining number range is configured to be 100 times, but the specific content of the ceiling remaining number range is not limited to the first embodiment and may be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the ceiling remaining number ranges are all set to the same number of 100 times, but there may be a ceiling remaining number range with a relatively small number of times and a ceiling remaining number range with a relatively large number of times. You can also do it. Further, the number of times related to the ceiling remaining number of times range may be of three or more types. Furthermore, the type of ceiling remaining number range is not limited to the first embodiment, and may be changed as appropriate.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the ceiling remaining number of times suggestion effect is always executed when the customer is in the waiting state, but when the ceiling remaining number of times suggestion effect is executed in the customer waiting state, the ceiling remaining number of times suggestion effect is executed. There may be cases where this is not done. As a criterion for whether or not to perform this process, for example, a threshold value of the remaining number of times at the ceiling may be used. In this case, if the remaining ceiling number is equal to or greater than a threshold, the remaining ceiling number suggesting effect may be executed, and if the remaining ceiling number is less than the threshold, the remaining ceiling number suggesting effect may not be executed. Conversely, if the remaining ceiling number is equal to or greater than the threshold, the remaining ceiling number suggesting effect may not be executed, and if the remaining number of ceilings is less than the threshold, the remaining ceiling number suggesting effect may be executed. The threshold value in these cases can be set as appropriate; for example, when the specific number of times is 800, the threshold value may be set to at least half of the specific number of times, such as 500 times. On the contrary, for example, when the specific number of times is 800, the threshold value may be set to at least half of the specific number of times, such as 200 times. Furthermore, the criteria for when to execute the ceiling remaining number of times suggestion effect and when not to execute it, such as by ensuring that the ceiling remaining number of times suggestion effect is executed in the normal gaming state and not executing the ceiling remaining number of times suggestion effect in the time saving state. may be placed in a gaming state.

Furthermore, the specific performance content of the ceiling remaining number of times suggestion performance is not limited to the first embodiment, and may be changed as appropriate within a range where the difference in the ceiling remaining number range can be mutually distinguished depending on the difference in the performance content. Further, in the first embodiment, the ceiling remaining number of times suggestion performance is started when transitioning to the customer waiting state, but the start timing of the ceiling remaining number of times suggestion performance may be changed as appropriate. For example, the performance suggesting the number of times remaining on the ceiling may be started when a specific period of time, such as 20 seconds, has elapsed after transitioning to the customer waiting state. Alternatively, the performance suggesting the number of remaining ceiling times may be started in response to the start of a specific performance in the customer waiting state, such as the customer waiting demonstration video G100. For example, the special pattern fluctuation display stops when there is no special pattern pending, and then the special pattern confirmation time elapses and the special pattern is confirmed. Even if the stop display of the symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is maintained and the customer waiting demonstration video G100 is displayed on the entire display section 50a when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after the special symbol was confirmed. good.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the performance suggesting the number of remaining ceiling times can be performed only while waiting for a customer, but the period during which the performance suggesting the number of remaining ceiling times can be performed is not limited to the first embodiment, and may be changed as appropriate. . For example, instead of or in addition to the customer waiting state, it may be possible to perform the ceiling remaining count suggestion effect even while the game is being played. In this case, the state in which a game in which the ceiling remaining number of times suggestion performance can be executed is being executed may be restricted or not particularly restricted. As an example of the restriction, it may be possible to perform the ceiling remaining number suggestion performance in a game state other than the state in which a jackpot game is being executed, such as a special figure variable display. Alternatively, the effect suggesting the number of remaining ceilings may be executed only in the normal gaming state.

Furthermore, if it is possible to execute the ceiling remaining number of times suggestion effect while waiting for a customer and while a game is being executed, it is possible to execute the ceiling remaining number of times suggestion effect while waiting for a customer and while a game is being executed. The conditions may be the same or different. If different, the conditions for executing the ceiling remaining number of times suggestion performance while a game is being played may be made stricter than the conditions for executing the ceiling remaining number of times suggestion performance while waiting for a customer. . For example, in that case, while waiting for a customer, it is possible to perform a performance that suggests the remaining ceiling number of times no matter how many times there are remaining ceilings, but in a state where a game is being played, the remaining number of ceilings is a predetermined number (for example, 200 times). ) In the following cases, it may be possible to execute the ceiling remaining number suggestion effect. In addition, on the contrary, even if the conditions for executing the ceiling remaining number of times suggestion effect in the customer waiting state are stricter than the conditions for executing the ceiling remaining number of times suggestion effect while the game is being executed. good. Furthermore, there may be a plurality of conditions for executing the ceiling remaining number suggestion performance depending on the type of the state even in the state in which the game is being executed.

In addition, in the first embodiment, there is one type of gaming state related to the probability of winning a jackpot, but as in the basic embodiment, there are two types of gaming states related to the probability of winning a jackpot: a normal probability state and a high probability state. You can also do it. In this case, the ceiling remaining number of times may start from the point where the normal probability state is first reached after the jackpot game. For example, when a jackpot game ends, the state shifts to a high probability state, and if the special figure 2 variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) without hitting the jackpot in the high probability state, the state changes from the high probability state to the normal probability state. In the case of transitioning to the normal probability state, the number of times remaining at the ceiling is measured after transitioning to the normal probability state. Further, the conditions for transition from the high probability state to the normal probability state after such a jackpot game (conditions for ending the high probability state) are not limited to the execution of the special figure 2 variable display, and may be set as appropriate. For example, if the user falls in a so-called "fall lottery", the high probability state may be shifted to the normal probability state. Alternatively, if a small win is won a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) in the high probability state (the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed), the high probability state may be shifted to the normal probability state.

Further, in the first embodiment, once the time limit reaches the ceiling, unless the RAM is cleared afterwards, the ceiling will not be reached again unless there is a jackpot. However, once the time has been reduced to the ceiling, it may be possible to reach the ceiling again without hitting the jackpot. For example, if you have transitioned to ceiling time reduction, but the special pattern variable display is executed for the specified number of ceiling time reduction times without hitting the jackpot in the ceiling time reduction, and you transition to the normal gaming state, you may not hit the jackpot after transitioning to the normal gaming state. When the special figure variable display is executed a specific number of times, the ceiling may be reached again and the time saving state may be entered. Or, for example, if you have transitioned to a ceiling time saver, but the special figure variable display is executed the specified number of ceiling time savers without hitting a jackpot in the ceiling time saver and you have transitioned to the normal gaming state, the ceiling time saver before the normal gaming state If the special symbol variable display is executed a specific number of times without hitting the jackpot after the transition, the ceiling may be reached again and the time saving state may be entered.

Further, in the first embodiment, the frame lamp 53 provided on the front side of the front frame 23m is used to perform the ceiling remaining number suggestion effect, but the frame lamp 53 is the only production device that executes the ceiling remaining count suggestion effect. It may be changed as appropriate. For example, the first effect button 40k and the second effect button 41k may be configured to be able to emit light, and the effect suggesting the number of times remaining on the ceiling may be executed by the first effect button 40k and the second effect button 41k emitting light. Furthermore, a light emitting device capable of emitting light may be provided at a position on the game board unit YU that is visible to the player, and the effect suggesting the remaining number of ceilings may be executed by emitting light from the light emitting device. Note that the term "player" here includes players located near the pachinko machine PY1 (for example, within 2 to 3 meters), but also those located a certain distance from the pachinko machine PY1 (for example, within 5 meters). It is preferable that players who are far away are also included in the above). Further, the ceiling remaining number of times suggestion effect may be executed by sound or an operation by an operable actuating device. In this case, it is sufficient if a player who is located at least in the vicinity of the pachinko machine PY1 (for example, within 2 to 3 meters) can recognize the player; It is preferable if players who are far away can recognize it. Alternatively, the so-called "data display" placed directly above the pachinko game machine PY1 may be configured to be able to emit light, and the data display may be made to emit light as appropriate to perform a performance suggesting the remaining number of times at the ceiling. good.

<Second embodiment>
Next, a second embodiment of the present invention will be described based on the basic embodiment of the present invention described above. Note that the same reference numerals and terms are used for the same configurations as those in the basic embodiment or similarly corresponding configurations.

The surface of the front door 23, the surface of the upper tray 34, the surface of the lower tray 35, the surface of the handle 72k, the surface of the first performance button 40k, and the surface of the second performance button 41k of the pachinko gaming machine PY2 according to the second embodiment is coated with a specific material that can catalyze and decompose harmful substances such as viruses and bacteria when exposed to light, and has antibacterial and antiviral effects. Therefore, for example, even if a harmful substance such as a virus or bacteria adheres to the surface of the pachinko machine PY2 due to a player playing on the pachinko machine PY2, the player may play the pachinko machine after playing the game. When the user leaves the gaming machine PY2, antibacterial and antiviral treatment will begin. Therefore, the pachinko game machine PY2 may perform a performance (special performance) regarding the antibacterial/antiviral status of the pachinko game machine PY2. Specifically, the pachinko game machine PY2 executes a special performance depending on the time when contact with the handle 72k is no longer detected. In the second embodiment, the transition from a situation in which contact with the handle 72k is detected to a situation in which contact with the handle 72k is no longer detected is when the player who was playing the game with the pachinko gaming machine PY2 until then It is assumed that the player has finished playing the game and left the pachinko gaming machine PY2. Note that the predetermined material that can catalyze and decompose harmful substances such as viruses and bacteria when irradiated with light and has antibacterial and antiviral effects can be set as appropriate, but in the second embodiment, , is composed of a photocatalyst.
In addition, "antibacterial" according to the second embodiment refers to suppressing the proliferation of bacteria, and "antiviral" refers to inactivating viruses.

In addition, although the details will be described later, the performance control microcomputer 121 measures the time that has passed since contact with the handle 72k is no longer detected (contact release elapsed time: CRt), and performs a special performance according to the elapsed time. Execute. In other words, the performance control microcomputer 121 changes the performance content of the special performance according to the contact release elapsed time. Note that in the second embodiment, the special performance is composed of audio output from the speaker 52 and light emission from the frame lamp 53. Hereinafter, the audio part that makes up the special performance will be referred to as a "special audio performance," and the light emission part that will make up the special performance will be referred to as a "special light emission performance." The special light emission performance continues to be executed without interruption from the start of the special performance to the end of the special performance. On the other hand, the special audio performance continues to be executed intermittently at predetermined time intervals.

The performance content of the special performance (special performance mode: performance content of the special audio performance (special audio performance mode) and performance content of the special light emission performance (special light emission performance mode)) changes depending on the elapsed contact release time. FIG. 59 shows the relationship between special presentation modes (special audio presentation mode and special light emission presentation mode) and contact release elapsed time. As shown in FIG. 59, there are 10 types of special sound production modes (1st special sound production mode to 10th special voice production mode), and 11 types of special light emission mode. There are light emission modes (first special light emission mode to eleventh special light emission mode).

As the special light emitting effect continues to be executed without interruption, the special light emitting effect mode is sequentially switched. As shown in FIG. 59, the order of the special light emission modes is as follows: First special light emission mode → Second special light emission mode → Third special light emission mode → Fourth special light emission mode → Fifth special light emission mode → 6th special light emission mode → 7th special light emission mode → 8th special light emission mode → 9th special light emission mode → 10th special light emission mode → 11th special light emission mode.

Further, the timing at which the special light emission mode is switched is at one minute intervals until the tenth special light emission mode is reached. The timing of switching to the final 11th special light emission mode is when 10 seconds have elapsed since switching to the 10th special light emission mode. Note that since the special light emission effect continues to be executed without interruption, the special light emission effect according to the special light emission mode continues to be executed until the special light emission mode is switched to the next special light emission mode. Further, after switching to the 11th special light emission mode, the special light emission effect according to the 11th special light emission mode continues to be executed until the special effect ends.

The first special lighting mode consists of continuous white lighting at 10% brightness, the second special lighting mode consists of continuous white lighting at 20% brightness, and the third special lighting mode consists of continuous white lighting at 10% brightness. The fourth special lighting mode consists of continuous white lighting at 30% brightness, the fourth special lighting mode consists of continuous white lighting at 40% brightness, and the fifth special lighting mode consists of continuous white lighting at 50% brightness. The sixth special lighting mode consists of continuous white lighting at 60% brightness, the seventh special lighting mode consists of continuous white lighting at 70% brightness, and the eighth special lighting mode consists of continuous white lighting at 70% brightness. The light emission mode consists of continuous white lighting at 80% brightness, the 9th special light emission mode consists of continuous white lighting at 90% brightness, and the 10th special light emission mode consists of continuous white lighting at 100% brightness. The 11th special light emission mode consists of continuous white lighting at 100% brightness.

The first special light emission mode to the 11th special light emission mode have a common point that the emitted light color is white, but overall (in detail, the 10th special light emission mode and the 11th special light emission mode) As the order of the special light emitting effects (excluding the interval) progresses, the brightness increases as the elapsed contact release time progresses. This indicates that the brightness corresponds to the antibacterial and antiviral effects of the photocatalyst, and as the brightness increases, it suggests that the antibacterial and antiviral effects are increasing. In other words, it is indirectly suggested that the special light emission effect enhances the antibacterial and antiviral effects. Furthermore, among the special light emission modes, the first to ninth special light emission modes, the 11th special light emission mode, and the 10th special light emission mode are common in that the emitted light color is white. However, the mode of light emission is lighting in the former case, and blinking in the latter case. In this way, because the 10th special light emission mode is different from the other special light emission modes, the special light emission mode according to the 10th special light emission mode suggests that the antibacterial and antiviral effects have been completed. There is.

Additionally, special audio effects continue to be performed intermittently. Then, while the special audio performance is executed intermittently, the special audio performance mode is sequentially switched step by step. As shown in FIG. 59, the order of the special audio production modes is as follows: 1st special audio production mode → 2nd special audio production mode → 3rd special audio production mode → 4th special audio production mode → 5th special audio production mode → 6th special audio presentation mode → 7th special audio presentation mode → 8th special audio presentation mode → 9th special audio presentation mode → 10th special audio presentation mode.

The special audio performance is executed at one-minute intervals, and until the tenth special audio performance mode is reached, the timing at which the special audio performance is performed is also the timing at which the special audio performance mode is switched. Then, after switching to the final tenth special voice performance mode, the special voice performance mode is not switched, but the special voice performance in the tenth special voice performance mode continues to be repeatedly executed at one-minute intervals.

In addition, the first special audio production mode consists of a line by a predetermined character, ``The antibacterial and antiviral measures have just begun,'' and the second special audio production mode consists of the line by a predetermined character, ``The antibacterial and antiviral measures are just starting.'' The third special audio production mode consists of the line ``The road to antibacterial and antiviral completion is long'' by a predetermined character, and the fourth special voice production mode consists of the line ``Antibacterial and antiviral therapy'' by a predetermined character.・The fifth special voice production mode consists of the line ``This is the turning point until the antibacterial and antivirus completion is completed'' by a predetermined character, and the sixth special voice production mode consists of , consists of the line ``The antibacterial and antiviral work is nearing its end'' by a predetermined character, and the seventh special audio production mode consists of the line ``The antibacterial and antiviral work is nearing the end'' by a predetermined character, The 8th special audio production mode consists of a line by a predetermined character, ``The antibacterial/antiviral work is in its final stage,'' and the 9th special voice production mode consists of a line by a predetermined character, ``It's almost time for the antibacterial/antiviral work to be completed.'' The 10th special audio production mode consists of a line by a predetermined character: ``Antibacterial and antiviral protection complete. You can play with peace of mind.''

In this way, the first to tenth special audio production modes are composed of lines by predetermined characters, and the content of the lines is related to the progress status of antibacterial and antiviral effects. Moreover, it specifically suggests that the antibacterial and antiviral effects increase as the order of the special audio production modes progresses, in other words, as the elapsed contact release time progresses. In other words, it is directly suggested that the antibacterial and antiviral effects are enhanced by the special audio performance.

The special performance can be executed while waiting for customers. There are two cases in which a special performance is performed: a case in which the player enters a waiting state for a customer after contact with the handle 72k is released, and a case in which the contact with the handle 72k is released after entering a state in which the user waits for a customer. Here, a specific example of a case where a special performance is performed will be explained. Although the details will be described later, the production control microcomputer 121 directly controls the production of the special production, but one minute (60 seconds) has passed since the handle 72k was actually released (contact → non-contact). At that time, the pachinko game machine PY2 definitively determines that the handle 72k has been released, or in other words, determines that the player has finished playing (the player has left the pachinko game machine PY2). ), the performance control microcomputer 121 recognizes the release of the handle 72k at that time and starts the special performance. On the other hand, when 10 seconds have elapsed since the handle 72k was actually contacted (non-contact → contact), the pachinko game machine PY2 definitely determines that the handle 72k has been contacted, in other words, the player has stopped playing the game. The performance control microcomputer 121 recognizes the contact with the handle 72k at that time and ends the special performance. let In this way, the time that has passed since the handle 72k was actually released is different from the time that has passed since the production control microcomputer 121 recognized that the handle 72k was released, but the production control microcomputer 121 The contact release elapsed time is measured to represent the time elapsed since the handle 72k was actually released (contact→non-contact).

When the performance control microcomputer 121 enters the customer waiting state after recognizing the release of the handle 72k, since time has elapsed from the time when the production control microcomputer 121 recognizes the release of the handle 72k to the customer waiting state, the special performance cannot be started from the middle. become. Here, "on the way" means "with respect to the special performance mode, from a point corresponding to the elapsed contact release time when the special performance is in the customer waiting state". As mentioned above, the special light emitting effect is executed continuously, so the special light emitting effect is started in a special light emitting effect mode that is associated with the contact release elapsed time when transitioning to the customer waiting state. After the start of the special light emission performance, the special light emission performance mode is switched in accordance with the relationship between the contact release elapsed time and the special light emission performance mode shown in FIG. On the other hand, the special audio performance is executed intermittently, so if the timing of transitioning to the customer waiting state is during the elapsed contact release time when the special audio performance is executed, the special audio performance will not start immediately, and after that, the special audio When the first contact release elapsed time of the timing for performing the performance is reached, a special audio performance mode corresponding to the contact release elapsed time at that time is started. In addition, if the time when the state shifts to the customer waiting state is exactly the contact release elapsed time to execute the special audio performance, the special audio performance will be started in the special audio performance mode corresponding to the contact release elapsed time at that time. . After the start of the special audio performance, each time the contact release elapsed time comes, the special audio performance is performed in the special audio performance mode associated with the contact release elapsed time.

Here, a specific example of the transition of the special performance mode when the performance control microcomputer 121 is in a customer waiting state after grasping the release of the handle 72k will be explained. FIG. 60 shows the relationship between the contact release elapsed time, the gaming situation, and the special performance mode (special audio performance mode/special light emission mode) when the performance control microcomputer 121 grasps the release of the handle 72k and enters the customer waiting state. It is a time chart showing the relationship.

For example, when the special figure variation display is being displayed, the contact with the handle 72k is released, and then when the elapsed contact release time reaches 2 minutes and 30 seconds, the special figure variation display stops and the customer waits. Suppose that the state has changed to The performance control microcomputer 121 recognizes that the contact with the handle 72k has been released when the contact release elapsed time reaches 1 minute 00 seconds, so in this example, the special performance is started immediately after transitioning to the customer waiting state. will be started.

Since the contact release elapsed time when the state shifts to the customer waiting state is 2 minutes and 30 seconds, the special light emission performance is started in the second special light emission performance mode as the special performance. As mentioned above, the special light emission effect continues to be executed after it starts. Note that this timing is between the execution timing in the second special audio performance mode and the execution timing in the third special audio performance mode for the special audio performance, so the special audio performance is not executed at this time.

Then, when 30 seconds have passed since the transition to the customer waiting state and the contact release elapsed time has reached 3 minutes 00 seconds, the special light emission mode switches from the second special light emission mode to the third special light emission mode, A special audio performance is performed in the third special audio performance mode. After that, as long as the handle 72k is not touched, the special performance is developed according to the relationship between the contact release elapsed time and the special performance mode (special audio performance mode and special light emission mode) shown in FIG. However, when the performance control microcomputer 121 detects contact with the handle 72k while a special performance is being executed, at that point, in other words, when 10 seconds have passed since the handle 72k was actually touched. With that, the special performance ends. In the example shown in FIG. 60, it is set that the contact with the handle 72k is released when the contact elapsed time reaches 12 minutes and 30 seconds. Therefore, when the special effect ends, the special light emission effect is being executed in the eleventh special light emission effect mode.

On the other hand, if the performance control microcomputer 121 enters the customer waiting state before it recognizes the release of the handle 72k, the special performance will be executed from the beginning because it has already transitioned to the customer waiting state at the time of this recognition. Become. "First" here means "from the first special presentation mode at the beginning of the special presentation mode." Therefore, the special light emission effect is started in the first special effect mode. After the start of the special light emission performance, the special light emission performance mode is switched in accordance with the relationship between the contact release elapsed time and the special light emission performance mode shown in FIG. In addition, the timing at which the performance control microcomputer 121 grasps the release of the handle 72k is the contact release elapsed time "1 minute 00 seconds" when the special audio performance is executed, so the special audio performance is in the first special audio performance mode. executed. After the start of the special audio performance, each time the contact release elapsed time at which the special audio performance is executed comes, the special audio performance is executed in the special audio performance mode associated with the contact release elapsed time.

Here, a specific example of the transition of the special performance mode when the performance control microcomputer 121 enters the customer waiting state before grasping the release of the handle 72k will be explained. FIG. 61 shows the contact release elapsed time, the gaming situation, and the special performance mode (special audio performance mode/special light emission mode) when the microcomputer 121 for performance control enters the customer waiting state before grasping the release of the handle 72k. It is a time chart showing the relationship.

For example, assume that the handle 72k is actually released after 30 seconds have passed since the machine was in a customer waiting state. Then, when 1 minute 00 seconds have passed since then, the production control microcomputer 121 will know that the handle 72k has been released, so the special production will start when 1 minute 00 seconds have passed since the handle 72k was actually released. .

Since the contact release elapsed time when the special effect is started is 1 minute 00 seconds, the special light emission effect is started in the first special light emission effect mode as the special effect. As mentioned above, the special light emission effect continues to be executed after it starts. Moreover, since this timing is the execution timing for the special audio performance in the first special audio performance mode, the special audio performance is executed at this time.

Then, when 1 minute 00 seconds have passed since the start of the special effect and the elapsed contact release time has reached 2 minutes 00 seconds, the special light emission mode switches from the first special light emission mode to the second special light emission mode. , the special audio performance in the second special audio performance mode is executed. After that, as long as the handle 72k is not touched, the special performance is developed according to the relationship between the contact release elapsed time and the special performance mode (special audio performance mode and special light emission mode) shown in FIG. However, when the performance control microcomputer 121 detects contact with the handle 72k while the special performance is being executed, at that point, in other words, when 10 seconds have passed since the handle 72k was actually touched. , ends the special performance. In the example shown in FIG. 61, it is set that the contact with the handle 72k is released when the contact elapsed time reaches 12 minutes and 30 seconds. Therefore, when the special effect ends, the special light emission effect is being executed in the eleventh special light emission effect mode.

Next, an example of a process (special performance control process) for the pachinko gaming machine PY2 to execute a special performance will be explained. However, the processing contents may be changed as appropriate as long as the special effect can be finally executed.

In the second embodiment, the special performance control process includes a contact end determination process, a contact start determination process, and a special performance execution process. The contact end determination process and the contact start determination process are executed by the payout control board 170 and the game control board 100, and the special performance execution process is executed by the performance control board 120. In the second embodiment, a contact release elapsed time timer for measuring the contact release elapsed time is provided in a predetermined area of the performance RAM 124. Further, it is assumed that a table (special performance mode determination table) in which contact release elapsed time and special performance mode are associated with each other as shown in FIG. 59 is stored in the performance ROM 123.

First, the contact end determination process will be explained. As described above, the touch switch 72a can detect the player's contact with the handle 72k, and when the contact is detected, outputs a detection signal to the payout control board 170 via the release control circuit 175. The touch switch 72a continues to output a detection signal to the payout control board 170 while detecting contact with the handle 72k. In addition, below, the state in which the touch switch 72a is outputting a detection signal to the payout control board 170 may be referred to as "ON", and the state in which the touch switch 72a is not outputting a detection signal may be referred to as "OFF".

Then, as a contact end determination process, the payout control board 170 first determines whether the detection signal from the touch switch 72a has changed from ON to OFF. When the payout control board 170 determines that the detection signal is not OFF, it finishes the contact end determination process, and when it determines that the detection signal has turned OFF, it then waits for a predetermined period of time (second In the embodiment, it is determined whether 10 seconds) have elapsed. When the payout control board 170 determines that a predetermined period of time (60 seconds in the second embodiment) has not elapsed since the detection signal turned OFF, the payout control board 170 finishes the contact end determination process, and the payout control board 170 determines that the detection signal is turned OFF. When it is determined that a predetermined period of time (60 seconds in the second embodiment) has passed since the controller was turned off, a contact end designation command indicating that contact with the handle 72k has been released is sent to the game control board 100. do. Then, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not a contact end designation command has been received as a contact end determination process. If the game control microcomputer 101 determines that it has not received the contact end designation command, it completes the contact end determination process, and if it determines that it has received the contact end designation command, it then ensures that the handle 72k is not touched. A game end designation command is sent to the performance control board 120 indicating that the game has ended and the situation has become such that it can be determined (can be simulated) that the player has left the pachinko game machine PY2, and the contact end determination process is performed. finish. In the second embodiment, it is assumed that the contact end determination process by the game control microcomputer 101 is performed in other processes (S107) of the game control side timer interrupt process (S005).

Next, the contact start determination process will be explained. As the contact start determination process, the payout control board 170 first determines whether the detection signal from the touch switch 72a has changed from OFF to ON, contrary to the contact end determination process. When the payout control board 170 determines that the detection signal has not changed from OFF to ON, it finishes the contact start determination process, and when it determines that the detection signal has changed from OFF to ON, it then starts processing after the detection signal turns ON. It is determined whether a predetermined time (10 seconds in the second embodiment) has elapsed. When the payout control board 170 determines that a predetermined time (10 seconds in the second embodiment) has not elapsed since the detection signal was turned ON, the payout control board 170 finishes the contact start determination process, and the payout control board 170 determines that the detection signal is turned ON. When it is determined that a predetermined period of time (10 seconds in the second embodiment) has elapsed since it was turned on, a contact start designation command indicating that contact with the handle 72k has started is sent to the game control board 100. do. Then, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not a contact start designation command has been received as a contact start determination process. If the game control microcomputer 101 determines that it has not received the contact start designation command, it finishes the contact start determination process, and if it determines that it has received the contact start designation command, then it continues to ensure that the handle 72k is contacted. A game start designation command is sent to the production control board 120 indicating that the game has started and the situation has become such that it can be determined (can be simulated) that the player is seated on the pachinko machine PY2, and The start determination process ends. In the second embodiment, it is assumed that the contact start determination process by the game control microcomputer 101 is performed in other processes (S107) of the game control side timer interrupt process (S005).

Next, the special effect execution process will be explained. The special performance execution process includes a contact release elapsed time measurement process for measuring the contact release elapsed time related to the special performance, and a special performance that determines whether or not to start the special performance when the special performance is not being executed. A start determination process, a special performance mode control process for controlling the special performance mode during the execution of the special performance, and a special performance end determination process for determining whether to end the special performance during the execution of the special performance. include.

Note that the contact release elapsed time measurement process, special performance start determination process, special performance mode control process, and special performance end determination process are the received command analysis process (S4201) of the 10ms timer interrupt process (S4012) and the audio control process (S4202). ). In addition, in the special performance execution process, a contact release elapsed time measurement process is performed first, then a special performance start determination process is performed, then a special performance mode control process is performed, and finally a special performance ends. It is assumed that determination processing is performed.

First, the contact release elapsed time measurement process will be described. The production control microcomputer 121 first determines whether or not it has received the game end designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 101 as a contact release elapsed time measurement process. When the performance control microcomputer 121 determines that the game end designation command has been received, it starts measuring the contact release elapsed time. Specifically, at this point, 60 seconds (=1 minute 00 seconds) have passed since the handle 72k was actually released, so the production control microcomputer 121 sets the contact release elapsed time timer to 60 seconds (=1 minute 00 seconds). 1 minute 00 seconds) and completes the contact release elapsed time measurement process. When the contact release elapsed time timer is set to 60 seconds (=1 minute 00 seconds), the contact release elapsed time timer is updated as appropriate as time passes by the timer update process (S4104) of the 1ms timer interrupt process (S4011). shall be updated. On the other hand, when the performance control microcomputer 121 determines that it has not received the game end designation command, it next determines whether or not it has received the game start designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 101. If the performance control microcomputer 121 determines that the game start designation command has not been received, it immediately ends the contact release elapsed time measurement process, and if it determines that the game start designation command has been received, it ends the contact release elapsed time measurement process. After that, the contact release elapsed time measuring process ends. At the end of measuring the contact release elapsed time, the production control microcomputer 121 resets the contact release elapsed time timer (to 0 seconds). As a result, it is assumed that the contact release elapsed time timer is not updated by the timer update process (S4104) of the 1ms timer interrupt process (S4011). Note that when the special performance is not performed, the contact release elapsed time timer is maintained in a reset state (a state in which the contact release elapsed time indicated by the contact release elapsed time timer is 0 seconds).

Next, the special performance start determination process will be explained. As a special performance start determination process, the performance control microcomputer 121 first determines whether or not a special performance is being executed. As will be described later, when the special performance is started, a special performance execution flag indicating that the special performance is being executed is set in a predetermined area of the performance RAM 124. When the performance control microcomputer 121 determines that the special performance is being executed (the special performance execution flag is ON), it finishes the special performance start determination process, and determines that the special performance is not being performed (the special performance execution flag is ON). If it is determined that the controller is not ON (not ON), then the next step is to determine whether the controller is in a customer waiting state, in other words, whether a new special symbol fluctuation start command has not been received since the customer wait command was received. Determine.

If the performance control microcomputer 121 determines that the microcomputer 121 is not in a customer waiting state, it finishes the special performance start determination process, and if it determines that it is in a customer waiting state, then the contact release elapsed time is measured by the contact release elapsed time timer. (For example, the contact release elapsed time indicated by the contact release elapsed time timer≧1 minute 00 seconds). If the production control microcomputer 121 determines that the contact release elapsed time has not been measured by the contact release elapsed time timer, it finishes the special performance start determination process, and if it determines that the contact release elapsed time has been measured, the handle 72k has been released and is in a customer waiting state, the special performance execution flag is set in a predetermined area of the performance RAM 124, the special performance is started, and the special performance start process is completed. The performance control microcomputer 121 checks the contact release elapsed time using the contact release elapsed time timer, and starts the special performance according to the contact release elapsed time. Specifically, since the special light emitting effect is executed continuously, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs the special light emitting effect by emitting light from the frame lamp 53 in the special light emitting effect mode associated with the confirmed contact release elapsed time. Start. In addition, since the special audio performance is executed intermittently, the performance control microcomputer 121 will release the contact if the confirmed contact release elapsed time is the contact release elapsed time associated with the execution timing of the special audio performance. The special audio performance is executed by outputting the audio in the special audio mode associated with the elapsed time from the speaker 52, and the confirmed contact release elapsed time is the contact release elapsed time associated with the execution timing of the special audio performance. If not, the special audio performance will not be executed.

Note that if the handle 72k is released before entering the customer waiting state, the contact release elapsed time has already been measured when the customer waiting state is entered, so the "contact release time" is However, if the handle 72k is released after entering the customer waiting state, the contact release elapsed time measurement process executed immediately before the special performance start determination process Since the contact release elapsed time timer is set to 60 seconds, in this case as well, after it is determined that the customer is waiting, it is determined that the "contact release elapsed time is being measured".

Next, special performance mode control processing will be explained. For example, the performance control microcomputer 121 determines whether a special performance is being executed. When the performance control microcomputer 121 determines that the special performance is not being executed (the special performance execution flag is not ON), it finishes the special performance mode control process and determines that the special performance is being executed (the special performance execution flag is not ON). If it is determined that the special performance mode is being executed), then the special performance mode is controlled based on the special performance mode determination table. For example, the production control microcomputer 121 checks the contact release elapsed time indicated by the contact release elapsed time timer, and determines whether the contact release elapsed time is the timing to switch the special light emission production mode or the timing to execute the special sound production. confirm.

If the contact release elapsed time is the timing to switch the special light emission mode, the effect control microcomputer 121 causes the frame lamp 53 to emit light in the new special light emission mode after switching. When the performance control microcomputer 121 switches to a special light emission performance mode other than the final one, it continues to cause the frame lamp 53 to emit light in that special light emission performance mode until it is time to switch the next special light emission performance mode. Furthermore, once the performance control microcomputer 121 switches to the final special light emission performance mode, it continues to cause the frame lamp 53 to emit light in the special light emission performance mode until the special performance ends.

Furthermore, if the contact release elapsed time indicated by the contact release elapsed time timer is the execution timing of the special audio production, the production control microcomputer 121 transmits the sound of the special audio production mode associated with the contact release elapsed time to the speaker. output from 52.

Next, the special performance end determination process will be explained. The performance control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not a special performance is being executed as a special performance end determination process. When the performance control microcomputer 121 determines that the special performance is not being executed (the special performance execution flag is not ON), it finishes the special performance end determination process and determines that the special performance is being executed (the special performance execution flag is not ON). If it is determined that the game control microcomputer 101 has received the game start designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 101, it is then determined. If the performance control microcomputer 121 determines that the game start designation command has not been received, it completes the special performance end determination process, and if it determines that the game start designation command has been received, it turns off the special performance execution flag and starts the special performance. terminate. Specifically, the performance control microcomputer 121 turns off the frame lamp 53 for the special light emission performance. Also, since special audio effects are executed at 1-minute intervals, it is unlikely that the special audio effects are being executed at this timing, but even if the special audio effects happen to be executed (spotwise), the production control The microcomputer 121 does not terminate the special audio performance. To execute a special voice performance to the end without stopping it even if the special voice performance is being executed at that moment.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY2, the handle 72k coated with a material containing a photocatalyst that exhibits antibacterial and antiviral infection prevention effects against bacteria and viruses by absorbing light is activated for a predetermined period of time. In the second embodiment, the game by the player ends based on the fact that the handle 72k is released (60 seconds in the second embodiment), or in other words, the contact with the handle 72k is no longer detected for a predetermined period of time (in the second embodiment, 60 seconds). , it is determined (hypothetically) that the player has left the pachinko machine PY2, and the progress of the antibacterial and antiviral effects (antibacterial and antiviral effects Since a special effect suggesting predetermined matters concerning the game is executed, it is possible to give the player a sense of security about preventing infection with bacteria or viruses. Furthermore, since the special performance includes lines by a predetermined character related to the motif related to the pachinko game machine PY2, it is possible to prevent players from becoming bored even until the antibacterial and antiviral effects appear.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko game machine PY2, the time that has passed since the handle 72k was released (the time that has passed since contact with the handle 72k was no longer detected) is the first time (for example, 3 minutes 00 seconds). In this case, the special effect is executed in the first mode associated with that time (in the case of a special voice effect, the third special voice effect mode; in the case of a special light emission effect, the third special light emission mode), and the handle 72k is If the time that has passed since the handle 72k was released (the time that has passed since contact with the handle 72k was no longer detected) is a second time (for example, 8 minutes 00 seconds) that is different from the first time, the special effect is Since it is executed in the second mode (in the case of a special sound production, the 8th special sound production mode, in the case of a special light emission production, the 8th special light emission mode) associated with the time different from the mode, antibacterial and antibacterial It becomes easier to understand the progress of the virus effect, and it is possible to prevent players from becoming bored. Furthermore, since the special performance is executed while the player is waiting for the special figure variable display, the jackpot game, and the small win game to be executed, the special performance is executed for the player who is playing the pachinko game machine PY2. This can prevent the performance effect of the special performance from deteriorating. Furthermore, in the pachinko game machine, based on the fact that the handle 72k that the player touches most frequently is released, or in other words, that contact with the handle 72k is no longer detected, the game by the player ends and the pachinko game machine Since it is determined (hypothetically) that it has separated from PY2, it is possible to effectively achieve antibacterial and antiviral effects.

(Example of modification of second embodiment)
Next, a modification example of the pachinko gaming machine PY2 according to the second embodiment will be described. Note that it is also possible to appropriately combine the modification examples described below.

In the second embodiment, when 60 seconds have elapsed since the detection signal from the touch switch 72a turned from ON to OFF, in other words, when 60 seconds have elapsed since contact with the handle 72k was released, the special effect can be executed. However, this elapsed time may be changed as appropriate. Alternatively, the special performance may be made executable when the detection signal from the touch switch 72a changes from ON to OFF, in other words, when the handle 72k is released from contact.

In addition, in the second embodiment, the special effect ends when 10 seconds have passed since the detection signal from the touch switch 72a turned from OFF to ON, or in other words, when 10 seconds have passed since the touch on the handle 72k started. However, this elapsed time may be changed as appropriate. Alternatively, the special performance may end when the detection signal from the touch switch 72a changes from OFF to ON, in other words, when the touch on the handle 72k starts.

Furthermore, the specific value of the contact release elapsed time associated with the switching timing of the special light emission production mode and the execution timing of the special audio production, and the type of contact release elapsed time are not limited to the second embodiment, and may be changed as appropriate. It's okay. Further, in the second embodiment, the switching timing of the special light emission effect mode and the execution timing of the special audio effect are almost the same, but they may be partially or completely different. For example, the special sound performance may be performed at a timing when the special light emission performance mode is not switched.

Further, in the second embodiment, the time interval at which the special audio performance is executed is one minute, but this time interval is not particularly limited and may be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, there may be two or more types of time intervals at which the special audio effects are performed. The time interval at which special audio effects are executed may become shorter as the contact release elapsed time becomes longer. Conversely, the time interval at which the special audio performance is performed may become longer as the contact release elapsed time becomes longer.

Further, in the second embodiment, the special sound effect is executed intermittently, but it may be continuously executed until the special effect ends, like a special light emission effect. In this case, the special audio production is not the dialogue of a predetermined character, but is composed of, for example, BGM that tends to give a soothing and clean impression, sets multiple timings for switching the volume, and sets the elapsed contact release time. The volume may be increased as the length increases. On the other hand, the special audio production may consist of, for example, BGM that tends to create a dangerous impression, set multiple timings for switching the volume, and the volume may become lower as the elapsed contact release time increases. .

Further, in the second embodiment, most of the time intervals at which the special light emission mode changes are one minute, but this is not particularly limited and may be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, there may be three or more types of time intervals at which the special light emission mode is switched. The time interval at which the special light emission mode changes may become shorter as the contact release elapsed time becomes longer. On the contrary, the time interval at which the special light emission mode is switched may become longer as the contact release elapsed time becomes longer.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, the special light emitting effect continues to be executed until the special effect ends, but for example, the execution timing related to each special light emitting effect mode and the effect time corresponding to each execution timing are set. The process may be executed intermittently or intermittently, with periods in which it is not executed.

In addition, in the second embodiment, information regarding antibacterial and antiviral effects, specifically, the fact that the antibacterial and antiviral effects are gradually increasing, is reported through the special audio production. Instead of, or in addition to, information regarding antibacterial and antiviral effects may be specifically notified by displaying (special display effect) a predetermined image (special display effect image) on the display section 50a. In this case, lines indicating that the antibacterial/antiviral effect is gradually increasing may be displayed at predetermined time intervals, such as a special audio production. Alternatively, although the special display performance can be executed continuously like the special light emission performance, the display contents may be changed at predetermined time intervals. In addition, as a special display effect, an image that tends to give a soothing and clean impression is first displayed on the display section 50a, and the number of images is gradually or stepwise increased as time passes. You can do it like this. As a special display effect, an image that tends to create a dangerous impression is first displayed on the entire screen of the display section 50a, and the image is gradually or stepwise reduced as time passes. You can also do it.

Further, in the second embodiment, the touch switch 72a is not connected to the game control board 100, but the touch switch 72a is connected to the game control board 100, and the game control board 100 receives the detection from the touch switch 72a. The game control microcomputer 101 may be configured to be able to input signals, and may send a game end designation command and a game start designation command to the production control board 120 based on the detection signal from the touch switch 72a. Alternatively, the touch switch 72a is connected to the production control board 120, the production control board 120 is configured to be able to input the detection signal from the touch switch 72a, and the production control microcomputer 121 receives the detection signal from the touch switch 72a. Based on this, it may be determined whether contact with the handle 72k has ended or started.

Furthermore, the pachinko gaming machine PY2 is configured to be able to detect the presence of a player seated in front of the pachinko gaming machine PY2, and if there is a player, outputs a detection signal indicating the presence of the player. A sensor may be installed to perform a special performance based on a detection signal from the sensor.

In addition, in the second embodiment, the special audio performance is composed of lines by a predetermined character. The characters may be composed of rare characters or popular characters that rarely or never appear in performances related to games such as performances corresponding to games. As a result, it is possible to improve the effect of the special performance and to reduce boredom while antibacterial and antiviral treatment is being performed by the photocatalyst.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, the special performance is performed regardless of the player's intention, but the special performance may be performed by, for example, predetermined operation of the first performance button 40k. In this case, as in the case described above, when it is deemed that the contact with the handle 72k has been released and the game has ended, the performance control microcomputer 121 measures the contact release elapsed time and presses the first performance button 40k to a predetermined position. A special performance mode may be specified based on the contact release elapsed time when the touch screen is operated, and a special performance based on the specific performance mode may be executed.

In addition, in the second embodiment, the surface of the front door 23, the surface of the upper tray 34, the surface of the lower tray 35, the surface of the handle 72k, the surface of the first performance button 40k, and the surface of the second performance button 41k of the pachinko gaming machine PY2. Although the surface of the device is coated with a predetermined material having antibacterial and antiviral effects, the portions coated with the predetermined material may be changed as appropriate. However, from the viewpoint of antibacterial and antiviral effects, it is preferable that a predetermined material be coated on areas frequently touched by the player, such as the handle 72k, the surface of the first effect button 40k, and the surface of the second effect button 41k. Furthermore, specific parts of the pachinko machine PY2 are coated with a predetermined material that has antibacterial and antiviral effects. The product is coated with a material that exhibits an infection prevention effect against bacteria or viruses, such as sterilization that removes and reduces the number of bacteria, sterilization that kills bacteria, or sterilization that brings the number of microorganisms such as bacteria and viruses as close to zero as possible. Also good.

<Third embodiment>
Next, a third embodiment of the present invention will be described based on the basic embodiment of the present invention described above. Note that the same reference numerals and terms are used for the same configurations as those in the basic embodiment or similarly corresponding configurations.

First, a configuration for the pachinko gaming machine PY3 according to the third embodiment to display variable special figures will be described. The game control microcomputer 101 of the pachinko game machine PY3 uses special symbol random numbers to determine a jackpot, and as random numbers for determining a jackpot, there is a random number for initial value update in addition to the special symbol random number. The random number for initial value update is the initial value of the special symbol random number counter that can be changed when the counter (special symbol random number counter) related to the special symbol random number goes around (or once) in the numerical range. The special symbol random number counter continues to be updated one by one from the initial value until it reaches the next initial value, and then when it reaches the initial value, the initial value is changed, and the initial value after the change becomes the new initial value. , the special symbol random number counter continues to be updated until it reaches its new initial value again. Such a cycle in the numerical value range of the special symbol random number counter and the change of the initial value continue to be performed repeatedly. Since the initial value is changed every time the value indicated by the special symbol random number counter (special symbol random number counter value) goes around from a certain initial value, the irregularity of the special symbol random number is improved. That is, the initial value update random number is used to randomly change the initial value related to one round of this special symbol random number. In the third embodiment, the gaming RAM 104 is provided with an initial value updating random number counter as means for generating initial value updating random numbers on a program using software, similar to the special symbol random number counter.

The initial value update random number counter is also configured to return to the minimum value (loop) after going around the numerical value range, similarly to the special symbol random number counter. In the third embodiment, the range of the initial value update random number is the same as the special symbol random number. However, the range of the initial value update random number may be narrower than the special symbol random number. In a pattern narrower than the special symbol random number, the minimum value of the initial value update random number and the minimum value of the special symbol random number are the same, but the maximum value of the initial value update random number is smaller than the maximum value of the special symbol random number. A small pattern, a pattern in which the maximum value of the initial value update random number and the maximum value of the special symbol random number are the same, but the minimum value of the initial value update random number is larger than the minimum value of the special symbol random number, and the initial value update There is a pattern in which the minimum value of the random number for use is larger than the minimum value of the special symbol random number, and the maximum value of the random number for initial value update is smaller than the maximum value of the special symbol random number.

Further, the gaming RAM 104 is provided with an initial value storage area (not shown). The initial value storage area is for storing an initial value that becomes the starting point of one round regarding the special symbol random number counter value at that time.

The game control microcomputer 101 performs normal symbol/special symbol main random number update processing (S003) of the gaming control main process, and normal symbol/special symbol main random number update processing (S103) of the game control side timer interrupt processing (S005). Update the special symbol random number counter (add "1"). Then, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not the updated new special symbol random number counter value is the same as the initial value stored in the initial value storage area, and the updated special symbol random number counter value and If it is determined that the initial value stored in the initial value storage area is the same, it means that the special symbol random number counter has completed one cycle, so the value indicated by the initial value update random number counter at that time (initial value update random number The counter value) is read out and set in the special symbol random number counter as an initial value that will be a new base point for the next round, and is also stored in the initial value storage area of the gaming RAM 104. At this time, the initial value update random number counter value is set to the special symbol random number counter, so that the initial value constituting the base point of one round related to the special symbol random number counter is updated. Furthermore, since the initial value update random number counter value is stored in the initial value storage area, the game control microcomputer 101 can determine whether or not the special symbol random number counter has completed one cycle. The updating of the initial value for the special symbol random number when the special symbol random number counter completes one cycle and the storage of the random number counter value for initial value update in the initial value storage area are repeated in the same manner thereafter. In addition, the game control microcomputer 101 updates the initial value update random number in the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process of S003 of the game control main process. Specifically, "1" is added to the counter value of the initial value update random number counter.

In addition, the number of times the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S003) is executed from one game control side timer interrupt process (S005) to the next game control side timer interrupt process (S005) is determined by the game It changes depending on the clock frequency of the CPU 102 and the contents of various minimum unit processes performed in a certain game control side timer interrupt process (S005). For example, it is assumed that the gaming CPU 102 can perform various types of processing in minimum units of about 10 microseconds (μs). Further, for example, the game control microcomputer 101 may be configured such that the special symbol random number counter goes around the numerical value range in about 0.5 seconds to 1.5 seconds. However, the desired time required for the special symbol random number counter to go around the numerical range may be set as appropriate.

Further, the gaming control microcomputer 101 sets the initial value storage area to "0" when the gaming RAM 104 is cleared (initialized, reset) by a specific operation of the RAM clear switch 192. That is, when the gaming RAM 104 is cleared, the initial value of the special symbol random number counter becomes "0". Further, when the gaming RAM 104 is cleared by specific operation of the RAM clear switch 192, the gaming control microcomputer 101 sets the special symbol random number counter value and the initial value update random number counter value to "0".

Next, effects using initial values in the third embodiment will be explained. As mentioned above, the initial value that serves as the base point for one round (loop) of the special symbol random number counter is stored in the initial value storage area provided in the gaming RAM 104, but the initial value at a certain point in time (first point in time), The fact that the initial value at another time point (second time point) is the same after that means that the initial value for the special symbol random number has not been updated between the first time point and the second time point. In other words, it can be said that the special symbol random number counter value at the first time point and the special symbol random number counter value at the second time point belong to the same round of the special symbol random number counter. Below, the fact that the special symbol random number counter goes around once is referred to as a "special symbol random number cycle", and the fact that a plurality of points in time are within the same special symbol random number cycle is sometimes referred to as a "special symbol random number identical cycle".

By the way, as mentioned above, special symbol random number determination values are assigned to the jackpot determination table so as to have a predetermined probability of winning the jackpot. For example, in the jackpot determination table of FIG. 10(A), 220 special symbol random number determination values are assigned, and in the jackpot determination table of FIG. 10(B), 1500 special symbol random number determination values are assigned. . Therefore, in one jackpot determination based on the jackpot determination table in FIG. 10(A), the probability of winning the jackpot is 220/65536, and in one jackpot determination based on the jackpot determination table in FIG. 10(B), the probability is 1500/65536. You will win the jackpot with a probability of However, if the jackpot determination for two or more specific numbers of special symbol reservations that occur in the same period of special symbol random numbers is performed based on the jackpot determination table in FIG. The probability of winning a jackpot is higher than when the jackpot judgment is performed a specific number of times not in the same special symbol random number cycle based on the jackpot judgment table of FIG. 10(A). Similarly, if the jackpot determination for two or more specific numbers of special symbol reservations that occur in the same period of special symbol random numbers is performed based on the jackpot determination table in FIG. The probability of winning a jackpot is higher than when jackpot judgments are made a specific number of times that do not have the same period of special symbol random numbers based on the jackpot judgment table of FIG. 10(B). Therefore, in the third embodiment, as a preview performance to create a sense of expectation for a jackpot rather than a preview performance based on one single special symbol reservation, we provide a preview performance based on multiple special symbol reservations that occur in the same period of special symbol random numbers. and execute one cohesive special performance.

The performance content of the special performance is not particularly limited and can be set as appropriate, but in the third embodiment, the reservation icon ( Same cycle pending icon). Specifically, an image (special effect image) G30 associated with a special effect, which will be described later, is displayed superimposed on the same period hold icon. The display content of the special effect image G30 is not particularly limited and can be set as appropriate, but it is composed of an effect image that makes the hold icon that is the target of the special effect appear to be shining.

In addition, in the third embodiment, the special performance can be executed for both the same cycle special figure reservation based on winnings in the first starting hole 11 and the same cycle special figure holding based on winnings in the second starting hole 12. It is. And, what are the performance contents of the special performance related to the same cycle special figure reservation based on the prize winning in the first starting gate 11 and the performance content of the special performance related to the same cycle special figure reservation based on the winning in the second starting gate 12? are the same. However, the performance content of the special performance related to the same cycle special chart reservation based on the winning at the first starting gate 11 and the performance content of the special performance related to the same cycle special chart reservation based on the winning at the second starting gate 12 are different. You can do it differently.

Furthermore, in the third embodiment, the special performance can be executed in the normal game state and normal performance mode, the high probability high base game state and variable probability performance mode, and the low probability high base game state and time saving performance mode. The performance contents of the special performance are the same in any game state and performance mode. However, the performance contents of the special performance may be made to differ depending on the game state and performance mode.

Next, an example of a process (special performance control process) for the pachinko game machine PY3 to execute a special performance will be explained. However, the processing contents of the special performance control process are not particularly limited, and may be changed as appropriate within a range that allows the special performance to be finally executed.

For example, the game control microcomputer 101 checks the initial value stored in the initial value storage area (or (read out the random number counter value for initial value update), and in the storage process (S213) of the special figure 2 related judgment information, associate the initial value (random number counter value for initial value update) with the special figure 2 pending. In other words, it is stored together with the acquired special figure 2 related determination information in a storage area according to the current number of special figure 2 reservations in the special figure 2 reservation storage section 105b.

Furthermore, when the game control microcomputer 101 stores the initial value in the special figure 2 reservation storage section 105b, it determines whether or not there is another special figure 2 reservation that occurred earlier, in other words, the stored initial value. It is determined whether the reservation order of the special figure 2 reservation corresponding to the value is one of 2 to 4. Here, if the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the reservation order is not one of 2 to 4, in other words, the reservation order is 1, the special symbol 2 reservation that can be the beginning of the special symbol random number same cycle related to the special effect. (same cycle first special figure 2 pending) is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104. The reason why it is "possible" here is that the initial value related to the special pattern 2 reservation that occurs after the special pattern 2 reservation may be different from the initial value related to the special pattern 2 reservation. On the other hand, when the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the reservation order is any one of 2 to 4, the game control microcomputer 101 sets the initial value (previous initial value) related to the special figure 2 reservation in the previous reservation order and the special figure 2 in the previous reservation order. It is determined whether the initial values related to suspension (target initial values) are the same. When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the previous initial value and the target initial value are the same, it determines that the subsequent special figure 2 is pending within the same cycle of special symbol random numbers (same cycle subsequent special figure 2 pending). The same cycle subsequent special figure 2 reservation designation command shown in the table is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104. In addition, in this case, for the same cycle subsequent special figure 2 pending, the special symbol random number 2 that occurred earlier in the same cycle is the same cycle first special figure 2 pending, and the same cycle subsequent special Figure 2: There are cases where it is on hold. Therefore, there is a possibility that there are a plurality of subsequent special drawing 2 reservations in the same cycle. On the other hand, if the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the previous initial value and the target initial value are not the same, it sets the same period first special figure 2 reservation designation command in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104. Although the reservation order of the special figure 2 reservation is 2 to 4, this is because it is the first special symbol 2 reservation that occurs in the same period of the special symbol random number related to the initial value of the special symbol 2 reservation.

In addition, the game control microcomputer 101 checks the initial value stored in the initial value storage area (or read out the random number counter value for initial value update), and in the storage process (S220) of the special figure 1 related judgment information, associate the initial value (random number counter value for initial value update) with the special figure 1 pending. In other words, it is stored together with the acquired special figure 1 related determination information in a storage area according to the current number of special figure 1 reservations in the special figure 1 reservation storage section 105a.

Furthermore, when the game control microcomputer 101 stores the initial value in the special figure 1 reservation storage section 105a, it determines whether or not there is another special figure 1 reservation that occurred earlier, in other words, the stored initial value. It is determined whether the reservation order of the special figure 1 reservation corresponding to the value is one of 2 to 4. Here, if the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the reservation order is not one of 2 to 4, in other words, the reservation order is 1, the special symbol 1 reservation that can be the beginning of the same period of special symbol random numbers related to special effects. (same cycle first special figure 1 pending) is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104. The reason why it is "possible" here is that the initial value related to the special pattern 1 reservation that occurs after the special pattern 1 reservation may be different from the initial value related to the special pattern 1 reservation. On the other hand, when the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the reservation order is any one of 2 to 4, the game control microcomputer 101 sets the initial value (previous initial value) related to the special figure 1 reservation in the previous reservation order and the special figure 1 in the previous reservation order. It is determined whether the initial values related to suspension (target initial values) are the same. When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the previous initial value and the target initial value are the same, it determines that the subsequent special figure 1 is pending in the same cycle of special symbol random numbers (same cycle subsequent special figure 1 pending). The same cycle subsequent special figure 1 reservation designation command shown in FIG. 1 is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104. In addition, in this case, for the same cycle subsequent special figure 1 hold, the special figure 1 hold that occurred earlier in the same cycle with the special symbol random number is the same cycle first special figure 1 hold, and the same cycle subsequent special figure. Figure 1 may be on hold. Therefore, there is a possibility that there are a plurality of subsequent special drawing 1 reservations in the same cycle. On the other hand, if the gaming control microcomputer 101 determines that the previous initial value and the target initial value are not the same, it sets the same period first special figure 1 reservation designation command in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104. This is because the reservation order of the special figure 1 reservation is 2 to 4, but it is the first special symbol 1 reservation that occurs in the same period of the special symbol random number related to the initial value of the special symbol 1 reservation.

In addition, the same period leading special drawing 2 reservation and the same period leading special drawing 1 reservation are different in that the trigger for the occurrence is a winning in the first starting opening 11 or a winning in the second starting opening 12. , Special symbols related to special effects Random numbers Since they have the same point that they can be the beginning of the same cycle, the same cycle first special figure 2 reservation and the same cycle first special figure 1 reservation can be combined as "same cycle first special figure reservation". to be called. In addition, the same period subsequent special drawing 2 reservation and the same period subsequent special drawing 1 reservation are different in that the trigger of occurrence is a winning in the first starting opening 11 or a winning in the second starting opening 12. , special symbol random number Since they are common in that they are subsequent in the same cycle, the same cycle subsequent special figure 2 reservation and the same cycle subsequent special figure 1 reservation are collectively referred to as "same cycle subsequent special figure reservation" .

Here, the same cycle first special figure reservation and the same cycle subsequent special figure reservation will be explained. As mentioned above, special effects may be executed for multiple special pattern reservations that occur in the same special pattern random number cycle, but at the time a certain special pattern reservation occurs, the previous special pattern reservation exists. , If the initial value of the previous special figure reservation is different from the initial value of the special figure reservation, the special figure reservation is the first special figure reservation among the special figure reservations related to the special performance. become. On the contrary, when a certain special pattern reservation occurs, there is a special pattern reservation that occurred earlier, and the initial value of the previous special pattern reservation is the same as the initial value of the special pattern reservation. If so, the special figure reservation becomes the subsequent special figure reservation among the special figure reservations related to the special performance. Therefore, the former special pattern reservation (first special pattern reservation in the same cycle) is positioned as the first special pattern reservation in the same cycle of special symbol random numbers, and the latter special pattern reservation (same cycle subsequent special pattern reservation) is special. It is positioned as a subsequent special symbol pending in the same pattern random number cycle. In addition, if there is no other special symbol reservation when a certain special symbol reservation occurs, in other words, if the reservation order related to the special symbol reservation is 1, after the occurrence, the special symbol random number same period Since there is a possibility that a special figure reservation may occur, the special figure reservation in the reservation order "1" is necessarily positioned as the first special figure reservation in the same cycle.

In addition, the same cycle leading special figure 2 reservation designation command and the same cycle subsequent special figure 2 reservation designation command are used to specify the special figure 2 related determination information and initial value immediately after the second look-ahead determination process (S212) is performed. Since it is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 in the process of storing it in the second hold storage unit 105b (S213), it will be sent to the performance control board 120 at the same timing as the second start winning command. Similarly, the same cycle first special figure 1 reservation designation command and the same cycle subsequent special figure 1 reservation designation command also specify the special figure 1 related determination information and initial value immediately after the first look-ahead determination process (S219) is performed. Since it is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 in the process of storing it in the pending storage section 105a (S220) in FIG. .

When the performance control microcomputer 121 receives the same cycle first special figure 2 reservation designation command and the same cycle subsequent special figure 2 reservation designation command, for example, in the received command analysis process (S4201), the performance control microcomputer 121 appropriately selects the same cycle first special figure. It is stored in the starting winning command storage area 125 in association with the second starting winning command that has been transmitted together with the second holding specification command and the same cycle subsequent special drawing 2 holding specification command. Similarly, when the performance control microcomputer 121 receives the same cycle leading special figure 1 reservation designation command and the same cycle subsequent special figure 1 reservation designation command, the same cycle leading special figure 1 reservation designation command and the same cycle subsequent special It is stored in the starting winning command storage area 125 in association with the first starting winning command transmitted together with the hold designation command shown in FIG.

In addition, in order to execute the special performance, the production control microcomputer 121 receives the same cycle first special figure 2 reservation designation command and the same cycle subsequent special figure 2 reservation designation command, and the same cycle first special figure 1 reservation. Basically, in the case of receiving the specified command and the same cycle subsequent special figure 1 reservation designation command, that is, in the case of special effects related to special figure 1 reserve and in the case of special effects related to special figure 2 reserve. Perform the same processing. Therefore, in the following, the same cycle first special figure 2 reservation designation command and the same cycle first special figure 1 reservation designation command are collectively referred to as the "same cycle first special figure reservation designation command", and the same cycle subsequent special figure 2 reservation designation command and the same cycle subsequent special figure 1 reservation designation command will be collectively referred to as the "same cycle subsequent special figure reservation designation command" and will be explained together without distinguishing the types of special figures.

When the performance control microcomputer 121 receives the same cycle subsequent special figure reservation designation command, it determines whether another same cycle special figure reservation designation command is already stored. When the performance control microcomputer 121 determines that another same-period special figure reservation designation command is not stored, it finishes the processing related to the special performance, and when it determines that another same-cycle special figure reservation designation command is stored, It is determined whether the same cycle special figure reservation designation command associated with the special figure reservation in the previous reservation order is the same cycle top special figure reservation designation command. When the performance control microcomputer 121 determines that it is the same period top special figure reservation designation command, it performs a special performance execution determination to determine whether or not to execute the special performance.

The special performance execution determination is executed with reference to the special performance execution determination table. The special performance execution determination table is divided into the case of special performance execution determination related to special figure 1 reservation and the case of special performance execution determination related to special figure 2 reservation. Examples of the structure of the special performance execution determination table are shown in FIGS. 62(A) and 62(B). As shown in FIGS. 62(A) and 62(B), the special effect execution determination table includes a special effect execution determination table (first special effect execution determination table) related to special figure 1 and a special effect execution determination table related to special figure 2. There is a special performance execution determination table (second special performance execution determination table). Both the first special performance execution determination table and the second special performance execution determination table are associated with special figure fluctuation pattern information (special figure fluctuation pattern) which is a pre-read determination result.

As the first special performance execution determination table, the first special performance execution determination table (jackpot first special performance execution determination table) corresponds to SP jackpot fluctuations and L jackpot fluctuations, corresponds to SP loss fluctuations, and L loss fluctuations. The attached first special performance execution determination table (high expectation loss first special performance execution determination table), and the first special performance execution determination table (low expectation loss first special performance execution determination table) associated with the N reach loss variation and normal loss variation There is a first special performance execution determination table). On the other hand, the second special performance execution determination table includes a second special performance execution determination table associated with battle jackpot fluctuations (jackpot second special performance execution determination table), and a second special performance execution determination table associated with battle loss fluctuations. A determination table (high expectation loss second special performance execution determination table), and a second special performance execution determination table (low expectation loss second special performance execution determination table) that is associated with the reach/gasp loss variation and the shortened loss variation ).

The performance control microcomputer 121 determines which special performance execution determination table is to be used by starting winnings that are associated with each of the same cycle first special figure reservation designation command and the same cycle subsequent special figure reservation designation command. Check the pre-reading determination results (first pre-reading determination result, second pre-reading determination result) indicated by the commands (first starting winning command, second starting winning command).

Then, when the performance control microcomputer 121 determines whether to execute a special performance related to the special figure 1, if there is a result indicating SP jackpot fluctuation or L jackpot fluctuation in the first look-ahead determination result, the performance control microcomputer 121 performs the jackpot first special performance. Select the execution judgment table, and even if there is no SP jackpot variation or L jackpot variation in the first look-ahead judgment result, if there is one that indicates SP loss variation or L loss variation, the high expectation loss number is selected. 1. Select the special performance execution determination table, and if there is no one indicating SP jackpot fluctuation or L jackpot fluctuation, or one indicating SP loss fluctuation or L loss fluctuation in the first look-ahead determination result, the expectation level is low. Select the loss first special performance execution determination table.

In addition, in the case of special performance execution determination related to special figure 2, the performance control microcomputer 121 selects the jackpot second special performance execution determination table if there is one that indicates a battle jackpot fluctuation in the second look-ahead determination result. However, if there is nothing in the second look-ahead judgment result that indicates a battle jackpot change, but there is something that shows a battle loss change, select the high expectation loss second special performance execution judgment table, and select the second look-ahead judgment result. If there is neither one indicating a battle jackpot fluctuation nor one indicating a battle loss fluctuation in the table, the low expectation loss second special performance execution determination table is selected.

Each special performance execution determination table is configured such that the selection rate for executing the special performance and not performing the special performance becomes a predetermined selection rate shown in FIGS. 62(A) and 62(B). It is configured appropriately.

When the performance control microcomputer 121 executes the special performance execution determination, it next determines whether the determination result is "execute special performance", and if the determination result is "do not perform special performance", After completing the processing related to the special performance, if the determination result is "Execute the special performance", the command is then associated with the same cycle first special figure reservation designation command and the same cycle subsequent special figure reservation designation command. Based on the look-ahead judgment results (first look-ahead judgment result, second look-ahead judgment result) indicated by the start-up winning command (first start-up winning command, second start-up winning command), determine the performance mode of the special performance (special performance mode) Executes special performance mode determination. Note that the specific content of the special presentation mode can be set as appropriate, but in the third embodiment, it is associated with a color. In the third embodiment, the special presentation modes include a first special presentation mode associated with white, a second special presentation mode associated with green, a third special presentation mode associated with red, and There is a fourth special performance mode associated with the color gold.

The special performance mode determination is executed with reference to the special performance mode determination table. The special performance mode determination table is divided into the case of special performance mode determination related to special figure 1 reservation and the case of special performance mode determination related to special figure 2 reservation. Examples of the structure of the special performance mode determination table are shown in FIGS. 62(C) and 62(D). As shown in FIGS. 62(C) and 62(D), the special effect mode determination table includes a special effect mode determination table (first special effect mode determination table) related to special figure 1, and a special effect mode determination table related to special figure 2. There is a special performance execution determination table (second special performance mode determination table). Both the first special performance mode determination table and the second special performance mode determination table are associated with the special symbol variation pattern.

As the first special performance mode determination table, the first special performance mode determination table (jackpot first special performance mode determination table) corresponds to SP jackpot fluctuations and L jackpot fluctuations, corresponds to SP loss fluctuations, and L loss fluctuations. The attached first special presentation mode judgment table (high expectation loss first special presentation mode judgment table), and the first special presentation mode judgment table (low expectation loss first special presentation mode judgment table) associated with the N reach loss variation and normal loss variation There is a first special performance mode determination table). On the other hand, the second special performance mode determination table includes a second special performance mode determination table (jackpot second special performance mode determination table) that is associated with battle jackpot fluctuations, and a second special performance mode that is associated with battle loss fluctuations. Judgment table (high expectation loss 2nd special presentation mode judgment table), and second special presentation mode judgment table (low expectation loss 2nd special presentation mode judgment table) associated with reach/gasp loss variation and shortened loss variation ).

The performance control microcomputer 121 determines which special performance mode determination table is to be used by determining the starting prize that is associated with each of the same cycle first special figure reservation designation command and the same cycle subsequent special figure reservation designation command. Check the pre-reading determination results (first pre-reading determination result, second pre-reading determination result) indicated by the commands (first starting winning command, second starting winning command).

Then, when the performance control microcomputer 121 determines the special performance mode related to the special figure 1, if there is one indicating SP jackpot fluctuation or L jackpot fluctuation in the first look-ahead determination result, the performance control microcomputer 121 controls the jackpot first special performance. Select the mode judgment table, and even if there is no SP jackpot variation or L jackpot variation in the first look-ahead judgment results, if there is one that indicates SP loss variation or L loss variation, the high expectation loss number is selected. 1 Select the special performance mode determination table, and if there is no one indicating SP jackpot fluctuation or L jackpot fluctuation, or one indicating SP loss fluctuation or L loss fluctuation in the first look-ahead determination result, the expectation level is low. Select the loss first special performance mode determination table.

In addition, in the case of special performance mode determination related to special figure 2, the performance control microcomputer 121 selects the jackpot second special performance mode determination table if there is one indicating battle jackpot fluctuation in the second look-ahead determination result. However, if there is nothing in the second look-ahead judgment result that indicates a battle jackpot change but there is something that shows a battle loss change, select the high expectation loss second special performance mode judgment table and select the second look-ahead judgment result. If there is neither one showing a battle jackpot fluctuation nor one showing a battle loss fluctuation in the table, the low expectation loss second special effect mode determination table is selected.

In each special performance mode determination table, the selection rate for each special performance mode (first special performance mode to fourth special performance mode) is a predetermined selection rate shown in FIGS. 62(C) and 62(D). It is configured as appropriate.

In addition, when the production control microcomputer 121 receives the same cycle subsequent special figure hold designation command, the same cycle special figure hold designation command associated with the special figure hold in the previous hold order is the same cycle leading special figure. If it is determined that it is not a figure reservation designation command, in other words, if it is determined that it is a same cycle subsequent special figure reservation designation command, it is determined whether or not a special effect is being executed.

When the performance control microcomputer 121 determines that the special performance is being executed, it finishes the processing related to the second special performance, and when it determines that the special performance is not being executed, it determines whether or not to execute the special performance. A special performance execution judgment will be made. The special performance execution determination is executed with reference to the special performance execution determination table. Regarding the special effect execution judgment here, the same special effect as when the same cycle special figure reservation designation command associated with the special figure reservation in the previous reservation order was the same cycle first special figure reservation designation command. Execution judgment table (Jackpot 1st special effect execution judgment table, High expectation loss 1st special effect execution judgment table, Low expectation loss 1st special effect execution judgment table, Jackpot 2nd special effect execution judgment table, High expectation loss 2nd special performance execution determination table, low expectation loss 2nd special performance execution determination table) is used, but the reference start winning command is the same periodic feature that is associated with the special figure reservation in the previous reservation order. This differs from the case where the figure reservation designation command is the same period top special figure reservation designation command. Here, the production control microcomputer 121 receives the newly received same-cycle subsequent special figure reservation designation command, one or more already stored same-cycle subsequent special figure reservation commands, and the same-cycle first special figure 2. Check the pre-reading determination results (first pre-reading determination result, second pre-reading determination result) indicated by the starting winning commands (first starting winning command, second starting winning command) associated with each of the hold designation commands.

Then, when the performance control microcomputer 121 determines whether to execute a special performance related to the special figure 1, if there is a result indicating SP jackpot fluctuation or L jackpot fluctuation in the first look-ahead determination result, the performance control microcomputer 121 performs the jackpot first special performance. Select the execution judgment table, and even if there is no SP jackpot variation or L jackpot variation in the first look-ahead judgment result, if there is one that indicates SP loss variation or L loss variation, the high expectation loss number is selected. 1. Select the special performance execution determination table, and if there is no one indicating SP jackpot fluctuation or L jackpot fluctuation, or one indicating SP loss fluctuation or L loss fluctuation in the first look-ahead determination result, the expectation level is low. Select the loss first special performance execution determination table.

In addition, in the case of special performance execution determination related to special figure 2, the performance control microcomputer 121 selects the jackpot second special performance execution determination table if there is one that indicates a battle jackpot fluctuation in the second look-ahead determination result. However, if there is nothing in the second look-ahead judgment result that indicates a battle jackpot change, but there is something that shows a battle loss change, select the high expectation loss second special performance execution judgment table, and select the second look-ahead judgment result. If there is neither one indicating a battle jackpot fluctuation nor one indicating a battle loss fluctuation in the table, the low expectation loss second special performance execution determination table is selected.

When the performance control microcomputer 121 executes the special performance execution determination, it next determines whether or not the determination result is "execute the special performance", and if the determination result is "do not perform the special performance", After completing the processing related to the special performance, if the determination result is "execute special performance", then the special performance type determination is performed based on the pre-read determination result. Regarding the special performance mode judgment here, the same special performance as when the same cycle special figure reservation designation command associated with the special figure reservation in the previous reservation order was the same cycle top special figure reservation designation command. Mode judgment table (Jackpot 1st special performance mode judgment table, High expectation loss 1st special performance mode judgment table, Low expectation loss 1st special performance mode judgment table, Jackpot 2nd special performance mode judgment table, High expectation loss 2nd special performance mode determination table, low expectation loss 2nd special performance mode determination table) is used, but the start winning command to be referred to is the same periodic feature that is associated with the special figure reservation in the previous reservation order. This differs from the case where the figure reservation designation command is the same period top special figure reservation designation command. Here, the performance control microcomputer 121 receives a newly received same cycle subsequent special figure reservation designation command, one or more already stored same cycle subsequent special figure reservation designation commands, and same cycle leading special figure reservation. Check the pre-reading determination results (first pre-reading determination result, second pre-reading determination result) indicated by the starting winning commands (first starting winning command, second starting winning command) associated with each of the specified commands.

Then, when the performance control microcomputer 121 determines the special performance mode related to the special figure 1, if there is one indicating SP jackpot fluctuation or L jackpot fluctuation in the first look-ahead determination result, the performance control microcomputer 121 controls the jackpot first special performance. Select the mode judgment table, and even if there is no SP jackpot variation or L jackpot variation in the first look-ahead judgment results, if there is one that indicates SP loss variation or L loss variation, the high expectation loss number is selected. 1 Select the special performance mode determination table, and if there is no one indicating SP jackpot fluctuation or L jackpot fluctuation, or one indicating SP loss fluctuation or L loss fluctuation in the first look-ahead determination result, the expectation level is low. Select the loss first special performance mode determination table.

In addition, in the case of special performance execution determination related to special figure 2, the performance control microcomputer 121 selects the jackpot second special performance mode determination table if there is one that indicates a battle jackpot fluctuation among the second look-ahead determination results. However, if there is nothing in the second look-ahead judgment results that shows a battle jackpot change but there is something that shows a battle loss change, select the high expectation loss second special performance mode judgment table and select the second look-ahead judgment result. If there is neither one showing a battle jackpot fluctuation nor one showing a battle loss fluctuation in the table, the low expectation loss second special effect mode determination table is selected.

Once the performance control microcomputer 121 has determined the special performance mode, it sends a special performance start command indicating to execute the special performance in which the determination result is reflected, in order to execute the special performance in which the determination result is reflected. Set it in the transmission buffer of the effect RAM 124. The special effect start command set in the transmission buffer of the effect RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by command transmission processing (S4004). When the image CPU 141 receives the special effect start command, it appropriately executes the special effect in the special effect mode indicated by the special effect start command.

Next, a specific example of the special performance will be explained. As mentioned above, in the third embodiment, the special performance can be executed in the normal performance mode (normal game state), variable performance mode (high probability high base game state), and time saving performance mode (low probability high base game state) However, here, a specific example of the special performance executed in the normal performance mode (normal game state) will be explained.

FIG. 63 shows a specific example in which a special effect is executed when the first same-cycle subsequent special figure 1 reservation occurs, and FIG. 64 shows a specific example in which a second same-cycle subsequent special figure 1 reservation occurs. This is a specific example of a case where a special effect is executed depending on what has been done. In addition, in common to FIG. 63 and FIG. 64, the special figure 1 variable display is executed, one special figure 1 reservation already exists, and the first normal background image G111 is displayed on the display section 50a. , Superimposed on the first normal background image G111, a variable display of production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, and the icon HA0 corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display corresponds to one special figure 1 pending. Assume that the hold icon HA1 is displayed. Furthermore, in FIGS. 63 and 64, it is assumed that the display mode of all the icons (the icon, the pending icon) including the icon HA0 and the pending icon HA1 is the normal mode. Furthermore, it is assumed that the special presentation mode of the special presentation executed in FIGS. 63 and 64 is the first special presentation mode.

First, with reference to FIG. 63, a specific example of the special effect executed when the first same-cycle subsequent special figure 1 suspension occurs will be described. As shown in FIG. 63(A), the first normal background image G111 is displayed on the display section 50a, and the effect patterns EZ1 to EZ3 are displayed in a superimposed manner on the first normal background image G111, and the corresponding When the icon HA0 and the pending icon HA1 corresponding to the special symbol 1 pending in the pending order 1 are displayed, a predetermined time that is sufficiently longer than the time required for the special symbol random number counter to complete one cycle from the occurrence of the special symbol 1 pending is displayed. It is assumed that when a time period (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed, a game ball enters the first starting port 11 and a special drawing 1 reservation of reservation order 2 occurs. Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 63(B), a hold icon HA2 is displayed in response to the occurrence of the special drawing 1 hold. Here, it is assumed that the initial value of the special figure 1 reservation in the reservation order 1 is different from the initial value of the special figure 1 reservation in the reservation order 2. That is, the special figure 1 reservation in the reservation order 2 is the first special figure 1 reservation in the same cycle.

Then, from the occurrence of the special figure 1 hold in the hold order 2, the special figure 1 hold in the hold order 3 occurs continuously (without a pause), in other words, the game ball is placed in the first starting port 11 in the hold order 2. It is assumed that following the winning, the game balls connected to and in contact with the game ball enter the first starting hole 11, and special drawing 1 holding in the holding order 3 occurs. In other words, it is assumed that the game ball that entered the first starting port 11 related to the reservation order 2 and the game ball that entered the first starting port 11 related to the pending order 3 entered the first starting port 11 in a dumpling state. .

Further, it is assumed that the initial value of the special figure 1 reservation in the reservation order 3 is the same as the initial value of the special figure 1 reservation in the reservation order 2. Therefore, the special figure 1 reservation in reservation order 3 becomes the first same cycle subsequent special figure 1 reservation with respect to the special figure 1 reservation in reservation order 2. Then, as shown in FIG. 63(C), for example, a normal mode hold icon HA3 is displayed as a hold icon corresponding to the first same-cycle subsequent special figure 1 hold (special figure 1 hold in hold order 3). However, here, if it is determined that the special performance is to be executed in the special performance execution determination related to the first same period subsequent special figure 1 suspension, and it is determined that the special performance mode is the first special performance mode in the special performance mode determination, As shown in 63(C), immediately after the hold icon HA3 corresponding to the same cycle subsequent special figure 1 hold (special figure 1 hold in hold order 3) is displayed, the hold icon HA3 and the same cycle first special figure 1 are displayed. A special effect image G30 is displayed that integrally covers the hold icon HA2 corresponding to the hold.

Next, when a predetermined time period (for example, 10 seconds) that is sufficiently longer than the time required for the special symbol random number counter to complete one round has elapsed since the special symbol 1 reservation in the reservation order 3 has occurred, the first starting port 11 is opened. It is assumed that a game ball wins and a special drawing 1 reservation occurs in the reservation order 4. Here, it is assumed that the initial value of the special figure 1 reservation in the reservation order 4 is different from the initial value of the special figure 1 reservation in the reservation order 3. That is, the special figure 1 reservation in the reservation order 4 is the new same cycle first special figure 1 reservation. Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 63(D), a hold icon HA4 is displayed in response to the occurrence of special figure 1 hold in the hold order 4. Like the relationship between the special figure 1 hold corresponding to the hold icon HA4 and the special figure 1 hold corresponding to the hold icon HA3, the initial value related to the special figure 1 hold and the order of the previous hold If the initial value related to special pattern 1 reservation is different, in other words, if two special pattern 1 reservations do not constitute the same special pattern random number period, the new reservation icon corresponding to the first special pattern 1 reservation in the same period. The special effects are not interfered with by the display. In addition, in the third embodiment, after the special performance is executed, while the special performance is being executed, a new special figure 1 hold occurs, and the new special figure 1 hold and the special effect are If the special pattern 1 reservation has the same special pattern random number period, the new special pattern 1 reservation will also become the subsequent special pattern 1 reservation with the same period as the special pattern 1 reservation related to the special effect, but this new special pattern Since special effect execution judgment is not made for special figure 1 hold (same cycle subsequent special figure 1 hold), special effect is executed based on the occurrence of the new special figure 1 hold (same cycle subsequent special figure 1 hold). It will never be executed.

In addition, after the special effect image G30 is displayed until it is erased, the special effect image G30 is attached to (as if clinging to) the hold icon HA2 and the hold icon HA3 as it was immediately after the display started. It continues to be displayed with icon HA3 covered. Therefore, for example, from the situation shown in FIG. 63(D), one special figure 1 hold is consumed, and the hold icon HA2 corresponding to the first special figure 1 hold in the same cycle, and the first same cycle subsequent special figure 1 hold. When the hold icon HA3 corresponding to is moved (shifted), the special effect image G30 also moves while covering the hold icons HA2 and HA3 (attached to the hold icons HA2 and HA3), and the hold icon after the movement (shift) It is displayed so as to cover HA2 and HA3. Furthermore, when one special figure 1 hold is used up and the special figure 1 variable display based on the special figure 1 hold at the beginning of the same period related to the special effect is to be displayed, the hold icon HA2 moves and becomes the icon HA2. , the hold icon HA3 moves to become the hold icon HA3 representing the hold order 1, but in this case as well, the special effect image G30 covers the icon HA2 and the hold icon HA3 (the icon HA2 and the hold icon HA3 The icon HA2 and the pending icon HA3 are displayed so as to cover the moved (shifted) icon HA2 and the pending icon HA3.

Furthermore, when the special figure 1 variable display based on the same period leading special figure 1 suspension related to the special effect ends and the relevant icon HA2 is erased, the part that covered the relevant icon HA2 in the special effect image G30 also disappears. will be deleted accordingly. Then, when the special figure 1 variable display based on the same cycle subsequent special figure 1 hold related to the special performance is started, the hold icon HA3 that corresponds to the special figure 1 hold in the hold order 1 moves (shifts) and The icon HA3 corresponds to the special figure 1 variable display, but in this case as well, the special effect image G30 moves while covering the icon HA3 (attached to the icon HA3), and after the movement (shift) It is displayed so as to cover the icon HA3. Then, when the special figure 1 variable display based on the same period subsequent special figure 1 suspension related to the special effect ends and the icon HA3 is erased, the part that covered the icon HA3 in the special effect image G30 is also erased. will be deleted accordingly.

Next, with reference to FIG. 64, a specific example of the special effect executed when the second same period subsequent special figure 1 suspension occurs will be explained. As shown in FIG. 64(A), the first normal background image G111 is displayed on the display section 50a, and the variable display of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is displayed superimposed on the first normal background image G111, When the icon HA0 and the pending icon HA1 corresponding to the special symbol 1 pending in the pending order 1 are displayed, the time required for the special symbol random number counter to complete one cycle from the occurrence of the special symbol 1 pending is sufficiently long. It is assumed that when a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed, a game ball enters the first starting port 11 and a special figure 1 reservation of reservation order 2 occurs. Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 64(B), a hold icon HA2 is displayed in response to the occurrence of the special drawing 1 hold. Here, it is assumed that the initial value of the special figure 1 reservation in the reservation order 1 is different from the initial value of the special figure 1 reservation in the reservation order 2. That is, the special figure 1 reservation in the reservation order 2 is the first special figure 1 reservation in the same cycle.

Then, from the occurrence of the special figure 1 hold in the hold order 2, the special figure 1 hold in the hold order 3 occurs continuously (without a pause), in other words, the game ball is placed in the first starting port 11 in the hold order 2. It is assumed that following the winning, the game balls connected to and in contact with the game ball enter the first starting hole 11, and special drawing 1 holding in the holding order 3 occurs. Here, it is assumed that the initial value of the special figure 1 reservation in the reservation order 3 is the same as the initial value of the special figure 1 reservation in the reservation order 2. Therefore, the special figure 1 reservation in the reservation order 3 becomes the first same-cycle subsequent special figure 1 reservation. Then, as shown in FIG. 64(C), for example, a normal mode hold icon HA3 is displayed as a hold icon corresponding to the first same-cycle subsequent special figure 1 hold (special figure 1 hold in hold order 3). However, this is different from the example shown in FIG. 63, and if it is determined that the special effect is not to be executed in the special effect execution determination regarding the first same period subsequent special figure 1 suspension, then the example shown in FIG. 64(C) As shown in , a hold icon HA3 corresponding to the same cycle subsequent special figure 1 hold (special figure 1 hold in hold order 3) is displayed, but the special effect image G30 is not displayed. That is, the special performance is not executed based on the occurrence of the first same-cycle subsequent special figure 1 suspension.

Furthermore, from the occurrence of the special figure 1 hold in the hold order 3, the special figure 1 hold in the hold order 4 occurs continuously (without a pause), in other words, the game ball is placed in the first starting port 11 in the hold order 3. It is assumed that following the winning, the game balls connected to and in contact with the game ball enter the first starting hole 11, and special drawing 1 holding in the holding order 4 occurs. That is, the game ball that won the first starting port 11 according to the reservation order 2, the game ball that entered the first starting port 11 according to the reservation order 3, and the game ball that entered the first starting port 11 according to the reservation order 4. It is assumed that the ball enters the first starting port 11 in a ball state.

Further, it is assumed that the initial value of the special figure 1 reservation in the reservation order 4 is the same as the initial value of the special figure 1 reservation in the reservation order 3. Therefore, the special figure 1 reservation in reservation order 4 becomes the second same period subsequent special figure 1 reservation with respect to the special figure 1 reservation in reservation order 2. Then, as shown in FIG. 64(D), for example, a normal mode hold icon HA4 is displayed as a hold icon corresponding to the second same period subsequent special figure 1 hold (special figure 1 hold in hold order 4). However, here, if it is determined that the special performance is to be executed in the special performance execution determination related to the second same period subsequent special figure 1 suspension, and it is determined that the special performance mode is the first special performance mode in the special performance mode determination, As shown in 64(D), immediately after the hold icon HA4 corresponding to the second same-cycle subsequent special figure 1 hold (special figure 1 hold in hold order 4) is displayed, the second same-cycle subsequent special figure 1 hold is displayed. A hold icon HA4 corresponding to special figure 1 hold (special figure 1 hold in hold order 4), a hold icon HA3 corresponding to the first same period subsequent special figure 1 hold (special figure 1 hold in hold order 3), and A special effect image G30 is displayed that integrally covers the reservation icon HA2 corresponding to the first special figure 1 reservation in the same cycle (the special figure 1 reservation in the reservation order 2). Note that the behavior and state of the special effect image G30 after the special effect is started are the same as in the example shown in FIG. 63.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY3, the determination information (special symbol random numbers) of a plurality of mutually different numbers are repeatedly updated so as not to overlap until one cycle is completed, and the acquisition conditions (such as the number of reserved special symbols and the special When the number of reservations in FIG. 2 is less than the upper limit and a prize is won in the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12), the determination information at that time is acquired, and based on the acquired determination information, a specific prize that is advantageous to the player is determined. A predetermined judgment (jackpot judgment) is made to determine whether or not to execute a game (jackpot game), and judgment information regarding one special drawing reservation (right to make jackpot judgment) and the subsequent special drawing reservation are provided. If the judgment information (the right to make a jackpot judgment) is from the same round, the special drawing reservation (right to make a jackpot judgment) of that one and the special drawing reservation that occurred after that (the right to make a jackpot judgment) However, by sometimes executing a special effect that suggests that a specific game (jackpot game) may be executed, a specific game (jackpot game) may be executed for one special figure pending such as a pending notice. ) is more likely to be executed than a production that suggests that there is a possibility that a jackpot game will be executed.In other words, it is easier to please the player and create a sense of expectation in the player. Therefore, the interest in the game increases. In addition, if a new right to make a predetermined judgment (special map reservation) occurs while a special performance is being executed, judgment information related to the right to make a predetermined judgment (special map reservation) that is the target of the special performance. If the judgment information related to the newly generated right to make a prescribed judgment (special map reservation) is within the same round, the judgment information regarding the newly generated right to make a prescribed judgment (special map reservation) Since the special performance is not performed, it is possible to prevent the performance effect of the special performance from deteriorating.

(Example of modification of third embodiment)
Next, a modification example of the pachinko gaming machine PY3 according to the third embodiment will be described. Note that it is also possible to appropriately combine the modification examples described below.

In the third embodiment, the range of special symbol random numbers is 0 to 65535, and the number of special symbol random numbers is 65536, but the range and number of special symbol random numbers are not limited to the third embodiment and may be changed as appropriate. It's okay. For example, the number of special symbol random numbers may be greater or less than 65,536. Furthermore, the number of special symbol random number determination values, in other words, the jackpot winning probability is not limited to the third embodiment, and may be changed as appropriate.

Although the special performance is started from the time when the same-cycle subsequent special symbol reservation occurs, which is the trigger for execution, the start time of the special performance is not limited to the third embodiment, and may be changed as appropriate. For example, the special performance may be started when the special symbol variable display is started next after the same period subsequent special symbol reservation that is the trigger for execution occurs. Alternatively, the special effect may be started when the special figure variable display based on the same period top special figure reservation related to the special effect is started.

The special performance ends when the special figure variable display based on the same period subsequent special figure reservation that is the trigger for execution ends, but the end time of the special performance is not limited to the third embodiment and may be changed as appropriate. good. For example, the special performance may be ended when the special symbol variable display based on the same-cycle top special symbol reservation related to the special performance is started. Alternatively, the special performance may end when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the special performance. Furthermore, there is a possibility that a jackpot game different from the special performance will be executed for any one or all of the icons that correspond to the same cycle special figure reservation related to the special performance, or that a jackpot game will be executed. The special performance may be ended by overwriting the performance that indicates an increased chance for the game.

The special performance consists of displaying a special performance image G30, and the special performance image G30 is displayed in a superimposed manner on the icon corresponding to the same cycle special map reservation related to the special performance, but the specific display contents of the special performance are as follows. It is not particularly limited and may be changed as appropriate. For example, the special effect image G30 may be composed of a background image and effect images displayed at the left end, upper end, and right end of the display section 50a. Alternatively, the special performance may be executed by changing the display mode of the icon to a special mode corresponding to the special performance. However, it is preferable that the special performance is executed in such a way that the player can recognize that the special symbol at the beginning of the same period is on hold related to the special performance. This is because it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the performance effect of the special performance.

Further, although the special effects are performed using the image display device 50, instead of or in addition to the image display device 50, the special effects may be performed using other presentation devices such as the speaker 52, the frame lamp 53, and the board moving device 55. You can do it like this. However, it is preferable that the special performance is executed in such a way that the player can recognize that the special symbol at the beginning of the same period is on hold related to the special performance. This is because it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the performance effect of the special performance.

Further, in the third embodiment, the game control side timer interrupt process is executed at a 4ms cycle, but this cycle may be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, in the third embodiment, the game control board 100 determines whether or not the special pattern reservation period is the same cycle special pattern reservation. Accordingly, information regarding the initial value may be transmitted to the performance control board 120, and the performance control board 120 may determine whether or not to execute a special performance based on the information regarding the initial value. Alternatively, the game control board 100 transmits information indicating that the initial value will be switched to the production control board 120 at the timing when the initial value is switched, and the production control board 120 may perform a special production based on the information indicating that the initial value will be switched. It may be determined whether or not to execute. For example, the special drawing hold corresponding to multiple start winning commands that are sent between the time when the information indicating that a certain initial value will change and the time when the information indicating that the next initial value will change is sent. Since the special symbol random numbers have the same cycle, the performance control board 120 can determine whether or not to execute the special performance based on the information indicating that the initial value is switched.

In addition, in the examples shown in FIGS. 63 and 64, the display mode of the icon related to the special effect is the normal mode, but the special effect may be executed for the icon displayed in the special mode. good. In other words, the pending change notice and the special performance may be executed redundantly in the same period. In this case, after the special performance is executed, the display mode of the icon related to the special performance may change from the normal mode to the special mode. On the contrary, after the display mode of the icon related to the special effect changes from the normal mode to the special mode, the special effect may be executed for the icon in the special mode.

In addition, if the special pattern hold that occurred after the special performance was executed and the special pattern hold related to the special performance have the same special pattern random number cycle, the special pattern hold that occurred after the special performance was executed. It may also be possible to perform a special performance for the event. In this case, for example, the special effect image G30 related to the special effect that has already been executed may extend to the hold icon corresponding to the special figure hold that occurred after the special effect was executed. Further, for example, a new special effect image G30 is added to an icon corresponding to a special figure pending related to a special effect that has already been executed, and a pending icon corresponding to a special figure pending that has occurred after the special effect has been executed. It may be displayed. Furthermore, in the third embodiment, if the special performance is not executed based on the occurrence of the first same cycle subsequent special figure 1 reservation, the same cycle The special performance execution determination table is used to determine the execution of the special performance, and the same special performance mode determination table is used to determine the special performance mode. The determination may be made using a table. If it is a special performance execution determination, the selection rate for "execute" may be uniformly higher or lower in the second and subsequent cases than in the first case. Alternatively, in the second and subsequent cases, the selection rate for "execute" may gradually become higher or lower than in the first case. Furthermore, in the case of special performance mode determination, from the second onwards, the selection rate for the "predetermined special performance mode" may be uniformly higher or lower than in the first case. . Alternatively, in the second and subsequent cases, the selection rate for the "predetermined special presentation mode" may be made to gradually become higher or lower than in the first case. Further, in the second and subsequent stages, a special performance mode that could not be selected in the first stage may be selected.

In the pachinko game machine PY3, special effects can be executed in the normal gaming state, high probability high base gaming state, and low probability high base gaming state, but for example, the normal gaming state where the game is basically played with left-handed players. , or that a special effect is executed in a specific gaming state, such as a high-probability, high-base gaming state in which the game is basically played with right-handed players, or a low-probability, high-base gaming state. However, the special performance may not be executed in a non-specific gaming state.

Furthermore, in the third embodiment, the game states in which the special figure variable display can be executed include a normal game state, a high probability high base game state, and a low probability high base game state, but the possible game states are not particularly limited. However, it may be changed as appropriate. For example, the pachinko gaming machine PY3 that is capable of executing the above-mentioned special performance is configured as a so-called "1 type 2 type mixed machine" as in the first embodiment, and there is only one type of gaming state related to the probability of winning a jackpot. The possible gaming states of the pachinko gaming machine PY3 may be two types: a normal gaming state and a time saving state. In this case, the special performance may be a performance that suggests that there is a possibility of a jackpot game state including a jackpot game executed in response to a small win.

<Fourth embodiment>
Next, a fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described based on the basic embodiment of the present invention described above. Note that the same reference numerals and terms are used for the same configurations as those in the basic embodiment or similarly corresponding configurations.

In the pachinko game machine PY4 according to the fourth embodiment, in the normal performance mode, a predetermined operation performance may be executed before a reach is established. In the operation performance, the operation on the first performance button 40k is effective. The performance types (operation performance types) of the operation performance include a first operation performance type, a second operation performance type, and a third operation performance type. Hereinafter, the operation performance of the first operation performance type will be referred to as the "first operation performance", the operation performance of the second operation performance type will be referred to as the "second operation performance", and the operation performance of the third operation performance type will be referred to as the "second operation performance". It is called ``3-operation performance''. In addition, the operation performance that can be executed in the fourth embodiment suggests that there is a possibility that a jackpot game will be executed, in other words, it is a notice that, when executed, the expectation level for the execution of the jackpot game will increase (the chance will increase). It is performed as a performance.

In the fourth embodiment, when the operation performance is executed, the operation performance starts when 3 seconds have elapsed after the start of the special symbol variation performance (variable display of performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3). As described above, the operation presentation includes an operation promotion presentation and an operation result presentation. Then, the same operation validity period occurs in the first operation performance, the second operation performance, and the third operation performance, and the same operation promotion performance is executed. In the fourth embodiment, the time from when the operation validity period occurs until the operation ends without any operation being performed (operation validity time) is set to 4 seconds. Further, the content of the operation promotion performance is the same as the operation promotion performance of the basic embodiment, and in the operation promotion performance, the operation promotion performance is executed using the operation promotion performance image G12.

Moreover, mutually different operation result effects are executed in the first operation effect, the second operation effect, and the third operation effect. In the following, the operation result performance related to the first operation performance will be referred to as the "first operation result performance", the operation result performance related to the second operation performance will be referred to as the "second operation result performance", and the operation related to the third operation performance The result presentation will be referred to as "third operation result presentation."

As the operation result effect, an image (result image) G40 corresponding to the operation result effect is cut in on the display section 50a, and background images such as the first normal background image G111 and effect patterns EZ1 to EZ3 that are being displayed in a variable manner are displayed. are displayed in a superimposed manner. Although details will be described later, the result image G40 includes a normal result image G40a and a second result image G40b that suggests that there is a higher possibility that a jackpot game will be executed than the special result image G40a. In the following, the operation result effect in which the normal result image G40a is displayed is referred to as a "normal operation result effect", and the operation result effect in which the special result image G40b is displayed is referred to as a "special operation result effect".

Next, a flow related to operation performance (operation performance flow) will be explained. Common to the first operation performance, the second operation performance, and the third operation performance, when the relevant performance is started, an operation promotion performance consisting of the same performance content is first started, and the first operation performance for the relevant operation performance is started. An operation valid period in which the operation on the production button 40k is valid starts. Then, when the first performance button 40k is operated while the operation promotion performance is being executed (during the valid operation period), the operation result performance is executed. However, the content of the operation result effect differs depending on the operation effect type. Therefore, the portion after the first performance button 40k is operated in the operation performance flows related to the first operation performance, the second operation performance, and the third operation performance will be explained.

First, the operation performance flow related to the first operation performance will be explained. When the first performance button 40k is pressed while the operation promotion performance is being executed, the operation promotion performance is performed in response to the pressing operation, specifically, immediately after the first performance button 40k is pressed. At the same time, the normal operation result presentation starts. The normal operation result presentation ends when a first presentation time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed from the start. In addition, even if the pressing operation on the first performance button 40k is released before the first performance time elapses after the normal operation result performance is started, in other words, the operation of releasing the first performance button 40k (the first performance button Even if an operation is performed to return to the original normal state before the 40k was pressed (no pressing operation), the normal operation result performance will continue for the first performance time after the start. Continue until the time elapses. The normal operation result performance corresponding to the pressing operation on the first performance button 40k constitutes the first operation result performance. In addition, in the following, with respect to the first performance button 40k in the state of being pressed down, the first performance is performed by releasing the hand from the first performance button 40k or raising it while touching the first performance button 40k. The operation of returning the button 40k to its original normal state is sometimes referred to as a "release operation."

Next, the operation performance flow related to the second operation performance will be explained. When the first performance button 40k is pressed while the operation promotion performance is being executed, the operation promotion performance is performed in response to the pressing operation, specifically, immediately after the first performance button 40k is pressed. At the same time as this ends, the special operation result presentation starts. The special operation result presentation ends when a first presentation time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed from the start. Furthermore, even if the first performance button 40k is released before the first performance time has elapsed after the special operation result performance has started, the special operation result performance will not be performed until the first performance time has elapsed after the start of the special operation result performance. continue. The special operation result performance corresponding to the pressing operation on the first performance button 40k constitutes the second operation result performance.

Next, the operation performance flow related to the third operation performance will be explained. When the first performance button 40k is pressed while the operation promotion performance is being executed, the operation promotion performance is performed in response to the pressing operation, specifically, immediately after the first performance button 40k is pressed. At the same time, the normal operation result presentation starts. The steps up to this point are the same as the operation performance flow related to the first operation performance. In the third operation performance, when the first performance button 40k is released after the normal operation result performance is started, in detail, the first performance button 40k is released according to the release operation. Immediately after, the normal operation result presentation ends and the special operation result presentation starts. In other words, the operation result effect is switched from the normal operation result effect to the special operation result effect (from the normal result image G40a to the special result image G40b). The special operation result presentation ends when a second presentation time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed from the start. The normal operation result performance corresponding to the pressing operation on the first performance button 40k and the special operation result performance according to the release operation on the first performance button 40k constitute the third operation result performance.

A special operation result effect is executed in response to a release operation on the first effect button 40k in the third operation effect, but in contrast to the execution of the special operation result effect, a release operation on the first effect button 40k is performed. There is a valid period (cancellation operation valid period) and an invalid period (cancellation operation invalid period). The cancellation operation valid period is 1 second between 1 second and 2 seconds after the normal operation result presentation starts, and the cancellation operation invalid period is the second presentation time that elapses after the normal operation result presentation starts. This period excludes the valid period of cancellation operation up to. Therefore, even if the third operation effect is being executed, the special operation result effect will be executed even if the first effect button 40k is released before one second has elapsed since the normal operation result effect started. Instead, the normal operation result presentation ends when the first presentation time has elapsed since it started. Furthermore, even if the third operation effect is being executed, the special operation result effect will not be executed even if the first effect button 40k is released after two seconds have passed since the normal operation result effect started. First, the normal operation result presentation ends when the first presentation time has elapsed since it started. In addition, in the fourth embodiment, if the first effect button 40k is released during the first release operation invalid period (before the release operation valid period occurs), the first effect button 40k is subsequently pressed again and the first effect button 40k is pressed again during the release operation valid period. Even if the first performance button 40k is released, the special operation result performance is not executed, and the normal operation result performance ends when the first performance time has elapsed since the start. However, in this case, when the first performance button 40k is operated to release during the release operation valid period after the first release operation invalid period, the normal operation result performance may be switched to the special operation result performance.

Further, although detailed presentation contents will be described later, when the normal operation result presentation ends and the special operation result presentation is executed, the normal result image G40a is replaced with the special result image G40b. In other words, the position where the normal result image G40a is displayed and the position where the special result image G40b is displayed are the same, and when the normal operation result effect ends and the special operation result effect is executed, the normal result image G40a is displayed. G40a disappears and special result image G40b is displayed. As mentioned above, the special operation result effect is a effect that suggests that there is a higher possibility that a jackpot game will be executed than the normal operation result effect, so in the third operation effect, the effect on the first button 40k is This release operation improves the possibility of a jackpot game related to the operation result effect, in other words, the operation result effect is promoted.

In addition, if the first performance button 40k is not operated during the operation validity period related to the first operation performance, in other words, the operation validity period ends without the first performance button 40k being operated after the first operation performance is started. When , the operation promotion effect ends, and the normal operation result effect is executed as the first operation result effect. Similarly, if the effective operation time passes without any operation of the first performance button 40k after the start of the second operation performance, the operation promotion performance ends and the special performance as the second operation result performance is activated. The operation result performance is executed. In addition, if the effective operation time passes without the first performance button 40k being operated after the third operation performance starts, the operation promotion performance ends and the normal operation as the third operation result performance is performed. The result rendering is executed. In this case, the normal operation result presentation is not promoted to the special operation result presentation.

Next, an example of the control content related to the operation performance in the fourth embodiment will be explained. Note that the control content described below is an example of control content related to operation performance, so the control content is not limited to the following content and may be changed as appropriate.

For example, in step S4306, the production control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not it is the normal production mode after determining the special symbol variation production pattern. When the performance control microcomputer 121 determines that the mode is not the normal performance mode, it finishes the processing related to the operation performance, and when it determines that the mode is the normal performance mode, the received special figure variation start command corresponds to the special figure 1 variation pattern. Determine whether or not it is. When the production control microcomputer 121 determines that the command is not a special figure variation start command corresponding to the special figure 1 variation pattern, it finishes the processing related to the operation production, and the special figure variation start command corresponds to the special figure 1 variation pattern. If it is determined, based on the special figure variation start command, an operation performance execution determination is performed to determine whether or not the operation performance can be executed.

The operation performance execution determination is executed with reference to the operation performance execution determination table. A configuration example of the operation performance execution determination table is shown in FIG. 65(A). As shown in FIG. 65(A), the operation performance execution determination table is associated with the special symbol variation pattern included in the special symbol variation pattern determination result indicated by the special symbol variation start command. Specifically, the operation performance execution determination table includes an operation performance execution determination table for jackpot fluctuations (SP jackpot fluctuation, L jackpot fluctuation), an operation performance execution determination table for SP loss fluctuation, and an operation performance execution determination table for L loss fluctuation. Judgment table, operation performance execution determination table for N loss variation, operation performance execution determination table for normal A loss variation, operation performance execution determination table for normal B loss variation, and operation performance execution determination table for normal C loss variation is provided. Each operation effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 65(A) is appropriately configured so that the selection rate for executing/not executing the operation effect becomes a predetermined selection rate shown in FIG. 65(A).

As shown in FIG. 65(A), the special pattern variation pattern indicated by the special pattern variation start command may be determined to be "executed" whether it is a jackpot variation or a loss variation. Therefore, when the operation performance is executed, there is a possibility that the special figure 1 variable display that triggered the operation performance will result in a jackpot. That is, the operation performance is a performance that suggests that there is a possibility that a jackpot game will be executed. In addition, the special figure variation pattern indicated by the special figure variation start command may be determined to be "executed" both in the case of a special figure variation pattern in which a reach is established and in the case of a special figure variation pattern in which a reach is not established. Therefore, when the operation performance is executed, there is a possibility that a reach can be achieved with the special figure variation performance according to the special figure 1 variable display related to the operation performance. In other words, the operation performance is a performance that suggests that there is a possibility of becoming a reach. In addition, when the special figure 1 variation pattern is a normal B losing variation and a normal C losing variation, the operation performance is not executed.

After completing the operation performance execution determination, the performance control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the determination result is "execute the operation performance". The production control microcomputer 121 finishes the processing related to the operation production when the judgment result is not "execute the operation production", and when the judgment result is "execute the operation production", the production control microcomputer 121 executes the special figure fluctuation. Based on the start command, an operation performance type determination is performed to determine the operation performance type.

The operation performance type determination is executed with reference to the operation performance type determination table. A configuration example of the operation performance type determination table is shown in FIG. 65(B). As shown in FIG. 65(B), the operation performance type determination table is associated with the special figure fluctuation pattern. Specifically, the operation performance type determination table includes an operation performance type determination table for jackpot fluctuations (SP jackpot fluctuation, L jackpot fluctuation), an operation performance type determination table for SP loss fluctuation, and an operation performance type determination table for L loss fluctuation. A determination table, an operation performance type determination table for N loss variation, and an operation performance type determination table for normal A loss variation are provided. Each operation performance type determination table shown in FIG. 65(B) is appropriately configured so that the selection rate for each operation performance type becomes a predetermined selection rate shown in FIG. 65(B).

As shown in Fig. 65(B), when the special pattern fluctuation pattern is SP reach fluctuation (SP jackpot fluctuation, SP loss fluctuation), L reach fluctuation (L jackpot fluctuation, L loss fluctuation), and N loss fluctuation. Even in the case of a normal A loss variation, the "first operation performance type" may be determined. Therefore, when the first operation performance is executed as an operation performance, there is a possibility that a reach will be established, a possibility that N reach will develop to SP reach or L reach, and a possibility that it will be a jackpot. There is. That is, the first operation performance is a performance that suggests that there is a possibility that a reach will be established, a possibility that N reach will develop to SP reach or L reach, and a possibility that there will be a jackpot.

Furthermore, in the case of SP reach variation (SP jackpot variation, SP loss variation), L reach variation (L jackpot variation, L loss variation), and N loss variation, "by second operation effect" and "third operation However, in the case of A loss variation, it is not normally determined to be the "second operation performance type" or the "third operation performance type." Therefore, when the second operation performance or the third operation performance is executed, it is determined that a reach is established (develops into a reach) after that. That is, the second operation performance and the third operation performance are performances that suggest that a reach is established (develops into a reach).

Further, according to the operation performance type determination table shown in FIG. 65(B), in the fourth embodiment, the jackpot game is executed in the order of first operation performance type < second operation performance type < third operation performance type. This suggests that there is a high possibility.

After determining the operation performance type, the performance control microcomputer 121 sets a command (operation performance start command) indicating the operation performance type that is the result of the determination in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124. The operation performance start command set in the output buffer is transmitted to the image control board 140 through command transmission processing (S4004).

When the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 receives the operation performance start command, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the variable display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3, the image CPU 141 displays the following information on the display unit 50a: An operation promotion performance image G12 is displayed to start the operation promotion performance.

In addition, when performing the operation performance, the performance control microcomputer 121 appropriately measures various times related to the operation performance based on the start time of the special symbol variation performance. The performance control microcomputer 121 then presses the first performance button 40k for the operation performance at the timing when the operation performance is started, specifically when 3 seconds have elapsed since the start of the special figure fluctuation performance. Set the operation validity period during which the operation is valid. As mentioned above, the valid operation time related to the valid operation period is 4 seconds, and the production control microcomputer 121 does not press the first production button 40k after setting the valid operation period, in other words. If the valid operation period elapses without a detection signal being input from the first performance button sensor 40a, the valid operation period ends as it is. On the other hand, the production control microcomputer 121 receives a detection signal from the first production button sensor 40a when the first production button 40k is pressed before the operation validity period has elapsed after setting the operation validity period. When inputted, a command (press operation detection command) indicating that a press operation on the first effect button 40k has been detected is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124. The press operation detection command set in the output buffer is transmitted to the image control board 140 through command transmission processing (S4004).

When the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 receives the press operation detection command, it appropriately erases the operation promotion effect image G12 and ends the operation promotion effect. Immediately thereafter, if the first operation effect or the third operation effect is being executed, the image CPU 141 displays the normal operation result image G40a as the first operation result effect or the third operation result effect. Starts the normal operation result presentation. On the other hand, if the second operation effect is being executed, the image CPU 141 displays the special operation result image G40b and starts the special operation result effect as the second operation result effect.

Note that the image CPU 141 is also configured to be able to appropriately measure the time related to various effects, and after displaying the operation promotion effect image G12 and starting the operation promotion effect, it is possible to measure the time for various effects without receiving a press operation detection command. When the effective operation time has elapsed, the operation promotion effect image G12 is erased and the operation promotion effect is ended. Immediately thereafter, if the first operation effect or the third operation effect is being executed, the image CPU 141 displays the normal operation result image G40a as the first operation result effect or the third operation result effect. Starts the normal operation result presentation. On the other hand, if the second operation effect is being executed, the image CPU 141 displays the special operation result image G40b and starts the special operation result effect as the second operation result effect.

In addition, the performance control microcomputer 121 executes a third operation performance, and in the third operation performance, if a normal operation result performance is executed, the performance control microcomputer 121 presses the first performance button while executing the normal operation result performance. 40k, in other words, when the detection signal from the first production button sensor 40a changes from ON to OFF, a command (release operation detection command) in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124. The release operation detection command set in the output buffer is transmitted to the image control board 140 through command transmission processing (S4004).

The image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 executes the third operation effect, and if the normal operation result effect is executed in the third operation effect, the image CPU 141 executes the third operation effect when one second has elapsed since the start of the normal operation result effect. A valid period of release operation to the first performance button 40k for execution of special operation result performance, in other words, promotion of the operation result performance is set. When the image CPU 141 receives the release operation detection command during the release operation valid period, the image CPU 141 appropriately erases the normal operation result image G40a and ends the normal operation result presentation. Immediately thereafter, the image CPU 141 displays the special operation result image G40b and starts the special operation result effect, in other words, promotes the operation result effect. On the other hand, when the image CPU 141 receives a release operation detection command during the release operation invalid period (the release operation invalid period before the release operation valid period and the release operation invalid period after the release operation valid period), the normal operation result presentation is started. When the first performance time has elapsed since then, the normal operation result image G40a is erased, and the third operation result performance is ended at the same time as the normal operation result performance ends. In addition, even if the image CPU 141 does not receive the release operation detection command between the start of the normal operation result effect and the elapse of the first effect time, the image CPU 141 performs the first operation detection command after the start of the normal operation result effect. When the presentation time has elapsed, the normal operation result image G40a is erased, and the third operation result presentation is ended at the same time as the normal operation result presentation ends.

Next, specific examples of the first operation performance, the second operation performance, and the third operation performance will be described using FIGS. 66 to 71. FIG. 66 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the operation promotion performance that is executed in common between the first operation performance to the third operation performance, and FIG. 67 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first operation result performance. 68 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second operation result effect, and FIG. 69 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the third operation result effect when the release operation is performed during the release operation valid period. FIG. 70 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the third operation result effect when the cancellation operation is performed before the cancellation operation validity period, and FIG. 71 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the third operation result effect after the cancellation operation validity period has passed FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a third operation result effect when a release operation is performed. Note that FIGS. 66 to 71 schematically illustrate the first effect button 40k as a supplement, and also show how the first effect button 40k is pressed and released. Furthermore, in FIGS. 66 to 71, it is assumed that the first normal background image G111 is displayed on the display section 50a.

First, the first operation effect will be explained. As shown in FIG. 66(A), the variable display of the effect patterns EZ1 to EZ3 is started in a superimposed manner on the first normal background image G111, and when 3 seconds have elapsed, as shown in FIG. 66(B), The operation promotion effect forming the first operation effect is started by displaying the operation promotion effect image G12 approximately in the center of the display section 50a. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 66(C), when a time shorter than the effective operation time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed since the start of the operation promotion effect, in other words, during the effective operation period, the first When the effect button 40k is operated, as shown in FIG. 67(A), the operation promotion image G12 is erased, thereby ending the operation promotion effect, and the display section 50a on which the operation promotion image G12 was displayed is By displaying the normal operation result image G40a in a superimposed manner on the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that are being variably displayed at approximately the center, the normal operation result effect as the first operation result effect is started.

As mentioned above, since the presentation time for the normal operation result presentation is 3 seconds, for example, even if 1 second has elapsed from the situation in FIG. The normal operation result image G40a is displayed, and the normal operation result effect as the first operation result effect is still being executed. Then, when 3 seconds have elapsed from the situation shown in FIG. 67(A), the normal operation result image G40a is deleted as shown in FIG. 67(C), so that the normal operation result effect as the first operation result effect is The first operation performance ends at the same time.

Next, the second operation effect will be explained. In the second operation performance, the operation promotion performance is initially executed in the same way as in the case of the first operation performance illustrated in FIGS. 66(A) to 66(C). As shown in FIG. 66(C), when a time less than the effective operation time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed since the start of the operation promotion effect, in other words, during the operation effective period, the first effect button 40k When is operated, as shown in FIG. 68(A), the operation promotion image G12 is erased, thereby ending the operation promotion effect, and the operation promotion image G12 is displayed at the approximate center of the display section 50a. Then, by displaying the special operation result image G40b in a superimposed manner on the fluctuatingly displayed performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3, a special operation result performance as a second operation result performance is started.

As mentioned above, the performance time of the special operation result performance is 3 seconds, so for example, even if 1 second has elapsed from the situation shown in FIG. The special operation result image G40b is displayed, and the special operation result effect as the second operation result effect is still being executed. Then, when 3 seconds have elapsed from the situation shown in FIG. 68(A), the special operation result image G40b is deleted as shown in FIG. 68(C), so that the special operation result effect as the second operation result effect is The second operation performance ends at the same time.

Next, the third operation effect will be explained. First, a case where a release operation is performed during the release operation validity period will be described. In the third operation performance, the operation promotion performance is initially executed in the same way as in the case of the first operation performance illustrated in FIGS. 66(A) to 66(C). As shown in FIG. 66(C), when a time less than the effective operation time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed since the start of the operation promotion effect, in other words, during the operation effective period, the first effect button 40k When is operated, as shown in FIG. 69(A), the operation promotion image G12 is erased and the operation promotion effect ends, and at the same time, the operation promotion image G12 is displayed at the approximate center of the display section 50a where the operation promotion image G12 was displayed. By displaying the normal operation result image G40a superimposed on the fluctuatingly displayed effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3, the normal operation result effect as the third operation result effect is started.

As mentioned above, in the third operation performance, for 1 second to 2 seconds after the start of the normal operation result performance, there is a valid period for canceling the first performance button 40k to execute the special operation result performance. It is. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 69(B) after one second has elapsed from the situation in FIG. 69(A), the normal operation result image G40a is displayed on the display section 50a, and the normal operation result image G40a is When the operation result effect is executed and a release operation is performed on the first effect button 40k during the release operation validity period when 0.5 seconds have elapsed, as shown in FIG. 69(C), the normal operation result image G40a is It is replaced with the special operation result image G40b. In other words, by erasing the normal operation result image G40a, the normal operation result presentation ends, and by displaying the special operation result image G40b in the place where the normal operation result image G40a was displayed, the special operation result image G40b is displayed. The result presentation starts, and the operation result presentation is promoted.

Since the performance time of the special operation result performance is 2 seconds, for example, when 2 seconds have elapsed from the situation shown in FIG. The special operation result presentation ends, and at the same time, the third operation effect ends, resulting in a situation similar to FIG. 67(C) and FIG. 68(C).

In this way, when the first performance button 40k is operated to release during the normal operation result performance that constitutes the third operation result performance and during the release operation valid period, the special operation result performance is executed and the operation result performance is performed. Get promoted.

Next, a case will be described in which the cancellation operation is performed while the normal operation result presentation related to the third operation presentation is being executed and before the cancellation operation validity period has elapsed. As shown in FIG. 70(A), similarly to the case illustrated in FIG. 69(A), by displaying the normal operation result image G40a, the normal operation result effect as the third operation result effect is started, If the cancellation operation is performed before 1 second has elapsed from this situation, in other words, the normal operation result presentation is performed but before the cancellation operation validity period has elapsed, the normal operation will be canceled as shown in FIG. 70(B). The result presentation continues, and the normal operation result image G40a is displayed as before the cancellation operation. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 70(C), even at the start of the release operation valid period, which is one second after the normal operation result image G40a is displayed, the normal operation result effect is continued and the release operation is not performed. The normal operation result image G40a is displayed as before. Furthermore, even at the end of the release operation valid period, which is 2 seconds after the normal operation result image G40a is displayed, the normal operation result effect is continued and the release operation is not performed, as shown in FIG. 70(D). The normal operation result image G40a is displayed as before. After that, when 3 seconds have elapsed since the normal operation result image G40a was displayed, the normal operation result image G40a is erased, thereby ending the normal operation result effect as the third operation result effect, At the same time, the third operation effect ends, and a situation similar to that shown in FIG. 67(C) or FIG. 68(C) occurs.

In this way, if the first performance button 40k is operated to release while the normal operation result performance that constitutes the third operation result performance is being executed and before the release operation validity period has elapsed, the special operation result performance is executed. The normal operation result effect is executed in the same way as when no release operation is performed.

Next, a case will be described in which the cancellation operation is performed after the cancellation operation validity period has passed while the normal operation result presentation related to the third operation presentation is being executed. As shown in FIG. 71(A), similarly to the case illustrated in FIG. 69(A), the normal operation result effect as the third operation result effect is started by displaying the normal operation result image G40a, If one second passes without any release operation being performed in this situation, the normal operation result presentation continues, and the normal operation result image G40a is displayed, as shown in FIG. 70(B). Thereafter, when the cancellation operation valid period ends, which is 2 seconds after the normal operation result image G40a is displayed, without any further release operation being performed, the normal operation result effect continues as shown in FIG. 70(C). Then, the normal operation result image G40a is displayed as before the release operation. For example, when the cancellation operation is performed after the cancellation operation valid period of 2.5 seconds has passed since the normal operation result image G40a is displayed, the normal operation result is displayed as shown in FIG. 70(D). The performance continues, and the normal operation result image G40a is displayed as before the release operation. After that, when 3 seconds have elapsed since the normal operation result image G40a was displayed, the normal operation result image G40a is erased, thereby ending the normal operation result effect as the third operation result effect, At the same time, the third operation effect ends, and a situation similar to that shown in FIG. 67(C) or FIG. 68(C) occurs.

In this way, when the first performance button 40k is operated to release while the normal operation result performance that constitutes the third operation result performance is being executed and after the release operation validity period has passed, the special operation result performance is executed. The normal operation result effect is executed in the same way as when no release operation is performed.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY4, a pressing operation (first operation) is performed on the first performance button 40k (operating means), and a release operation after the pressing operation (first operation) is performed. (second operation), and executes a special operation result effect (specific effect) when a release operation (second operation) is performed on the first effect button 40k (operation means). Therefore, it is possible to surprise the players and improve their interest in the game. In addition, according to the pachinko game machine PY4, when a pressing operation (first operation) is performed on the first effect button 40k (operation means), a normal operation that is related to a special operation result effect (specific effect) is performed. An operation result performance (predetermined performance) is executed, and a special operation result performance (specific performance) is executed when a release operation (second operation) is performed while a normal operation result performance (predetermined performance) is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to further surprise the players and improve their interest in the game. Furthermore, if a release operation (second operation) is performed after 1 second (predetermined time) has passed after the normal operation result effect (predetermined effect) has started, a special operation result effect (specific effect) may be executed. , If the cancellation operation (second operation) is performed before 1 second (predetermined time) has elapsed after the normal operation result effect (predetermined effect) has started, the special operation result effect (specific effect) will not be executed. The performance effect of the operation result performance (specific performance) is improved.

(Example of modification of the fourth embodiment)
Next, a modification example of the pachinko gaming machine PY4 according to the fourth embodiment will be explained. Note that it is also possible to appropriately combine the modification examples described below.

In the fourth embodiment, the operation performance is performed in the normal performance mode, but instead of or in addition to the normal performance mode, it may be performed in other performance modes such as the variable probability performance mode or the time-saving performance mode. You can do it like this. Furthermore, the operation performance is executed in the normal gaming state, but instead of or in addition to the normal gaming state, it may be executed in other gaming states such as a gaming state including a high probability state or a gaming state including a time saving state. It may be possible to do so.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, the operation performance can be executed in the normal variation after the special symbol variation performance has started, but the execution timing of the operation performance can be changed as appropriate. Therefore, instead of or in addition to the normal fluctuation, it is executed when a reach is established, during a reach effect such as N reach or SP reach, when N reach develops from L reach or SP reach, or at the turning point of winning or losing such as SP reach. You may also do so.

Furthermore, although the performance that constitutes the operation result performance is composed of cut-ins, the performance that constitutes the operation result performance is not limited to cut-ins, and may be changed as appropriate. For example, the operation result presentation may be composed of a dialogue preview. In this case, the enhancement of the operation result production may include changing the content of the dialogue or the character who speaks the dialogue. Alternatively, lines by the same character or lines by different characters may be added. Further, in the fourth embodiment, the entire image related to the operation result effect is replaced as the promotion of the operation result effect, but the content of the effect related to promotion is not limited to this. For example, some components related to the image are replaced. It may change, but other components may not change. For example, when the operation result effect is promoted, the displayed content of the image may remain the same, but the size may be changed, such as enlarged. Alternatively, the line drawing portion of the image may remain the same, but the color may be changed by upgrading the operation result effect.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, the operation result presentation is executed by the image display device 50, but the presentation device that executes the operation result presentation is not particularly limited. Therefore, instead of or in addition to the image display device 50, other presentation devices such as the speaker 52, the frame lamp 53, or the board moving device 55 may be used as the presentation device that constitutes the operation result presentation.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, the operating means used for the operation performance is the first performance button 40k, but the operation means used for the operation performance is not particularly limited. Therefore, the second performance button 41k or a cross button (not shown) may be used as the operation means used for the operation performance. In addition, the operation means used for the operation performance is the first performance button 40k, and the first performance button 40k can be pressed down from the normal standby state, and can be pressed and then released to prevent it from being operated. Although the original normal state is returned, the operation mode of the operation means used for operation performance is not particularly limited and may be changed as appropriate. For example, the operating means used for the operation effect can be pulled out from a normal state in which it is not being operated, and may be configured to return to the normal state by pushing back after the pulling operation. . Further, the operating means used for the operation performance may be configured to be able to be pushed forward from the normal state, and returned to the normal state by pushing the operating device forward and then pulling it back. Furthermore, the operating means used for the operation effect is composed of a photo sensor, and the normal state is when no object such as a hand is detected at a specific location, and from there, an object such as a hand is detected at that specific location. Detection is an operation, and even if the device is configured to return to a standby state by changing from a state in which a hand or other object is detected to a state in which nothing is detected at a specific location. good.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, when the first performance button 40k is pressed, a normal operation result performance is executed, and when the pressed state is released, the first performance button 40k returns to the normal state. However, it may be possible to detect multiple stages while returning to the normal state, and after the normal operation result performance is performed, the operation result performance may be promoted to multiple stages. For example, it is possible to detect the state between when the first production button 40k is fully pressed and when it returns to the normal state, and when it is stopped in the middle, the first promotion is performed and the complete state is returned. A second promotion may be performed when the normal state returns. In this case, for example, the period from 0.5 seconds to 1.5 seconds after the start of the normal operation result presentation is the period in which the first promotion is possible, and 2.5 seconds after the start of the normal operation result presentation. The period from 3.5 seconds to 3.5 seconds may be set as the period in which the second promotion is possible.

Furthermore, the operation effect can be executed in the special figure variation effect based on the special figure variation start command, and functions as a production suggesting that a jackpot game may be executed, but the target of the suggestion is It is not limited to the possibility that a jackpot game will be executed, and may be changed as appropriate. For example, when the operation effect is executed as a special figure fluctuation effect, there is a possibility that a effect indicating that there is a possibility that a reach will be achieved or that a specific jackpot game such as SP reach may be executed will be executed. It may be a production that suggests something. In addition, the operation presentation suggests that a specific jackpot game may be executed, such as a jackpot game with a relatively large number of round games executed or a jackpot game with a relatively large number of prize balls that can be acquired. It may be a performance. Alternatively, the operation performance may be a performance that suggests that a specific jackpot game, such as a jackpot game that will be in a high-probability state or a jackpot game that will be in a time-saving state after that, may be executed. Alternatively, the operation performance may be a performance that is executable in a specific round game of the jackpot game based on the opening command and suggests that the jackpot game may continue. In addition, the operation performance can be executed in a specific round game of the jackpot game based on the opening command, and after the jackpot game, it is possible to perform the game more than the normal game state, such as the game state including a high probability state or the game state including a time saving state. It may also be an effect that suggests that there is a possibility that the player will be in an advantageous gaming state.

7. Inventions Disclosed in the Above-mentioned Embodiments The following inventions A to D have been disclosed up to the previous paragraph of this [Detailed Description of the Invention]. In the description of Inventions A to D, the names and expressions of corresponding components in the embodiments of the invention described above, and the symbols used in the drawings are added in parentheses for reference. However, the elements such as means constituting each invention are not limited to this appendix. Invention A is a generic term for the following inventions A1 to A3, invention B is a generic term for the following inventions B1 to B3, invention C is a generic term for the following inventions C1 to C2, and invention D is a generic term for the following inventions A1 to A3. , is a general term for the following inventions D1 to D3.

7-1-1. Invention A1
The gaming machine according to invention A1 is
A variable display of identification information (special map 2) is performed based on winnings in the opening/closable starting area (second starting port 12), and the changing display of the identification information shows that the identification information is displayed in a specific manner (big hit or small win). a game execution means (game control microcomputer 101) that executes a specific game (a jackpot game or a small win game) that is advantageous to the player when stopped and displayed in a mode showing
A production execution means (production control microcomputer 121) capable of executing production;
A gaming machine equipped with a light emitting means (frame lamp 53) capable of emitting light,
The game execution means includes executing a variable display of the identification information a specific number of times (800 times) without stopping and displaying the identification information in the specific manner in a predetermined gaming state (normal gaming state). When a specific condition is established, a specific gaming state (time saving state) in which the starting area is easily opened is set;
The effect executing means causes the light emitting means to emit light in a first light emitting mode when the remaining number of times the identification information is fluctuated and displayed until the specific gaming state is reached due to the establishment of the specific condition is a first number. 1 light emission effect may be performed, and when the remaining number of times is a second number of times different from the first number of times, a second light emission effect may be executed in which the light emitting means is caused to emit light in a second light emission mode. A gaming machine featuring:

7-1-2. Invention A2
The gaming machine according to invention A2 is
A gaming machine according to invention A1,
The effect executing means executes the first light emitting effect and the second light emitting effect when an execution condition including the variable display of the identification information and the fact that none of the specific games is executed is satisfied. A gaming machine with special features.

7-1-3. Invention A3
The gaming machine according to invention A3 is
A gaming machine according to invention A1 or invention A2,
Further comprising a game board (game board 1) in which the starting area is provided, and a front frame (front frame 23m) configured to be openable and closable with respect to the game board,
A gaming machine characterized in that the light emitting means is provided in the front frame.

In addition, according to invention A, to solve the problem A described below regarding the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-88993 as a prior art document, while increasing the user friendliness of the gaming machine, This has the effect of improving the In the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-88993, a jackpot determination is performed to determine whether or not it is a jackpot, on the condition that a game ball enters a starter opening that can be opened and closed. When a jackpot determination is made, a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner to notify the jackpot determination result. When a jackpot determination result is derived from the variable display of the special symbols, a jackpot game involving opening of a jackpot opening that can be opened and closed is executed. Then, after the jackpot game is executed, the opening/closable starting port may enter a time-saving state in which it is easier to open than the normal game state (non-time-saving state). However, there is still room for improvement in gaming machines that can be put into a gaming state in which the opening/closable starting port is easier to open than in the normal gaming state (non-time saving state). Therefore, problem A is to provide a new gaming machine that can improve user-friendliness and increase interest in gaming. Invention A1 solves the problem A by saying, ``In a predetermined gaming state, when a specific condition including that the identification information is displayed in a specific number of times without stopping and displaying the identification information in a specific manner is satisfied. , the effect execution means sets the light emitting means to the first number when the remaining number of times of variable display of the identification information until the specific game state is reached by the establishment of the specific condition is the first number. A first light emitting effect that causes the light emitting device to emit light in one light emitting mode may be executed, and when the remaining number of times is a second number of times different from the first number of times, a second light emitting effect that causes the light emitting means to emit light in a second light emitting mode is executed. The configuration that the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2018-88993 does not have has the advantageous effect of increasing the user-friendliness of the gaming machine and increasing the interest in gaming.

7-2-1. Invention B1
The gaming machine according to invention B1 is
The surface has a predetermined material (photocatalyst) that can be operated by the player and has a first effect of removing harmful substances such as bacteria or viruses by absorbing light, or a second effect of suppressing the proliferation of the harmful substances. The operating means (handle 72k) coated on the
Suggestion that can be executed to suggest a predetermined matter regarding the first effect or the second effect (special audio effect, special light emission effect) depending on the time during which the operating means is not touched (contact release elapsed time) A game machine characterized by comprising a performance execution means (performance control microcomputer 121).

7-2-2. Invention B2
The gaming machine according to invention B2 is
A gaming machine according to invention B1,
The suggestive effect execution means executes the suggestive effect in a first mode (a second special sound effect mode, a second special light emission mode) when the time during which the operating means is not touched is a first time (2 minutes 00 seconds). mode), and if the time during which the operating means is not touched is a second time (4 minutes 00 seconds) different from the first time, the suggestion effect is executed in a second mode (a second mode) different from the first mode. 4. A gaming machine characterized in that the gaming machine is executed in a fourth special sound production mode and a fourth special light emission production mode.

7-2-3. Invention B3
The gaming machine according to invention B3 is
A gaming machine according to invention B1 or invention B2,
It is possible to perform variable display of identification information (special symbols), and when a specific result (big hit or small win) is derived from the variable display of the identification information, a specific game advantageous to the player (big win game or small win game) ), further comprising a game execution means (game control microcomputer 101),
A gaming machine characterized in that the suggestive effect execution means executes the suggestive effect on the condition that neither the identification information is variably displayed nor the specific game is being executed.

In addition, according to invention B, regarding the problem B described below regarding the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2018-88993 as a prior art document, infection prevention against bacteria or viruses such as sterilization and antibacterial treatment is provided. This has the effect of improving the sense of security. In the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2018-88993, a game can be played by firing a game ball by operating a handle provided on the front frame. Incidentally, in recent years, from a sanitary standpoint, the surface of pachinko gaming machines is sometimes coated with a predetermined material containing a photocatalyst, etc., which has antibacterial and antibacterial effects to prevent infection with bacteria and viruses. The player may not be able to determine whether or not the surface of the pachinko game machine is coated with a predetermined material that exerts an antibacterial or antibacterial effect to prevent infection from bacteria or viruses. Therefore, problem B is to provide a new gaming machine that can improve the sense of security regarding prevention of infection by bacteria or viruses, such as sterilization and antibacterial treatment. Invention B1 solves this problem B in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-88993, which states, "It is possible to perform a suggestion effect that suggests a predetermined matter regarding the infection prevention effect against bacteria or viruses depending on the time when the operating means is not touched." The configuration that the gaming machine described in the publication does not have provides an advantageous effect of improving the sense of security regarding prevention of infection by bacteria or viruses.

7-3-1. Invention C1
The gaming machine according to invention C1 is
The judgment information (special pattern random numbers) of multiple mutually different numbers (65536 pieces) is repeatedly updated so as not to overlap until the round is completed, and the acquisition condition (the number of reserved special symbols is less than 4 and the first starting slot 11 is won) When a certain event (e.g., a jackpot game) is established, the judgment information at that time is obtained, and based on the obtained judgment information, a predetermined judgment (jackpot judgment) is made to judge whether or not to execute a specific game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. A game execution means (game control microcomputer 101) that performs
A gaming machine comprising a performance execution means (performance control microcomputer 121) capable of executing a predetermined performance,
If the acquisition condition is satisfied when the predetermined determination cannot be made, the game execution means reserves the right to acquire determination information and make the predetermined determination;
When the judgment information related to one right and the judgment information related to the right that occurred after that are in the same round, the performance execution means executes A gaming machine characterized in that a suggestive performance (special performance) indicating that the specific game may be executed may be executed for a right.

7-3-2. Invention C2
The gaming machine according to invention C2 is
A gaming machine according to invention C1,
When the right to make the predetermined judgment is newly generated while executing the suggestive effect, the effect execution means includes judgment information related to the right to make the predetermined judgment that is the target of the suggestive effect, and the new judgment information. If the judgment information related to the right to make the predetermined judgment that has occurred is within the same round, the suggestive performance is not executed for the newly generated right to make the predetermined judgment. Game machine.

In addition, according to invention C, the effect of improving gaming interest is achieved with respect to problem C described below regarding the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-88993 as a prior art document. In the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2018-88993, when an acquisition condition such as a game ball entering a starting area is met, predetermined determination information is acquired, and based on the determination information, specific information that is advantageous to the player is determined. A decision was made as to whether or not to play the game. By the way, the determination information is composed of numerical values within a predetermined range, and the numerical values are updated so as not to overlap until the predetermined range has been completed. However, there is still room for improvement in gaming machines in which the determination information is updated so that it does not overlap until it goes around a predetermined range, in order to improve the enjoyment of the game. Therefore, the objective C is to provide a new gaming machine that improves gaming enjoyment. Invention C1 solves this problem by saying, ``If an acquisition condition is met when a predetermined determination for determining whether or not to execute a specific game advantageous to the player cannot be performed, determination information is acquired. If the right to make a prescribed determination is reserved, and the determination information regarding one right and the determination information regarding a right that occurred after that are within the same round, the right and the rights that occurred after that. According to JP-A No. 2018-88993, the game machine may perform a suggestive effect that suggests that a specific game may be played. It has beneficial effects that can be improved.

7-4-1. Invention D1
The gaming machine according to invention D1 is
An operable operation means (first production button 40k),
A gaming machine comprising a performance execution means (performance control microcomputer 121) capable of executing a predetermined performance,
The operating means is configured to be able to perform a first operation (pushing operation) on the operating means and a second operation (release operation) after the first operation,
The performance execution means may execute a specific performance (a special operation result performance, or a switch from a normal operation result performance to a special operation result performance) in response to the second operation being performed on the operation means. A gaming machine characterized by:

7-4-2. Invention D2
The gaming machine according to invention D2 is
A gaming machine according to invention D1,
The performance execution means executes a predetermined performance (normal operation result performance) having a relationship with the specific performance in response to the first operation being performed on the operation means, and the performance execution means executes a predetermined performance (normal operation result performance) that is related to the specific performance, The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific effect is executed in response to the second operation being performed when the game machine is playing.

7-4-3. Invention D3
The gaming machine according to invention D3 is
A gaming machine according to invention D2,
The performance execution means executes the specific performance when the second operation is performed during a specific period (1 second) after a predetermined time (1 second) has elapsed since the predetermined performance started, and executes the specific performance during the specific period. The gaming machine is characterized in that if the second operation is performed after the elapse of time, the specific performance is not executed.

In addition, according to the invention D, the effect of improving the interest in gaming is achieved with respect to the problem D described below regarding the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-88993 as a prior art document. In the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2018-88993, when an acquisition condition such as a game ball entering a starting area is met, predetermined determination information is acquired, and based on the determination information, specific information that is advantageous to the player is determined. A decision was made as to whether or not to play the game. Further, an operable operating means is provided, and a predetermined performance may be executed in response to an operation on the operating means. However, there is still room for improvement in gaming machines that are equipped with operating means that can perform operations related to performance, in order to improve the enjoyment of the game. Therefore, the objective D is to provide a new gaming machine that improves gaming enjoyment. Invention D1 solves the problem D by saying, ``The operating means is configured to be able to perform a first operation on the operating means and to perform a second operation after the first operation. A configuration that is not included in gaming machines and described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2018-88993, in which a specific effect may be executed in response to a second operation performed on the means, can improve gaming enjoyment. have a beneficial effect.

PY, PY1 to PY4...Pachinko gaming machine 1...Game board 6...Game area 6A...Left gaming area 6B...Right gaming area 11...First starting port 11a...First starting port sensor 12...Second starting port 12a...Second Starting opening sensor 12k...Electric chew opening/closing member 13...Gate 14...First big winning opening 14a...First winning opening sensor 14k...First AT opening/closing member 15...Second winning opening 15a...Second winning opening sensor 15k... 2nd AT opening/closing member 16...specific area 16a...specific area sensor 16k...distribution member 17D...special distribution device 40...first production button device 40k...first production button 50...image display device 50a...display section 52...speaker 53 ...Frame lamp 72a...Touch switch 72k...Handle 100...Game control board 101...Microcomputer for game control 120...Production control board 121...Microcomputer for production control 140...Image control board 170...Payout control board 192...RAM clear switch

Claims (3)

A game execution means that executes a variable display of identification information based on winnings in a start area that can be opened and closed, and executes a specific game advantageous to the player when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner in the variable display of the identification information. and,
A performance execution means capable of performing the performance,
A gaming machine equipped with a light emitting means capable of emitting light,
In a predetermined gaming state, when a specific condition including that the identification information is displayed in a fixed manner a specific number of times without the identification information being stopped and displayed in the specific manner is satisfied, the game execution means controls the starting area. is set to a specific game state where it is easy to open,
The effect executing means causes the light emitting means to emit light in a first light emitting mode when the remaining number of times the identification information is fluctuated and displayed until the specific gaming state is reached due to the establishment of the specific condition is a first number. 1 light emission effect may be performed, and when the remaining number of times is a second number of times different from the first number of times, a second light emission effect may be executed in which the light emitting means is caused to emit light in a second light emission mode. A gaming machine featuring: The gaming machine according to claim 1,
The effect executing means executes the first light emitting effect and the second light emitting effect when an execution condition including the variable display of the identification information and the fact that none of the specific games is executed is satisfied. A gaming machine with special features. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2,
Further comprising a game board provided with the starting area and a front frame configured to be openable and closable with respect to the game board,
A gaming machine characterized in that the light emitting means is provided in the front frame.

Images